JP2017042244A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of producing a read-ahead forenotice performance improving relevance between a movable body performance and an image display performance in the read-ahead performance subjected to a reservation display.SOLUTION: The game machine includes forenotice performance control means (Figure 33) for controlling execution of a special forenotice performance that can derive, as a performance result, read-ahead information obtained by read-ahead determining a performance result related to a winning before executing a variable display operation of game symbols, using variable performance means (a doll gimmick 93) and image display means (a liquid crystal display device 36). The special forenotice performance is configured to produce a predictive operation performance in which the variable performance means operates in a first operation mode (Figure 54(A)), after the predictive operation performance, produce a special performance used for deriving a performance result on the image display means (Figure 54(B)-(D)), and produce a result performance (Figure 54(E)) using the special performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 54

Description

  The present invention relates to game operation control of a gaming machine.

  A game machine, for example, a ball game machine, performs an internal lottery as to whether or not a hit game is generated when a ball enters the start opening, performs a symbol variation display game, and during the symbol variation display game In the configuration, various notice effects that reflect the results of the internal lottery are displayed to entertain the game.

  In this type of ball game machine, a so-called “look-ahead notice” using a hold display (hold icon image) by an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device is a technique for expressing the high possibility that a hit game will occur. (For example, Patent Document 1 below). This pre-reading notice temporarily holds, for example, the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the start condition based on the fact that the game ball enters the start port during the symbol variation display game and the start condition is established. At the same time, when a pre-reading notice lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform a pre-reading notice effect, and when the pre-reading notice lottery is won, the hold display form related to the hold storage is changed to a display form different from the normal display form. (For example, the display color of the hold icon is changed from white to red). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for winning the winning game for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future.

JP 2013-59671 A

  However, in the conventional ball game machine, when the pre-reading notice is executed, the pre-reading notice is executed only by the image display means such as simply changing the hold icon image related to the newly generated hold memory. The notice production itself was not interesting.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of a game by displaying a novel pre-reading notice effect using not only an image display means but also a movable object as another effect means. It is in.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) Acquiring means (S315, S335 during starting port check processing in FIGS. 10 and 11) for acquiring predetermined game information when the starting means detects a game ball;
Based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, lottery means for executing a lottery for winning (random determination process for special electric accessory operation determination in FIG. 12 (S409));
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, special symbol display data update process (S309) in FIG. 9) for performing a symbol game by a game symbol variable display operation and deriving and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means;
Reservation storage means (reserved in RAM 203) that stores the game information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum reserved storage number until it is used for the variable display operation of the game symbol in the symbol display means. Storage area, S311 to S314 during the special figure 1 start opening check process of FIG. 10, S331 to S334 during the special figure 2 start opening check process of FIG.
Prefetch determination means (S319 in FIG. 10, S339 in FIG. 11) for prefetching at least the lottery result by the lottery means before the game symbol variation display operation based on the hold memory is executed;
Movable directing means (doll gimmick 93) configured to be able to execute directing by movement;
Image display means (liquid crystal display device 36) configured to be able to display effects by images;
Based on a predetermined effect execution condition, using the movable effect means and the image display means, execution control of a special notice effect that can derive prefetch information related to the prefetch determination result by the prefetch determination means as an effect result is performed. Notice effect control means (FIG. 20, FIG. 33, effect control unit 24);
With
The special notice effect is
The movable effect means as a sign effect suggesting that there is a possibility that a special effect (projection N3 (flame bullet item image)) used for deriving the effect result may be displayed on the image display means. A first effect mode (for example, FIG. 54 (A), FIG. 55 (A), FIG. 56 (A), etc.) for executing a predictive motion effect that operates in the first motion mode,
After the first effect mode, a second effect mode (for example, FIGS. 54 (B) to (D), FIGS. 55 (B) to (F), FIG. 56) for displaying the special effect on the image display means. (B)-(F) etc.),
A third effect mode (for example, FIG. 54 (E), FIG. 55 (G), FIG. 55) that executes a result effect that derives the effect result using the special effect that appears in the second effect mode. 56 (G), etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(2) The second production mode is as follows:
After the predictive action effect, the movable effect means operates in the second action mode, and the linked effect (in which the special effect is displayed on the image display means in conjunction with the second action mode by the movable effect means) ( 54 (C), FIGS. 55 (C) to (E), FIGS. 56 (C) to (E), etc.
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that.
(3) The special production is
A first special effect (for example, FIG. 55 (C), FIG. 56 (C) to (D), etc.) and a derivation expectation degree that the prefetch information is derived as the effect result rather than the first special effect. Relatively high second special effects (for example, FIG. 55 (E), FIG. 56 (E), etc.),
The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, wherein

  According to the present invention, the fun of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the game state transition of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of another form about the display of the information regarding the number of operation suspension balls displayed in the liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding addition command analysis process in the received command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special reservation change notice effect setting process in the special notice effect setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the 1st change object reservation lottery process in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the change object reservation lottery process (2nd change object reservation lottery process) of another form in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the change object reservation lottery process (3rd change object reservation lottery process) of another form in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the change display mode lottery process in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the character effect aspect lottery process in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the action effect aspect lottery process in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the concealment effect lottery process in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the disclosure effect aspect lottery process in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the reservation change notice effect scenario setting process in the special reservation change notice effect content lottery process of FIG. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the relationship between the general reservation change notice and special reservation change notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the relationship between the general reservation change notice and special reservation change notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of the gimmick interlocking button notice effect setting process in the special notice effect setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the detail of an operation detection signal reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception process in the reception command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation | designated command analysis process in the received command analysis process in FIG. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 1st effect example of a special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 2nd production example of a special reservation change notice production. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the first half part of the 3rd production example of a special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the second half part of the 3rd production example of a special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 4th example of special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 5th example of special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 6th effect example of a special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the first half part of the 7th effect example of the special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the second half part of the 7th effect example of the special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 8th example of special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 9th effect example of a special hold change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the first half part of the 10th example of a special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the second half part of the 10th production example of special reservation change notice production. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 11th production example of special hold change notice production. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 12th production example of a special reservation change notice production. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 13th production example of special reservation change notice production. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 14th production example of special reservation change notice production. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 15th example of special reservation change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 1st effect example of a gimmick change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 2nd effect example of a gimmick change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 3rd effect example of a gimmick change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 4th effect example of a gimmick change notice effect. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the 5th effect example of a gimmick change notice effect. It is a figure which shows the pending | holding addition command list which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the pending | holding subtraction command list which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for jackpot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for small hits concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the prefetch effect lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the reach production lineblock diagram concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the special reservation change notice effect execution lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the pending | holding change execution lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode level change lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the appearance character lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concealment and re-disclosure frequency lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the action production | presentation aspect table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concealment production | presentation aspect table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the button production execution lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the additional production execution lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the disclosure effect aspect lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the gimmick interlocking button notice effect execution lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which illustrated the gimmick interlocking button notice effect scenario concerning one embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a ball game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 includes a ball removal button 14 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the pachinko hall island facility side. On the other hand, a ball lending button 11 for requesting payout of a game ball and a card return button 12 for requesting return of a valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

  In addition, the upper tray unit 8 is configured so that a player can operate it, and the “frame effect button 13 (used to bring about a change in a specific effect (for example, player participation type effect)) before and after the operation. The operation means for production) ”is provided. For example, when a specific effect occurs, the frame effect button 13 is operable (input reception is possible) when the built-in lamp is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and when the built-in lamp is lit (input reception period). It acts as a production operation means for causing a change in the production by pressing the middle button. In addition, examples of the operation means for production include a button type, a jog dial type, a touch sensor type using a non-contact type sensor, a touch panel type using a liquid crystal display device, and the like in any case. There is no particular limitation as long as it can be used to give some change to the effect when the operation is performed (provides a change in the effect before and after the operation). Further, the type and the number of installed operation means for production are not particularly limited.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at various locations on the glass door 6.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball as a board surface partition member. A substantially circular area surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game ball in a ring shape as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is a member that enables the flow path of game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. Acts as a channel distribution means). In the present embodiment, the game ball 3 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 3a so that the flow path of the game ball is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) of the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms a front mounting plate 48a that is fixed to the game board 3 by a fixing screw or the like, and forms an outer periphery of the center decoration 48, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either. Such a center ornament 48 functions as a game ball drop direction changing member (drop direction changing means) that changes the fall direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with movable objects (such as a clock panel 81, a flower-shaped accessory 90, a gimmick accessory (personal gimmick) 93, which will be described later) and the like that provide a visual effect according to the operation mode. It has been.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. Note that the liquid crystal display device 36 described above displays the decorative symbols by the image in a synchronized manner with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time. (The details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In the various function display units, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display) 38c including a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. “Composite” refers to the display of the number of suspended balls for special symbol 1, which will be described later, the number of suspended balls for special symbol 2, and the variable time shortening function is operating (during time reduction) and during the high probability state (during high probability) This is because it is a hold / short time / high-precision composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions.

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol change display operation expressed by two LEDs (for example, seesaw is alternately turned on and off alternately, and it is determined whether or not it is stopped by either side being lit). As a result, the normal symbol variation display game is executed. In addition, a round number display device 39b in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided. This round number display device 39b functions as a round display means for informing a specified number of rounds related to a big hit (details of “big hit” will be described later). The number of rounds is reported.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first starter) and a lower start port 35 (second special symbol starter: second starter) are provided. The normal variation winning device 41 is provided at the top and bottom, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a and lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each. ing.

  The upper start port 34 which is the first special symbol start port is a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 1”) in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). This is a prize winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation in some cases, which is abbreviated as “Special Figure 1”, and does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). It is configured as a winning device. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by means of the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, a second special symbol starting port. A certain lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device that includes a pair of left and right movable blades (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The award area relating to the start condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation of the lower start opening 35 is determined according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into an open state (easy winning state) that facilitates winning and a closed state (difficulty state that makes winning difficult) or impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) in which a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35 is maintained.

  On both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning ports 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and a total of four general winning ports for detecting the passage of game balls. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) is a winning port related to a normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol starting port for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in each of both flow paths.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, a special variable winning that is configured such that the big winning port 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

  Around the big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. Yes. And if the big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, the downstream guide part ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to move the flowing game balls toward the big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the big prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, and thereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward direction). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the special winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the special winning opening in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is led in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower start opening 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (start opening open state), a game ball can win the lower start opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening opened state), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, in the “large winning opening closed state”, it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable blade 47 of the normal variation winning apparatus 41 is operated.

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b Has a top start port 34, a bottom start port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side. The winning means belonging to the right flow down path 3c include the top start port 34, the bottom start port 35, and the normal symbol start port. 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  The lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is open (start port open state), and a prize can be awarded from either the left or right flow down path. It has become. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 has an operating condition that the game ball passes (wins) the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, the operating condition is substantially. It can be said that it belongs only to the right flow path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down route 3b or the left flow down route 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right flow down route 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that makes it difficult or impossible to guide the game ball to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, three for the upper start opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 40, 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3)). Note that the game balls that have not won the above winning holes are discharged from the game area 3 a through the out port 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a game ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, a winning prize is displayed at the winning slot. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<Moving object>
In the area of the game board 2, a plurality of movable body accessories that provide visual effects are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game ball. In this example, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory) 80 is disposed at an upper right side in the center case 48, that is, at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. A second movable body accessory (flower-shaped accessory 90) is disposed on the side, and a fourth movable body accessory (person gimmick 93) is disposed on the lower side. Further, a push button type revolving light button 66 is constituted by a third movable body accessory (revolving light 62), and this revolving light button 66 is similar to the first effect button (frame effect button 13). It functions as a (second effect button).

(First movable body accessory 80)
The first movable body accessory includes a clock panel portion (numerical display portion) 81 composed of a numerical display portion divided into twelve numerical sectors with numerals of Roman letters “I” to “XII”, and this watch. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a short hand and a long hand that can rotate on the board 81 and can indicate the hour and minute as required, and is configured as a clock-type accessory 80 as a whole. The clock panel 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location (number sector from Roman letters “I” to “XII”) indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of a full-color LED. The number sectors marked with the Roman letters “I” to “XII” can individually emit light in different colors.

  The timepiece-type accessory 80 functions as a “main actor” that operates under predetermined conditions in the case of a big hit or a loss. The clock hand 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 rotates at a high speed, and the number sector of the clock panel 81 is colored with a predetermined “color and number”, which shows the player's winning expectation degree. For example, the winning color expectation for the player increases in the order of the light emission color of the LED of the number sector in the clock panel (numerical display) 81 in the order of white (normal color), blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors. Configure. Here, the clock hands 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 continue to rotate until the symbol variation display operation stops, but the clock hands 82 are configured to stop in the middle of the symbol variation display operation. Thus, the winning winning expectation may be indicated by the number of the number sector indicated by the short hand of the stopped clock hand 82 or by the number and the color of the number sector to be colored. Further, when the emission color of the LED of the number sector in the clock panel (number display unit) 81 emits rainbow color (premium color), the big hit can be determined.

(Second movable body accessory 90)
The second movable body accessory 90 includes a first movable body 91 in which a flower crown A2 including a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower heart A1, and the flower heart A1 and the flower crown A2 can be moved vertically (moved down). And a second movable body 92 configured to attach a bud B1 positioned around the outside of the flower crown A2 to the tip of the stem B2, and to move the bud B1 and the stem B2 in the left-right direction (protrusion movement). The In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are located near one side (right side) of the liquid crystal screen and can operate independently of each other.

  When describing the operation mode, the first movable body 91 is normally located at a home position (original position) above the solid line position (a combined position described later) in FIG. 2 with respect to the liquid crystal screen, and the second movable body. 92 is normally located at the home position (original position) on the right side of the solid line position in FIG. 2 with respect to the liquid crystal screen. The first movable body 91 can move independently from the original position above so that the flower crown A2 comes to the solid line position in the upper right of the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 2, and the second movable body 92 independently moves to the right home position ( It is possible to move so that 萼 B1 comes from the original position) to the solid line position in FIG. When both the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 operate simultaneously and move to the solid line position (combined position) in FIG. 2, the corolla A2 and the eyelid B1 are overlapped and merged, and around the floral center A1. A flower crown A2 is arranged on the outside, and a bud B1 is arranged around the outside to form a “flower-shaped part” in which the flower cover is doubled. In this sense, the second movable body accessory 90 is also referred to as a “flower type accessory”.

  The flower-shaped accessory 90 functions as a “sub-object” that operates under predetermined conditions in the case of a big hit or a loss. When the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are combined, the first movable body 91 (flower heart A1 and flower crown A2) rotates at the tip of the stem portion B2 of the second movable body 92 and the translucent flower heart. A1, the corolla A2 and the bud B1 are illuminated from behind by a lamp or a full-color LED and lightly shines beautifully. These actions increase the expectation of winning the game for the player. When the symbol variation display operation is stopped, the flower-shaped accessory 90 returns from the effect position (combined position) indicated by the solid line in FIG. 2 to the origin position.

  In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 can be independently moved from the upper original position to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. 2, and the second movable body 92 is independently moved from the right home position (original position). It can be moved to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. However, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 may appear or protrude in the liquid crystal screen area, and may be configured to merge there. When configured in this way, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are normally stationary at the original position (not shown) defined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen. However, when a big hit winning ball or a loser winning ball is generated and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable body 91 is moved from the upper side to the lower side, and the second movable body 92 is moved from the right direction to the liquid crystal screen. It moves to an effect position (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 2) covering a part of the screen, and both are united.

(Third movable object)
The third movable body accessory reflects a lamp (or LED) 62a as a light source and light from the lamp 62a in a red translucent enclosure 64 that also functions as an operation unit of the rotary lamp button 66. The rotating lamp 62 includes a reflecting mirror 62b as a reflector to be rotated, and is configured to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source by rotating the reflecting mirror 62b. The third movable body accessory acts as an effect means for making a big hit confirmation notice (so-called “one-shot notification”) during the big hit fluctuation. In the case of a single notification, a notification sound (definite sound) is generated at the same time as the special symbol fluctuation display operation is started, and the special symbol fluctuation display operation is rotated over a long fluctuation period from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation stop. The lamp 63 is activated. That is, the lamp 62a of the rotating lamp 62 continues to be lit and the reflecting mirror 62b is continuously rotated by the stepping motor (movable body motor 61c: FIG. 3). Thus, the player can shockly know that the winning of the probable change is won before the result of the special symbol variation display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  The revolving light 62 has a revolving light switch 65 as a push button revolving light button 66, and when the enclosure 64 (operation unit) of the revolving light 62 is pressed at a predetermined timing, the revolving light is turned on. The switch 65 is turned on, a hit notification sound is generated, and the rotating lamp 62 is activated. The frame effect button 13 that is the first effect button is an effect button (hereinafter, referred to as a “normal button” in some cases) that is frequently used, not all the effect means are operated. The revolving light button 66 of the second effect button is used as a frame effect button that activates all the effecting means including the revolving light 62 and gives a larger effect than the normal button, although the selection frequency to be used is low. .

(Fourth movable object)
The fourth movable body accessory is a movable body accessory formed with a human motif, and a “gimmic accessory (hereinafter“ It is configured as “person gimmick 93”). In the case of this embodiment, the arm 94 and the mouth 95 (see FIG. 54) are configured so as to be able to execute a pseudo action similar to a human. For example, the arm 94 is swung up and down (pendulum motion), and the mouth 95 is opened. It can be closed and closed. The person gimmick 93 can notify information related to the game by the operation mode (the operation mode of the arm 94). For example, if the arm 94 of the person gimmick 93 is operated in a predetermined motion pattern, and this is used as an indication or a precursor effect, and the start of a specific image display effect in the liquid crystal display device 36, the arm 94 operates, In the future, it is possible to predict that some kind of performance will occur and to attract the player's attention. As described above, the “gimmic-linked notice effect” in which the movable object effect by the person gimmick 93 and the effect by other effect means are well linked is very useful for enhancing the visual effect. In the present embodiment, a “gimmic interlocking button notice effect” described later can appear as the gimmick interlocking notice effect.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device according to the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (main control means) 20 that performs overall control (game operation control) related to game operations in general, and an effect control command from the main control unit 20. In response, an effect control unit (effect control means) that comprehensively manages effect operation control (performance appearance control) for effects (image display effects, light effects, sound effects, operation effects of movable objects, etc.) by the effect means ) 24, a payout control board (payout control means) 29 that performs payout control of prize balls, and a power supply board (power supply control means) 31 that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from an external power supply (not shown). , Mainly. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ).

  The ROM 202 functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game operation control, and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ing. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter used for a specific lottery (for example, a variation pattern lottery related to a special symbol), and functions as a random number generating means for generating a random number in software.

  Although not shown in the figure, the main control unit 20 provides a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit), which gives a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) and a time measurement function to the Z80 system, and a CPU. It also has an interrupt controller circuit, a counter circuit, etc. that exhibit an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal. The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number within a certain range in hardware, and a sampling circuit that samples a random value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and as a whole a 16-bit counter work. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, thereby obtaining the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random value (random number size: 65536), and winning the random value Use for lottery. In addition, the main control unit 20 includes a functional unit (backup means) that backs up the return information necessary for returning the gaming state before the power shutdown when the power is shut off.

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34 a for detecting a winning at the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35 a for detecting the winning at the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning at the big winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 43, and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 ( A fraud detection sensor 99 for detecting a goto action) is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. And the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a composite display device 38c, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the main display unit 38c. The main control unit 20 is connected to a round number display device 39b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified round number by jackpot.

  Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external concentration terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 provides information on the game progress (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution number information, etc.). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The hall computer HC is a management computer that manages the operating status of pachinko hall gaming machines based on the above-mentioned information sent from the main controller 20, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

  The main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information related to the special symbol variation display game and information related to errors to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. On the other hand, the payout control board 29 can transmit information related to the payout operation state (payout state signal) to the main control unit 20. This payout state signal detects, for example, various detection sensors formed in the game ball payout device 19 (replenishment detection sensors for detecting insufficient supply of game balls and game balls (prize balls) paid out from the game ball payout device 19). State signal such as a payout shortage signal and a prize ball counting signal. Based on the payout state signal, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally, for example, whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is clogged, and the winning ball is correctly paid out. It is monitored whether or not.

  Further, the dispensing control board 29 can transmit a firing control signal to the firing control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization to a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, a CTC, and a timer interrupt, a counter circuit for generating a random number in hardware, and the like are provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter for effect lottery random numbers used for effect lottery, and functions as a random number generating means for generating random numbers in software.

  The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, light emission control of various LEDs (production LED: not shown), operation control of a movable body accessory, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit mainly controls an effect (image display effect) by the liquid crystal display device 36, and controls video output processing (VDP) that controls overall image output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and VDP. The image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) for image development processing, the VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data developed by the VDP, and the control necessary for the VDP to perform display control A liquid crystal control CPU that outputs data, a liquid crystal control ROM that stores a program describing display control operation procedures of the liquid crystal control CPU and various data necessary for the display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory And it is composed around.

  In addition to the image display effect, the effect control unit 24 displays a light effect, a sound effect, a movable object effect by a movable object, etc. Part) 81 and an optical display control unit for the optical display device 45a including various LEDs, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, various movable body accessories (clock-type accessory 80, flower type) A driving control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable body accessory motors 61a, 61b, 61c, 63a, 63b and the like for operating the accessory 90, the rotating lamp 62, and the person gimmick 93 (arm 94, hand 96)) I have. The production control unit 24 can transmit control signals related to the production means to these control units.

  The effect control unit 24 also includes a position detection switch 97a for the clock hand 82, position detection switches 97b and 97c for the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 of the flower-shaped accessory 90, and position detection for the rotating lamp 62. The switch 97d and position detection switches 97e and 97f for the person gimmick 93 (arm 94, hand 96) are connected, and the effect control unit 24 can receive detection signals from these. The production control unit 24 controls the operation mode while monitoring the current operation position (for example, the movement amount from the origin position) of each movable body accessory based on the detection signal from each position detection switch, and is movable. A malfunction of the body accessory is monitored (whether or not it is a normal operation (for example, whether or not it has correctly returned to the home position after the operation)).

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a frame effect button 13 that can be operated by the player. The effect control unit 24 can receive an operation detection signal from the frame effect button 13.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. Then, make the desired production appear. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns are developed in time series. As a result, a “direction scenario” in a broad sense is realized.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game in the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, if the big win lottery result is “big hit” after the predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the predetermined “big hit” is given. In this mode, in other cases, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” mode, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (proactive game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various developments are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit” (when the big hit lottery result is “hit”), the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When this “big hit” is reached, specifically, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly. As a result, the symbol pattern of “hit” is derived and displayed. Thereafter, the special prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable prize-winning device 52 is actuated to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the special prize opening 50, and from the normal gaming state. However, a special game state (big hit game) advantageous to the player occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls that have won a prize at the big prize opening (the big prize opening) until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses by the opening door 52b. 50 (the number of winning balls) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for an opened winning opening is increased by one operation of an accessory: for example, 9) Until the value reaches the predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 15 rounds) where the winning area is opened or expanded and the big winning opening is closed when either of these conditions is met. Round) repeated. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the special winning opening or only based on the number of game balls won in the special winning opening. Also good.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect for informing that the jackpot is started is performed first, and after the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly composed of game periods of an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. Whether the game is detected by the upper start sensor 34a or the lower start sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether the game is “big hit” or “lost” 'Lottery lottery (win / fail type lottery)', and if it is a 'big hit', the big hit type is drawn, and if it is 'losing', the lottery type is drawn. (If there is only one type of loss, there is no need to perform a lottery for the type of loss, so the lottery can be omitted). Based on the lottery result information, N'ya, a final decision special symbols to be stopped and displayed (special stop symbol). Then, as the effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the winning lottery result information, the variation time of the special symbol, etc.) Send to. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to enrich the production variations, the “decorative design designation command” including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. ing.

  The special symbol variation pattern information may include information designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (such as a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect described later). To explain in detail, the fluctuation patterns of special symbols are broadly divided into “winning fluctuation pattern” in the case of winning and “losing fluctuation pattern” in the case of losing according to the winning lottery result or the big win lottery result. Examples of the variation pattern include a variation pattern for specifying a reach effect (reach variation pattern) that specifies the occurrence of a reach effect, a variation pattern for specifying a non-reach effect (normal variation pattern) that does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect, Designation of pseudo-continuous production that specifies combined production of production and reach production Designation of pseudo-continuous production designating specification (reach variation pattern with pseudo-series), designation of pseudo-continuous production, and designation of generation of reach production A plurality of types of variation patterns such as variation patterns (normal variation patterns with pseudo-continuations) are included. Regarding the variation time for each variation pattern, basically, the reach variation pattern type is a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect that wins the expectation of winning a big hit. The fluctuation time is set longer than the normal fluctuation pattern.

  The effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Deciding the contents to be developed (effect scenario) and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern fluctuation display game by changing the decoration symbols according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbols Is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol displayed on the LED is displayed in a normal symbol display device 39a in a variable manner to start a normal symbol variation display game. After a certain period of time, the result is converted into a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “per assistance”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are on, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state).

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the lower start opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower start opening. Also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are provided a plurality of types of “per assistance (1 to 3 per assistance)” having different contents of the open-circuit game. Specifically, when “1 per assist” is selected (two “◯” LEDs are lit), the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (the operating time during which the lower starting port 35 is opened by the movable blade piece 47) Is set long (for example, 5.8 seconds through open time: long open (long open)), and when “2 per assist” is won (one “○” LED on the left is lit), lower start port The opening time of 35 is set to be shorter than 3 per assistance (for example, 1.0 second through the opening time: middle opening (middle opening)), and when “3 per assistance” is won (one “○ on the right side” "LED is lit", and the opening time of the lower start port 35 is set to be shorter than 2 per assist (for example, 0.2 seconds through the opening time: short opening (short opening)). In other words, the benefits per 1 to 3 per assistance are different depending on the length of the opening time of the lower start opening 35 (the winning rate to the lower start opening 35) given to the player.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open-circuit game, the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 or the normal symbol start port 37, when a winning occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied As a data relating to the right to start the variable display game, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum storage number (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. . The on-hold hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the hold data is also referred to as an “operation hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the fixed number of times of change of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reserve memory number) of the number of the operation reservation balls regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited, and the maximum reserve memory number of each symbol may be different (for example, The maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is 4, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side is 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the normal symbol side is 6, etc.). Moreover, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the symbol side where the profit obtained by the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol 2 is configured to obtain a jackpot type that is relatively profitable for the player. The maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side may be set to 4 more than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a lottery from a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.9). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 2/256) from the low probability (for example, 2/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability) to a higher probability (for example, 255/256) than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as its function unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). In other words, the number of lotteries is improved so that the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as a function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation prize winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same condition as the operation start condition of the special symbol time shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “low probability state” and the gaming state becomes “latency probability”. In the case of “state” or “probability change state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. In addition, during the big hit related to the condition device operation, a winning game is generated when the big prize opening is opened and closed, but all the functions are deactivated for the above functions, and basically the same gaming state as the normal gaming state described above Placed below.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time-shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time-shortening function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, an electric chew support state to which at least an extension function is provided is treated as a “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). Focusing on the presence / absence of the electric chew support state, if the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support state”) is obtained. When the game state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, the state is “electric chew support state present (hereinafter referred to as“ electric support state ”)”. In addition, the gaming state that pays attention to the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support Is referred to as “internal gaming state”.

  Here, in this embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal game state, one internal game state is further classified and managed. For example, the “normal game state (low probability / no electric support)” includes a plurality of types of normal game states such as “normal game state (normal state)” and “CHANCE ZONE state (hereinafter abbreviated as“ CZ ”)”. Thus, the game states can be managed as different game states, and a variation pattern related to each game state can be selected. That is, even in the same normal gaming state, a selection condition (variation pattern selection mode (game mode): later-described variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (see FIG. 66)) for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected. It has become different.

  As a result, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability or the presence or absence of electric support, etc. When paying attention to the “game state”, the same “normal game state”, but with regard to the variation pattern of special symbols, it corresponds to each of multiple types of game states (variation pattern selection mode) of “normal state” and “CZ” The selected variation pattern can be selected. On the side of the production control unit 24, a plurality of types of production modes related to each gaming state are provided, and the production under these production modes can be executed based on the variation pattern.

  In this embodiment, the internal gaming state is the same “latency probability state”, but the gaming state related to the occurrence of the production is managed as “latency probability state” or “CZ”, and the above-described normal gaming state An effect corresponding to the same gaming state as the lower “CZ” can be generated. Thereby, during the “CZ” period, the jackpot lottery probability can be concealed for production. Details regarding the transition conditions of each gaming state and the variation pattern of the special symbol designating the contents of the effect will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, the types of “internal gaming state” when attention is paid to each function related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support, includes the normal gaming state, the latent state, the short time state, and the probability variation state. Internal gaming state is included. On the other hand, the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the type of “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode)” when focusing on the determination of the production, the normal state, CZ more than the types of the internal gaming state (CHANCE ZONE state), a latent probability state, a short time state, and a plurality of types of gaming states are included. In this way, the “internal gaming state” when focusing on each function related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support, and the “gaming state ( By managing the “variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)))” differently, even under the same internal gaming state (for example, under the normal gaming state), the variation pattern allocation A special symbol variation pattern corresponding to a designated number (for example, normal state and CZ) can be selected. As a result, the variation time of the symbol variation display game (game digestion time) and effects related thereto can be greatly changed, and variations of the effects under the same internal gaming state can be enriched. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the game state (variation pattern selection mode (variation pattern fluctuation In some cases, it is simply referred to as “gaming state” without distinction from the minute designation number (Tcode))).

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Type per hit)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform a big hit lottery for multiple types of hits. The hit types include “16R long open probability variable big hit”, “12R long open positive change big hit”, “12R long open non-probable big hit”, “2R short open latent positive big hit”, and “small hit (small hit A, small A plurality of types of hits such as “Batch B and Small C)” are included.

  Among these hits, "16R long open probability variable big hit", "12R long open positive change big hit", "12R long open non-probable big hit", and "2R short open latent positive big hit" are the types of "big hit" that trigger the condition device. The “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device. Here, the “condition device” is a device (means) whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of specific special symbols is displayed, or This means that a game ball is activated when it passes through a specific area in the big prize opening. Each of the hits belonging to the above-mentioned “big hit” type and the hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type (small hits) both have an opportunity to shift to a special gaming state (winning game) with opening / closing operation of the big prize opening (occurrence trigger) It is a hit. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Of the hits belonging to the above-mentioned "big hit" type, "16R long open probability change big hit", "12R long open probability change big hit", and "2R short open probability big hit" have at least a high probability of the gaming state after the big hit game ends. It is a big hit that belongs to a “probability big hit” to be shifted to a gaming state with a state (in this embodiment, a probability variation state or a latent probability state). On the other hand, the “12R long open non-probable big hit” is a “non-probable big hit” in which the game state after the big hit game is not shifted to the game state with the high probability state but is shifted to the game state with the low probability state. It is a big hit to belong. Note that “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

(4-2. Per game)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.16R long opening chance change hit game)
A winning game with 16R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “16R probability variable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds of 16 rounds. The maximum opening time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”. Here, the “long open time” means that there is a possibility that the number of winnings in the big winning opening within the time will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (the possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings is sufficient). It is determined as a time span.

  After the round game is started and the grand prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time elapses, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the prescribed round number of 16 rounds is reached. If not, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the big winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, when the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or when the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the opened big prize opening is met Is closed and the game is shifted to the next round game with a predetermined interval time (12R long open probability change big hit, 12R long open non-probable big hit and 2R short open latent big hit hits described later) The same applies to.

  The above-mentioned “interval time between rounds” between round games is “remaining ball discharge time” and “interval time before opening” after the remaining ball discharge time elapses until the next round game starts. Consists of. The above “remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the closing of the big winning opening. Sufficient time is required until the game ball won immediately before passing through a winning detection switch (large winning opening sensor 52a) formed in the large winning opening. Also, the “interval before opening” means that after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has passed and the remaining balls in the big winning opening are considered discharged, the big winning opening in the next round game is released. A time width (for example, 20 ms) that defines the interval interval. Even if the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during the pre-opening interval, the game ball is regarded as an illegal prize due to an illegal act and is treated as invalid.

(4-2-2.12R long open probability change big hit, 12R long open non-probable big hit hit game)
A winning game with 12R long open probability variable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “12R positive variable big hit game”) and a hit game with 12R long open non-variable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “12R positive variable big hit game”) have a prescribed round number of 12 Except for the round, it is the same as the contents of the 16R probability variation big hit game described above. Accordingly, the 12R probability variation / 12R non-probability variation jackpot game is a jackpot game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 16R probability variation jackpot game (in this embodiment, there is a difference in the number of winning balls for four rounds). .

(4-2-3.2R hit game with short open latency big hit)
In a win game based on 2R short-open latency big hit (hereinafter referred to as “2R latent big hit game”), the specified round number is a big hit with two rounds, and in this embodiment, a big winning opening in one round game. The maximum opening time of 50 is set to 0.1 seconds of “short opening time”. Here, the “short opening time” is defined as a time span in which it is difficult to win a prize winning itself. In the present embodiment, the game ball drop direction changing member (center decoration 48 or game nail), or the performance of the launching device (for example, the rate of continuous firing of the game ball per unit time) or the formation position of the big prize opening, etc. It is impossible to reach the “maximum number of winnings” which is one of the conditions for closing the big winning opening within the “short opening time”. In 2R latent big hit games, the big winning opening 50 is only opened for a short time and the number of round games is as small as two rounds, so it is a big hit game with virtually no winning balls. (Accurately, there is a possibility that a winning of the big winning opening 50 may also occur, but since the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is set to a short opening time, the possibility is extremely low. Virtually no prize balls can be obtained).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of award balls in the big hit game, in other words, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player (the number of winning prize balls) is different according to the type of the big hit. Yes. In addition, although it has been described that the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent large hit game, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long open time as the 16R probability variable big hit game, the 12R probability variable big hit game, and the 12R non-probable big hit game may be set so that the prize winning at the big winning opening 50 is allowed to some extent. It is difficult or impossible to reach, but an opening time (intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time that can secure a certain number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50: 5 seconds). Further, in order to vary the number of winning balls (special prize number: T1Y), the maximum number of winning prizes may be set to a different number depending on the type of jackpot.

(4-2-4. Winning games with small hits (A per small hit-C per small hit))
In a hit game with a small hit A to a small hit C (hereinafter referred to as “small hit game”), the big prize opening 50 is opened twice, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 per round is 2R. It is set to 0.1 seconds, which corresponds to the maximum opening time of the game with a large probability of winning, and the interval time from the closing of the first winning port 50 to the opening of the second winning port 50 is 2R. The same time width as the interval time is set. Also, regarding the closing condition of the big winning opening 50 in the small hit game, whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, 9) Either one of the conditions is satisfied. This is also the same as the 2R latent big hit game. That is, during the small hit game, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same operation mode as that of the 2R latent big hit game.

  Since this “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the “condition device”, a round game like “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 50 in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game was realized, and it seemed as if the 2R short open big hit big win was won. It is possible to dress like In addition, the hit effect during the small hit game (the effect that appears during the hit game) is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the hit effect during the 2R latent large hit game. It has become. In other words, the action related to the small hit game including the hit effect shows substantially the same behavior as the game action related to the 2R short open latency big hit, and which hit game is executed as viewed from the player side. Is difficult or impossible to identify. As a result, even if the player wins a small hit, the player can be given a sense of expectation for winning the 2R short open latent big hit.

(4-3. Game state after the end of the game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game.

(Game state after 4-3-1.16R probable big hit game ends)
After the 16R probability variation big hit game, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the win, it is shifted to the “probability changed state”. In this “probable change state”, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variation display operations (hereinafter abbreviated as “special symbol variation frequency”) is a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, The total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (total variation number of the special symbols 1 and 2)): for example, 10,000 times) until the end or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times ("big hit “Until it is confirmed” may be when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (or after it is confirmed and displayed), or may be a case where a big win is won by a big win lottery. The same probability change state is continued, and when the special symbol fluctuation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the probability change state is ended, and “normal” It is adapted to be migrated to the state. "

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment ends the high-probability state when the special symbol variation display game is completed a predetermined number of times without winning a big win after being shifted to a gaming state where the jackpot lottery probability is at least high. Thus, a probability change machine (number-turn probability change machine (ST machine)) for shifting the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability is provided. Hereinafter, the upper limit number of the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation number) in which the high probability state is continued is referred to as “specified ST number” as necessary. Note that the present invention is not limited to the “ST machine”, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next big hit is determined.

(Game state after 4-3-2.12R probable big hit game ends)
After the 12R probability variable big hit game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the game, it is shifted to the “probable change state”. is there.

(4-3-3.1R gaming state after the end of non-probable big hit game)
After the 12R non-probable big hit game, as shown in the figure, the state is shifted to the “short time state” regardless of the game state at the time of winning the win. When the “short time state” is reached, the short time state is maintained until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the short time state is finished and the next game is shifted to the “normal state”.

(4-3-4.2R game state after the end of the game with a big hit probability)
After the 2R latent large hit game, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning is “normal state”, it is “CZ”, if it is a short time state, it is “probability change state”, and if it is “probability change state”. Transition to the “probable change state” is made. However, when the winning game state is “CZ”, the following transition control is performed according to the internal game state. If the internal game state at the time of winning the big hit is “CZ” in the normal game state, the internal game state is shifted to “CZ” in the latent state, and the internal game state is “CZ” in the latent state. If there is, the process shifts to a “latent state”. In addition, “CZ” in which the internal gaming state is in the latent state is managed as the same gaming state as “CZ” in which the internal gaming state is in the normal gaming state. 'CZ'. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, “CZ” in which the internal gaming state is in the normal gaming state is referred to as “CZ (normal)”, and “CZ” in which the internal gaming state is in the latent state is referred to as “CZ (latent probability)”. There is a case.

  When the game is shifted to “CZ (here, CZ (latency))” after the end of the 2R latent probability winning game, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is completed until the first predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). The “CZ (latency probability)” continues until the big hit is confirmed within the predetermined number of times, or when the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being decided within the predetermined number of times, the “CZ ( The “latency” is completed, and the next game is shifted to the “latency state”. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the 2R latent large hit game is finished, in order to give a sense of expectation of transition to the latent probability state, the 2R short open latency is related to the game state after the small hit game described later. The number of continuations of “CZ” by the big hit is set to a larger number of continuations than that by the small hit.

(4-4. Game state after the small hit game)
After the small hit game, the internal gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is not performed. Therefore, the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal game state after the small hit game are both the same internal game state. This is different from “big hit” in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed.

  However, in this embodiment, the transition control of the “internal gaming state” due to the small win is not performed, while the “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode (described later)” related to the determination of the variation pattern of special symbols (decision of production). The shift control of the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) 66) ′) is performed. Using such a transition mode, for example, when the gaming state after the small hit game and the gaming state after the 2R latent large hit game are shifted to the same gaming state, both stay in the same production mode, Even after the small hit game, it is possible to generate an effect under the same effect mode as after the 2R latent large hit game. As a result, the player can be given a sense of rushing into a high-probability state that the player may win the 2R short-release latent big hit and move to the “latent state”. ing. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4, the game state after each small hit game when the small hit A to small hit C is won will be described in detail.

(4-4-1. Game state after the small hit game when the small hit A is won)
After the small hit game by the small hit A, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the hit. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is “normal state” or “CZ ('CZ (normal)' or 'CZ (latency)')”, the game is shifted to “CZ”. In other game states (latent probability state, short time state, or probability change state), there is no transition of the game state, and the game state at the time of winning is continued.

  When shifting to “CZ” by the small hit A, a second predetermined number of times (for example, once) is set as the number of times the CZ is continued (hereinafter referred to as “CZ continuation number”). . When the small winning A is won and the game is shifted to “CZ”, the big winning is determined until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is completed or within the number of CZ continuing times (for example, once). The “CZ” is continued until the special symbol variation display game is ended without determining the big hit within the number of times. When the game state when “CZ” is ended is “CZ (latency probability)”, the game is shifted from the next game to “latency probability state” and is “CZ (normal)”. The game is shifted from the next game to the “normal state” (the same applies to the small hits B and C described later).

(4-4-2. Game state after the small hit game when winning the small hit B)
After the small hit game by the small hit B, the same shift control as in the case of the small hit A is performed (see the column of the small hit B in FIG. 4). However, the number of continuations of CZ set by the small hit B is set to be larger than the small hit A (one time) (third predetermined number: for example, two times).

(4-4-3. Game state after the end of the small hit game when winning the small hit C)
After the small hit game by the small hit C, the same shift control as in the case of the above small hits A and B is performed (see the column of the small hit C in FIG. 4). However, the number of CZ continuations set by the small hit C is set to be larger than the small hit B (two times) (fourth predetermined number of times: for example, three times).

  The “CZ” is a gaming state that can be shifted to even after the 2R latent big hit game is over. For this reason, in the case of shifting to “CZ” due to winning of 2R short open latent large hit or small hits A to C, each of the effect modes (described later) that makes an effect corresponding to “CZ”. “CZ (CHANCE ZONE) production mode”), and whether or not the internal gaming state is a “latency state” in the production, that is, whether or not the jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state. Is hidden. In this embodiment, although there is a difference in the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function which is an internal function between the normal gaming state and the latent probability state, the mechanical gaming operation state appearing on the appearance is the same state. Pay attention (both are 'no power support state') and give the player a sense of expectation of a high probability state by not letting the player know what kind of gaming state it is in terms of production Can be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the number of CZ continuations, when the 2R short open latent probability is won, 4 CZ continuations are set, thereby shifting to CZ (CZ 4 times) limited to 4 variations. It will be. After this CZ is finished (however, when CZ is continuously finished four times without winning a big or small hit during CZ), the gaming state is shifted from CZ to a latent state, which will be described later. With regard to the performance mode, a transition is made from the “concealed performance mode” in which the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is concealed to the “latent performance mode” in which an effect that can be notified of the latent state is definitive. (Details of the effect mode will be described later). Therefore, if “CZ” is continued four times, the “latent state” is clarified in an effect.

  In this connection, if you win any of the “small hits A to C” where there is no change in the internal gaming state due to winning (no change in the probability status of winning a big win due to winning), depending on the type of winning small hit Thus, the number of CZ continuations (1 to 3 times) that is smaller than that in the case of 2R short open latent large hits is set. Specifically, when winning a small hit A, CZ (CZ 1 time) with a limited number of fluctuations, and when winning a small hit B, CZ (CZ 2 times) with a limited number of fluctuations, If C is won, the game moves to CZ (CZ 3 times) with a limited number of fluctuations of 3 times. As a result, the number of CZ continuations differs depending on the small hits A to C and the 2R short-release latent big hit, and every time the game in the CZ is digested, the “latent state” may reach 4 times that becomes deterministic. It is possible to give players a sense of tension that they cannot do it. With such a CZ, it becomes clear in a short period whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. As a result, the number of games in the concealment effect mode can be prevented from being unnecessarily prolonged, and the player can be engaged in the game without feeling tired.

(About winning in 4-5.CZ)
In the present embodiment, when one of 2R short open latent large hits or small hits A to C is won during “CZ”, the number of CZ continuations corresponding to the winning hit is re-established as a new CZ continuation count. It is set up. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of CZ continuations is four or more when the 2R short-release latent big hit is won. For example, if you win a small hit C and move to CZ (CZ: 3 times) and win a small hit B for the third time in the CZ, the CZ continuation count is reset twice by the small hit B win, The period is extended up to 5 times of “CZ period 3 times + reset twice”. In other words, even if CZ is continued four times, it is not always clear that the state is in a latent state, and a surprisingly rich game can be created.

  Of course, when “CZ” is continued four times, it may be configured that it is clear that the state is in the latent state. For example, as long as you stay in “CZ (Normal)” after shifting to “CZ (Normal)” due to winning a small hit in the normal condition, Even if re-winning, it can be configured so that the number of continuations of “CZ (normal)” does not exceed a maximum of three. In addition, during the normal state, after shifting to 2C short open latent big hit, “CZ (latent probability)” due to winning, one of the small hits A to C was won during the “CZ (latent probability)”. In this case, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the CZ continuation count corresponding to the small hit is not newly set. Thereby, if “CZ” is continued four times, it is possible to create a game such that it is clear that the state is in the latent state.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to create a situation where the latent state becomes clear when the number of CZ continuations is less than 4. For example, if you win 2R short open latent big hit during CZ and win small hit B for the first time after shifting to “CZ (latent)”, CZ continuation count '2 times' by small hit B won again Once set, the CZ period will be "CZ period once won by small win B + 2 times re-set by small win B win", shortened to '3 times' less than the original '4 times' The After the CZ period ends, the gaming state is shifted from CZ to the latent state, and the later-described effect mode is shifted to the “latent effect mode” for definitive notification of the latent state. Thereby, even if CZ does not continue four times, the latent state can be clarified, so that it is possible to create a surprisingly rich game. As already described, when the game state at the time of winning the 2R short open latent large winning is “CZ (latent probability)”, the game is shifted to the latent state after the winning game. The production mode is ended, and the upgrade is made to the latent production mode. Also in this case, the latent state can be clarified with less than 4 CZ continuations.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) corresponding to each gaming state will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes that provide effects related to the gaming state, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. More specifically, during the “normal state” stay, the “normal effect mode” that produces an effect related thereto, while the “latent state” stays, the “latent effect effect mode”, “CZ” that produces an effect related thereto. There are multiple types of production modes according to each game state, such as “CZ production mode” that produces an effect related to this during stay, and “probability production mode” that produces an effect related to this during stay. It has been. The “CZ effect mode” corresponding to the above “CZ” is a “confidential” effect that places the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) in a concealed state and directs the player to expect a high probability state. It plays a role as a production mode. In the present embodiment, in the production mode other than the “CZ production mode” in which the jackpot lottery probability state is concealed, the current gaming state is definitely notified for production.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) includes a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current gaming state (including the internal gaming state), or the gaming state Including information related to the gaming state managed by the main control unit side such as “designating that the game is to be transferred” (for example, a specific production control command (for example, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a gaming state designation command, Main control unit 20 side based on a short-time end command, a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (such as “big hit start interval command (big hit start command)”, “big hit end interval command (big hit end command)”)) In a form that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed in the above, the transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes is possible. The production control unit 24 has a function unit (production state management means) for managing the production mode related to the gaming state. The production control unit 24 (production state management means) grasps the internal game state and variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) managed on the main control unit 20 side by the specific production control command, and the main control unit The production mode can be managed while maintaining consistency with the 20 side.

  Also, in each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative symbol is, for example, “normal” so that the player can understand what kind of game state the player is staying in. Under the “direction mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season “spring” (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of a cherry tree: the first background effect), and under the “latent effect mode”, the season “summer” is reminiscent. Background effect (for example, a background effect for displaying a background image of the sea: second background effect), under the “CZ effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season 'autumn' (for example, a background image of an autumnal tree is displayed) Under the “background effect: third background effect”, under the “probability effect mode”, the background effect reminiscent of the season 'winter' (for example, the background effect displaying the snowy mountain background image: the fourth effect) It is controlled.

  Note that the “CZ effect mode” of the present embodiment is the same effect mode regardless of whether the internal game state is the latent state (high probability state) or the normal game state (low probability state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the “real CZ effect mode (first secret effect mode)” under the latent probability state (high probability state: CZ (latency probability)) according to the internal gaming state and the normal gaming state (low probability state: A “Gasse CZ effect mode (second secret effect mode)” under CZ (normal)) may be provided, and transition control to these effect modes may be possible.

  Specifically, when the small game is won while the internal game state is “normal game state” and the normal game state is maintained, the above “CZ effect mode” of the “CZ effect mode” is set. In the case of transitioning to the “Gase ’s CZ effect mode (low probability)”, while the internal gaming state is “normal gaming state” and “2R short open latency big hit” is won, and transition is made to the latent probability state, it can be a transition control configurable in the "real CZ effect mode (high probability)" of the "CZ effect mode" to the 2R latent 確大 per after game end. In this case, regarding the effects under each effect mode, the background effects of both the “real CZ effect mode” and the “gase CZ effect mode” are made the same (for example, both are associated with the season “autumn”. Background production), the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is kept secret, and the occurrence probability of a specific production differs between the “real CZ production mode” and the “Gasse CZ production mode”. It is possible to give a player an inference element as to whether or not the state is a high probability state (for example, the “genuine CZ effect mode” is more specific than the “gase CZ effect mode”). rendition of increasing the probability of occurrence (to suggest or imply that there is a possibility of latent probability state, "Sen確 expected effect" such), forms and the like such). Such Sen確 expected effect, the current internal gaming state gives a latent probability expectation of whether latent probability state to the player, it is possible to further more interesting game.

(5-2. Production means)
In addition, various effects by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are displayed by the rendering means provided in the gaming machine. Such directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means that can exert a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, and tactile sensations. Light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 and an LED device, a speaker 46, and the like Sound generating device, production display device such as the liquid crystal display device 36, the first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory 80), the second movable body accessory (flower-type accessory 90), and the third movable A movable body such as a body accessory (rotary lamp 62), a vibration device that transmits vibration to the operator's body, a wind pressure device that applies a wind pressure to the player's body, or a visual presentation effect is exhibited by its operation. A movable body accessory is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device. The term “image display device” refers mainly to a type that produces an effect by displaying an image, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device. In addition, the operation of the frame effect button 13 (manual operation means) is performed for a specific period (for example, a predetermined operation effective period during a notice effect with a relatively high expectation degree of winning a big hit), in an inoperable state (for example, There may be provided special effect means for preventing the frame effect button 13 from being pressed) or in an operation difficult state (for example, making it difficult to press the frame effect button 13), or vibration with respect to the manual operation means. A vibration device for providing the above may be provided.

<6. Notice production>
Next, the notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24, under the above-described effect mode, the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (for example, winning lottery result, reach effect) On the basis of the presence / absence of the symbol and the variation time of the special symbol, etc.), a function unit (preliminary appearance appearance control means) that controls various notice effects related to the effect mode and the jackpot lottery result is provided. The notice appearance appearance control means of the present embodiment includes information included in the “variation pattern designation command” and / or “decoration symbol designation command” (for example, winning lottery result information, presence / absence of reach production, special stop symbol type information ( Based on the classification information), the special symbol variation time information, etc.), various announcement effects can be controlled.

  Such a notice effect mode suggests (notifies) the reliability or expectation level (hereinafter referred to as “winning expectation degree”) of whether or not the winning type has been won, and the player's winning expectation to the winning type It works as a “scoring effect” to give a sense of feeling (expectation of winning per win). Representative examples of the notice effect include “reach effect”, “pseudo-continuous effect”, “prefetching notice effect”, “button notice effect”, and the like.

  The “winning expectation degree” varies depending on the appearance rate (selection rate) of the performance and the gaming state. For example, the expected winning degree in the reach effect changes mainly according to the appearance rate (selection rate) of the reach effect. Specifically, the expectation of winning a win when one reach effect (for example, SP reach) appears is the ratio of the reach effect including the time of a big win and the loss (total appearance rate of the reach effect) ) In the case of a big hit, it is indicated by the ratio (the appearance rate of the reach effect at the time of winning). In other words, the winning degree expectation level for the reach production is indicated by “appearance rate of the reach production at the time of winning / total appearance rate of the reach production”. The selection rate for reach production is set. Hereinafter, the notice effect according to the present embodiment will be described.

(6-1. Reach production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode with a reach state (variable display mode with a reach state: reach change pattern). Specifically, a final game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. Such a production aspect. This “reach state” means that some of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game will generate a big hit (winning win) before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a decorative pattern that has not yet been derived and displayed is displayed in a state that constitutes a part of the display mode to be displayed, in other words, a display mode that indicates the occurrence of jackpot is easy to be derived A variation display mode that can be reminiscent of a player (that there is a possibility of winning a big hit). For example, when the combination of decorative symbols indicating the occurrence of a big hit (winning winning) is “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, and “7 (right symbol)”, the decorative symbol is displayed on a predetermined hit effective line. Is a part of the display mode indicating that the jackpot is generated (winning winning) (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol indicate “7”, so-called “listening state (reach symbol)) )) The decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed (here, the middle symbol that does not form the hearing state (reach symbol)) is stopped, oscillated, enlarged or reduced, or deformed continuously for a predetermined period of time. The state where the possibility of big hits continues before the result is displayed and the state. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become “big hit”, but the finally derived result shows a stop display mode (for example, “7 (Left symbol) "" 7 (middle symbol) "" 7 (right symbol) "), the game result of this time is" lost ".

  The above “reach production” is a notice (suggestion) of the degree of expectation of winning a win (there is a possibility of a big win (including the fact that it will be a big win)). Reach production is included. For example, when a specific reach effect appears, there is a case in which a winning expectation degree is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect ('normal reach (N reach) effect) appears. Such a specific reach production is called 'super reach (SP reach)'. Many of these “SP reach” have a relatively long production time (fluctuation time) than N reach in order to win a winning expectation to win. For example, N reach is about several tens of seconds, while SP reach requires a production time of 1 minute or more.

  In addition, “reach production” is staged from N reach to SP reach, or from one SP reach to another SP reach that has a higher win-winning expectation than that. Step-up “Development type reach production (see fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 in FIG. 68 to be described later)”, a non-reach production that does not go through the reach state (normal fluctuation) is revealed and finally derived The result (combination of decorative symbols) is a stop display mode that indicates a big hit, “Sudden hit reach production”, a display mode that shows a predetermined variation time and a big hit, via or without reach state (winning display) A premium “full-rotation reach effect” can be included, such that a variation display is performed while holding the aspect), and the winning display is confirmed with the variation display.

  In the reach effect of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of reach effects are provided according to each gaming state (see FIGS. 64 and 65). The degree of expectation of winning winning in the reach production varies mainly depending on the selection rate of the reach production and the gaming state. For example, in the relationship between the reach types in the normal state, “N reach <SP reach 1 <SP reach 2 <... <SP reach 6 <SP reach 7”. As described above, the selection rate (occurrence rate) is determined in relation to the big hit lottery result (the same relationship is applied to other game states). Note that the actual winning expectation degree can change depending on whether other notice effects (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a pre-read notice effect described later) are involved. For this reason, for example, even if the SP reach 5 appears, if a notice effect with a high level of expectation for winning wins is involved, a win expectation degree equivalent to or higher than the SP reach 6 can be obtained.

  When a reach effect appears, specifically, in the case of an effect scenario including a reach effect (in the case of an effect mode based on a reach variation pattern), it occurs in a predetermined effect time width after the reach state (listening state) is formed Decorations that occur within a predetermined production time period after the end of the reach production, via “reach title (reach title production)” and “reach production” that occurs with a predetermined production time width after the reach title production. After the “design temporary stop state” of the symbol is finished, the game result is derived and displayed (decoration stop display of the decorative symbol), and the symbol variation display game is finished.

  The “reach title production” refers to the production time width (for example, 4 seconds) of the “reach title production” that occurs in a predetermined production time width after the reach state is formed, and “reach production” means the reach title production. This refers to the production time span of “reach production” that is started later. The production period of this reach production is provided with a production time width according to the reach type. In the above “reach title”, for example, a title screen for notifying what kind of reach effect is generated this time is displayed, and after the title screen is displayed for a predetermined time, the corresponding reach effect is executed. (Appears)

  The “symbol temporary stop state” is the stage before the end of the reach effect and before the end of the decorative symbol variation display game (before the special symbol is fixedly displayed on the special symbol display device: FIG. In step S451, before the elapse of the special symbol accessory operation timer, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (design temporary stop state) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). In terms of performance, the game result of the current symbol variation display game is derived and displayed in this symbol temporary stop state, and the symbol variation display game (decorated symbol variation display game) is terminated after the symbol temporary stop state is completed. . However, in the “symbol temporarily stopped state”, the result of the current symbol variation display game is not necessarily derived and displayed. For example, when the “SP reach type” is displayed when the big win lottery result is a win, a combination of decorative symbols indicating a loss (lost stop display mode) is temporarily displayed in the temporary stop state of the symbol. A combination of decorative symbols (hit stop display mode) may be derived and displayed as a game result (so-called “revival effect”). Thus, when a reach effect occurs, the player can have a winning expectation until the final game result is derived and displayed, thereby improving the fun of the game. The “symbol temporarily stopped state” described above is different from a temporarily stopped state of a decorative symbol related to a “pseudo-continuous effect” described later (during the symbol temporary stop before the decorative symbol re-displaying operation).

  When the N reach type appears, it is composed of a production scenario including at least “N reach (N reach production)” and “design temporary stop state”, and the SP reach type appears. Includes a production scenario including at least “during reach title”, “during SP reach (during SP reach)”, and “design temporary stop state”. In the advanced reach type, basically, a plurality of reach are sequentially displayed such that the second reach is executed after the first reach.

(6-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
In the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pseudo continuous”) is provided as one aspect of the “notice effect”.

  “Pseudo-ream” refers to a production mode with a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. “Pseudo variation” refers to a part or all of a decorative symbol in a decorative symbol variation display game. Is temporarily stopped (a change stop operation that looks as if it has been stopped), and the display operation is repeated once or multiple times. Thus, it is a variation display mode that expresses the appearance that the decorative symbol variation display operation is executed a plurality of times during a single symbol variation display game. This is different from a “prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games.

  When performing this pseudo-variation, for example, while forming a temporary reach state (a variation display mode that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state or that a reach pattern is formed), Execute a re-variable display operation after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols that causes a loss, or replace a normal decorative pattern with a special decorative pattern (a special decoration that suggests the possibility of the occurrence of pseudo-ream) It is possible to execute a re-variable display operation after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols including a symbol (pseudo continuous activation chance symbol). Therefore, in the pseudo-continuous effect, in addition to the effect aspect that expresses as if the decorative symbol variation display operation is executed a plurality of times during the appearance of one symbol variation display game, the above-mentioned “ Using the “pseudo-continuous activation chance symbol”, one or more pseudo-variations are executed while suggesting to the player the possibility of the occurrence of pseudo-variation (in a production mode in which the player can recognize the occurrence of pseudo-ream) The effect aspect to be performed can be included.

  The occurrence rate of such “pseudo trains” is basically determined such that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the winning expectation expectation. For example, according to the number of pseudo-variations, This is used as a notice effect for raising the expectation of occurrence of a relatively high reach type (SP reach). That is, as the number of pseudo fluctuations increases, it is possible to expect an SP reach type having a relatively high winning expectation level.

  Therefore, in the case of an effect scenario including a reach effect (in the case of an effect mode based on a reach variation pattern with a pseudo effect), the above “pseudo-ream” occurs in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach effect). For example, one or a plurality of pseudo-variations are performed as a notice that there is a possibility of reach production or a specific reach type, and the reach state is reached after the pseudo-variation is completed. The final game result is derived and displayed via (reach effect). In the case of a production scenario that does not include a reach production (in the case of a production mode based on a normal variation pattern with pseudo-continuations), after the above pseudo variation is completed, it does not go through a reach state (reach production), that is, a normal variation. Is executed and the final game result is derived and displayed. Here, the fluctuation display operation executed after the pseudo fluctuation is completed is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, when the reach state is passed, the reach effect is executed in the main fluctuation and the final movement is performed. The game result is derived and displayed. When the reach state is not passed, the normal variation is executed in this main variation, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In addition, in the case of the production mode accompanied by the pseudo-ream and the reach production, different production modes of “pseudo-run” and “reach production” are combined, but this is not particularly necessary in this specification. As far as possible, the reach production with pseudo-ream is treated in the same way as the “reach production”.

  Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 shows a fluctuation pattern that does not designate a pseudo-ream. However, the normal fluctuation type, N reach, or SP reach type (specifying The reach type (for example, SP reach 4 to 7 if normal, SP reach 2 to 3 if time is short, SP reach 2 to 3 if probable, etc.) may be used. Alternatively, it is possible to include a quasi-continuous variation pattern that executes a plurality of quasi-reams. For example, taking normal SP reach 1 as an example, the normal medium SP reach 1 type includes a plurality of types of normal medium SP reach 1 such as “pseudo N times + normal SP reach 1 (for example, N = 2 to 4)”. Can be included. In the present embodiment, the expression “pseudo N times (N = 2, 3, 4)” means a series of variable display operation times N (pseudo continuous times) including the pseudo continuous and the main change. For example, when “pseudo 2 + SP reach” is described, a variation display operation mode (spurious run twice), that is, “pseudo change once + SP reach of main change”, that is, SP reach is executed after one pseudo change. Means. Similarly, when “pseudo 3” or “pseudo 4” is described, “pseudo fluctuation 2 + main fluctuation (for example, SP reach, N reach, normal fluctuation)” or “pseudo fluctuation 3 times + main fluctuation (for example, , SP reach and N reach) ”. In this specification, for convenience of explanation, a series of fluctuation display operation times including pseudo fluctuations and main fluctuations may be referred to as “pseudo continuous times”.

  In the case of including the above-described variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 2 times + normal SP reach 1 (pseudo 2 times reach variation pattern with pseudo continuous), “pseudo 3 times + normal SP reach 1 (pseudo 3 times)”, and “pseudo 4 times + normal SP reach 1 (pseudo 4) ) ”Is determined, the selection rate can be appropriately determined in consideration of the winning expectation degree. For example, paying attention to the fact that the expectation of winning is increased as the number of pseudo-continuations increases, the selection rate at the time of losing can be in a relationship of “no pseudo> pseudo 2> pseudo 3> pseudo 4.” Further, a special pseudo-ream reach variation pattern (for example, pseudo 5) that is selected only when a big hit is won may be determined.

(6-3. Button notice effect)
The “button notice effect” refers to an effect mode in which the content of the effect can change depending on whether or not the player has operated the frame effect button 13, and the so-called “player participation type” effect mode. Say. For example, due to the operation of the frame effect button 13, the hold display (hold color) or a specific character image changes or a special sound effect is generated. In the “button notice effect”, it is possible to suggest the winning expectation degree or to notify the predetermined game information by using the change of the effect before and after the operation of the frame effect button 13. Such a “player-participation-type” performance mode can give the player a feeling as if he / she has influenced the game result, so that the fun of the game can be increased. The button notice effect includes a “button display effect” that prompts the operation of the frame effect button 13, and the contents of the effect that are subsequently developed depending on whether or not the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button display effect. Are different. The effect time width of the “button display effect” is basically an effect time longer than the operation effective period (predetermined input acceptance effective period) of the frame effect button 13 or substantially the same time width (button notice) (Production ≥ Input acceptance valid time). In the present embodiment, one aspect (fourth effect example of FIG. 57 to be described later) of “gimmic interlock button notice” and “special hold change notice” to be described later is, in a broad sense, an effect aspect that belongs to this “button notice effect”. It has become.

(6-4. Pre-reading notice effect)
In addition, the notice effect indicates that there is a possibility that a winning ball will be won for an operation holding ball (undigested operation holding ball) that has not yet been provided for the execution of the symbol change display game (the change display operation of the special symbol). There is a “pre-reading notice effect” that informs in advance of (the expected degree of winning). Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (when a start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of a special symbol). Before being provided, “pre-fetching determination” is performed to determine in advance the winning lottery result relating to the operation-reserved ball (steps S317 to S318 in FIG. 10, steps S337 to S338 in FIG. 11 (random number determination processing to special Stop symbol data creation process))).

  Further, using the above “pre-fetching determination” result, a special symbol variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation) is determined in advance in the future when the activated ball is subjected to the symbol variation display game. “Pre-reading variation pattern determination” is performed (see step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11 (start-up winning random number determination process)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, the reach variation pattern (reach variation pattern) for specifying the reach effect via the reach state (reach variation pattern), or the non-reach effect designation not via the reach state Of the normal fluctuation patterns for use (normal fluctuation patterns), it is determined in advance what normal fluctuation pattern is to be obtained.

  Note that the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result (preliminary determination result of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery in the present embodiment), and therefore the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. Includes information on whether the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a “hit fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including a small hit) or a “loss fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a loss. When the information on the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing related to the prefetch notice effect. A series of processes for determining the prefetch variation pattern through the prefetch determination in this way is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  Specifically, when the “hold addition command” including the information of the prefetch determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 and the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, the prefetch determination included in the command is received. An effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect based on the content of the result is performed. This hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and is composed of data on the upper byte side for designating the number of active hold balls at the time of prefetch determination, and lower byte side data that can specify the contents of the prefetch variation pattern (see FIG. 5A, see FIG. 59). Therefore, the hold addition command includes the operation hold ball information (special drawing type information (separate of the special drawings 1 and 2) and the operation hold ball number information) and the prefetch variation pattern information.

  However, the effect control unit 24 does not necessarily cause the pre-reading notice effect to appear when the hold addition command is received. If the pre-reading notice effect is determined by lottery and the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executable, The pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed at the timing when the operation holding ball is generated, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game to be performed first, or at a predetermined timing during the game. be able to.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation holding ball is generated does not necessarily need to be the “variation pattern at the start of variation” obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the change display operation. Absent. For example, a case where the variation pattern at the start of the variation is a variation pattern designating “normal SP reach 1” will be representatively described.

  In this case, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “SP reach 1” but, for example, paying attention to the winning expectation expectation, “SP reach 1-2” When viewed as a “variation pattern belonging to“ weak SP reach production ”with a relatively low degree of expectation”, the fact that it is the “weak SP reach” type, which is the main point, is designated. It is possible to specify that “weak SP reach” is a “weak SP reach” in which fluctuation patterns of the same system are collectively classified. In the prefetching notice effect related to this case, a production mode related to the prefetched “weak SP reach type” appears.

  Similarly, if the variation patterns of the same system are grouped by paying attention to the winning winning expectation degree, “weak SP reach type (for example, normal SP reach 1-2)”, “ Medium SP reach type (for example, normal medium SP reach 3-5), “strong SP reach type (normal medium SP reach 6-7). The effect modes related to each of the SP reach types that are the main points such as “weak SP reach type”, “medium SP reach type”, and “strong SP reach type” will appear.

  In addition, a case where a plurality of types of variation patterns belonging to “SP reach 1” are defined, for example, “normal SP reach 1 (no pseudo-continuous)”, “pseudo 2 times + normal SP reach 1 (pseudo 2 times pseudo) The number of pseudo-continuous times is different, such as “reach variation pattern with continuous”, “pseudo 3 times + normal SP reach 1 (pseudo 3 times)”, and “pseudo 3 times + normal SP reach 1 (pseudo 4 times)”. When a plurality of types of SP reach 1 are defined, they can be grouped together as a variation pattern of the same system called “SP reach 1” type. In the pre-reading notice effect related to this case, an effect mode related to the pre-read “SP reach type 1” appears.

  Therefore, the main information that is notified by the pre-reading notice effect is that there is a high possibility that a roaring effect (in this case, the SP reach type) with a high expectation of winning winning is likely to occur for a symbol variation display game to be executed in the future It is information such as whether it is low, in other words, whether the probability of winning a big hit is high or low, and by notifying the player in advance of such information before the operation holding ball is digested, this time In addition to the symbol variation display game, the player's interest is improved not only in the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, but also the fun of the game is improved.

(6-5. Prefetching notice effect mode: FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, FIG. 6)
Next, referring to FIGS. 5A, 5 </ b> B, and 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode will be described. FIG. 5A and FIG. 6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetching notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and show an example of the prefetching notice effect.

  First, referring to FIG. 5A, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is partly on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the drawing, below the display area of the decorative symbol). A holding display area 76 for displaying the number and a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided. : Solid line in the figure) or in the off state (no operation hold ball: broken line in the figure), information on the current number of hold balls is notified. In the case of the present embodiment, the display mode (shape, display color, etc.) of the operation holding ball in each holding display area 76, 77 is easy to identify which special symbol corresponds to the operation holding ball. Accordingly, different hold display modes are used. In the example shown in the figure, the shape for displaying the operation holding ball is “round” in the holding display area 76 corresponding to the special symbol 1 side, whereas in the holding display area 77 corresponding to the special symbol 2 side, the shape is displayed. The shape is “star”.

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation hold ball (hereinafter referred to as “hold display”) is displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four hold displays can be displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77. ing. Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the rightmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, on-hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number. A2-d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. In the figure, there is shown a case in which there are three operation holding balls of special symbol 1 and three operation holding balls of special symbol 2, and a holding display corresponding to special symbol 1 is shown as a holding display in which an operation holding ball exists. The reserved display parts a1 to c1 in the area 76 are displayed with white circles (solid lines), and the reserved display parts a2 to c2 in the reserved display area 77 are displayed with white stars (solid lines) corresponding to the special symbol 2, The display portions d1 and d2 are not displayed (in the drawing, broken circles and dashed stars). The positional relationship between the hold display area 76 and the hold display area 77 can be changed as appropriate.

  These hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are normally switched to the operation state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three, as the number of operation hold balls existing when the prefetch determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a pre-reading notice lottery for drawing whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. The operation holding ball won in the pre-reading notice lottery is a target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the holding display part c1 with hatching in FIG. 5 corresponds). The winning probability by the pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and in the case of the reach type with a relatively high expectation of winning, the pre-reading notice effect is generated. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon that is the target of the prefetching notice is, for example, a normal holding display (normal holding display mode) ) White (usual hold color) to a special hold display (dedicated hold display mode) hold color (dedicated hold color) such as blue, yellow, green, red, or rainbow color in the notice display A pre-reading notice effect of “display change system” is performed. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors on the hold icon mean that the winning winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. In particular, the display of the rainbow color hold icon confirms the jackpot (Accurate) This is a premium hold icon. This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern. In other words, “big hit” is more likely to be selected than “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation of winning, a reserved color with a high expectation of winning is selected with a high probability. ing. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but, for example, related to the winning expectation degree like an icon imitating a special character. The display can be changed to a special display mode based on a predetermined color and / or pattern (for example, see FIG. 72B). Thus, the notice effect using the hold display mode is referred to as “hold change notice”. Further, the “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect as described above is also referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect because it is triggered by the occurrence of an operation holding ball.

  In the above, when a hold change notice occurs for the hold display (hold icon) related to the operation hold ball, the following depending on the display mode by the color and / or pattern related to the expected winning degree after the change Game information can be notified. For example, taking the reserved color as a representative example, as described above, in addition to notifying that the expected winning degree per winning in the order of “white, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow” is high, , That there is a possibility that a reach effect will occur (for example, the reserved color is blue or more), that the reach effect is definite (for example, the reserved color is yellow or more), information about the reach effect type (for example, If the reserved color is yellow, N reach or more is confirmed, if it is green, SP reach is confirmed or more, and if it is red, the SP reach type (SP reach 6-7, etc.) that has a relatively high expectation of winning winning ))), The presence or absence of pseudo-reams, the number of times, etc. can be notified.

  In addition, when the display mode of the hold display (hold icon) changes, it basically changes in accordance with the order of expectation of winning winning. Specifically, it is possible to step up step by step from a display mode indicating that the winning degree of winning expectation is lower than a display mode indicating that the expected degree of winning win is higher than that. For example, in the case of a one-step step-up, the reserved color changes by step-up such as “white → blue”, “blue → yellow”, “yellow → green”, “green → red”. However, the reserved color is not limited to one step up by one step, but can be stepped up by two steps such as “blue → green” and four steps such as “white → red” (for example, described later) 71 of FIG. Hereinafter, predetermined game information notified by the pre-reading notice effect (for example, information regarding the winning expectation degree, the above-described reach type, presence / absence of pseudo-ream and the number thereof) is referred to as “special game information”.

(About pending game execution)
In addition, on the right side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, an operation hold ball actually used for the symbol variation display game (hereinafter referred to as “game running hold”), that is, a symbol variation display game is in progress. An in-fluctuation display area 78 is provided to indicate the operation hold ball that has become. In the case of this embodiment, a receiving seat J icon is displayed in the changing display area 78, and an icon image (holding) of the game running suspension is displayed on the seat J icon (game running display area K). An image in the form of an icon K) is displayed. That is, the oldest hold icon (hold icon of hold display part a1 or hold icon of hold display part a2) displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 when the variable display of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is started. However, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J as a pending icon during game execution, and the display state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

  When the hold icon K is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and is used in the current symbol variation display game. It is possible to notify the player of a pre-reading notice (dedicated hold display mode) for the operation hold ball even during the game. However, in the present embodiment, the game-in-progress hold can appear in a display mode different from the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77. For example, the display color of the icon changes or changes to another shape at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game. For example, predetermined game information (a winning winning expectation degree or pseudo-continuous generation (pseudo-continuous generation)) that changes to a holding display mode in which the winning winning expectation degree is relatively higher than the holding display mode displayed in the holding display areas 76 and 77. Number of times) and reach production (the type)). As a result, the degree of winning winning expectation regarding the special symbol variation display game of this time is more clearly notified, and the winning expectation feeling using the hold display can be obtained even during the symbol variation display game. In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the “game execution hold icon” or the “game execution hold display area K” is referred to as “game execution hold K” without distinction.

  The existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation hold ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation hold ball is moved up (shifted to the right in order), and the number of display is reduced. Display control is performed, but the above-described dedicated hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change system (change system at the time of winning a prize) is a “continuous notice that a dedicated notice effect is displayed across multiple symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It can be said that this is an aspect of “production”. This continuous notice effect is executed across a plurality of symbol variation display games, and is different from the notice effect performed during one symbol variation operation like a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, the “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. This “change start at the time of change” pre-reading notice effect is, for example, by displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, which is executed in one or more symbol fluctuation display games, This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system” in which the image is displayed continuously or continuously. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. The right to execute is temporarily stored, and a pre-reading notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is to be performed. If they exist, the symbol variation display game is expressed in some relevance for all or some of the reserved memories. For example, in all or some of the symbol variation display games relating to the existing operation holding balls from the oldest operation holding ball to the operation holding ball subject to the pre-reading notice in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (Preliminary image 365 imitating lightning bolt), a combination of decorative symbols exclusively for prefetching notices (prefetching stop decorative symbols), and the like are displayed. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is configured so that the change system at the time of winning and the pre-reading notice at the start of change can be displayed, the pre-reading notice effect of at least one of the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change appears. It is possible to configure such that the winning change system and the change starting change system can appear independently. For example, (a) only the winning change system (holding display changing system) is executed, (b) only the change starting change system (image display changing system) is executed, (c) the winning change system and change starting change Various execution forms such as executing both of the systems can be adopted. In the present embodiment, the configurations (a) to (c) are configured to be executable. Specifically, the prefetch notice lottery effect at the time of winning and the prefetch notice effect of the change system at the start of change are each drawn independently by the prefetch notice lottery, and any of the above (i) to (c) It is determined whether to perform the prefetching notice effect or not to execute the prefetching notice effect itself.

  Therefore, even if the “previous change system” look-ahead notice effect appears, the “variation start change system” look-ahead notice effect does not necessarily appear, and vice versa. Even if the “system” prefetching notice effect appears, the “previous change system” prefetching notice effect does not necessarily appear. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at winning (holding display changing system)” and the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at start of change (image display changing system)” may occur in duplicate (simultaneously).

  As described above, because the pre-reading notice effect of the change system at the time of winning and the pre-reading notice effect of the change system at the start of variation are configured to be able to appear independently, different operation holding balls that precede and follow in time series The target pre-reading notice effect may be executed in a duplicated manner. However, if the pre-reading notice effect for the new action-holding ball occurs repeatedly during the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect that is currently being generated is the action-holding ball that was generated earlier in time series (the old action-holding effect) It is unclear whether it is a look-ahead notice effect for a ball) or a new look-ahead notice effect for a new action-holding ball, leading to confusion for the player or the expectation level related to the notice effect. It causes problems such as unclearness. Therefore, for example, during the pre-reading notice effect of the winning change system (holding display changing system), a change start time changing system (image display changing system) for a new operation holding ball appears (executed). Or during the pre-reading notice effect of the change system at the start of change, it may be configured to restrict the appearance of the change system at the time of winning for the new active ball.

(6-2. Example of pre-reading notice effect: FIG. 6)
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system) This shows a case where the winning combination was changed to the pre-reading notice lottery of the starting change system. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) illustrates the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game.

  In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the chances of winning the winning prize during this symbol variation display game, the expectation for the big hit is combined with the contents of the pre-reading notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced. In Fig. 4 (4), it was explained that the lightning effect at the beginning of the change ended at the end of the occurrence of this symbol change display game. Since it is a symbol variation display game related to a holding ball, there is little need to generate a lightning effect in the game. Therefore, it is good also as a structure which does not show the lightning effect of a change system at the time of a fluctuation | variation start in the symbol fluctuation display game which concerns on the action reservation ball | bowl which became the prefetch notice object. In this case, the change-ahead look-ahead notice effect at the start of variation ends with the end of the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

(7. Production system belonging to pending change notice)
As one aspect of the pre-reading notice effect, it has been described that there is a “holding change notice” using the hold display form. However, in the present embodiment, the following hold change notice can be displayed. In the present embodiment, (A) simply “general hold change notice (pre-read notice notice of normal winning change system (hold display change system))” that changes the display mode of the hold icon, and (B) the general hold change described above. Instead of simply changing the display mode of the hold icon as in the notice, a story tailoring effect scenario is developed, and as a result of the effect, a special hold change notice (FIG. 37 to be described later) can be changed. (See FIG. 53B) 'and (C) The story tailoring effect scenario is developed in the same way as the special hold change notice, but the display mode of the hold icon is exclusively through the operation of the frame effect button 13 (button notice effect). A “gimmic interlocking button notice effect (see FIGS. 54 to 58 described later)” that can be changed can be displayed.

(6-3: Another form of the hold display areas 76 and 77: FIGS. 5A and 5B)
In FIG. 5A, an example in which the information regarding the number of suspended balls for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is displayed in the holding display areas 76 and 77 provided at the top and bottom at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has been described. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 5B, the number of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be collectively displayed in one holding display area 76h. In the example of FIG. 5B, one hold display area 76h shows a display that can hold up to 8 hold displays.

  Here, in the case where two types of operation holding balls corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed in one holding display area 76h, the order of displaying them is provided for the symbol variation display game. It is preferable to display in order (holding digestion order). In FIGS. 5B (A) and 5 (B), the game is displayed in the order provided to the symbol variation display game (holding order) from the side close to the game running hold K (right side).

  In the display example of FIG. 5B (A), when there is an operation holding ball in both the operation holding ball of the special symbol 1 and the operation holding ball of the special symbol 2, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested. This is an example of a hold display area suitable for the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the “priority change function”. In this display example, the hold display of the special symbol 2 on the priority change side is in a hold display form in which the display is always displayed at a position close to the game running hold K (or the seat J) in the changing display area 78. . For example, if the operation holding ball scheduled to be digested next is the operation holding ball of the special symbol 1 which is the non-priority variation side, the holding icon of the special symbol 1 is set to the game execution holding K in the changing display area 78. Although it is displayed at the closest position, if an operation reservation ball of the special symbol 2 on the priority change side is generated as a new operation reservation ball during this display state, the hold icon of the special symbol 2 is displayed as a special reservation ball. A special occurrence occurred at the display position where the hold icon of special symbol 1 was displayed, ie, interrupted and displayed in the hold display portion between the display position of the hold icon of symbol 1 and the game running hold K The hold icon related to the operation hold ball of symbol 2 is displayed in an interrupted manner, and the hold icon of the operation hold ball of special symbol 1 is shifted to the left by one.

  On the other hand, FIG. 5B (B) shows an example in which the display is performed in the stored order (the winning order) regardless of the type of the special symbol from the side closest to the game running hold K in the changing display area 78. ing. In this display example, a holding display area suitable for the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the “non-priority variation function” in which the operation holding balls are sequentially digested in the order in which they are held and stored (in the order in which the prizes are won) is illustrated. FIG. 5B (B) shows a hold display form that can notify the player that the operation hold balls are digested in the order of winning.

(7-1. Special Hold Change Notice Effect Mode: FIGS. 37 to 53B)
Next, the “special hold change notice” using the hold display mode displayed on the liquid crystal screen will be described in detail.

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the special hold change notice, first, an outline of the special hold change notice will be described. The “special hold change notice” includes an effect mode (FIGS. 48 and 49 described later) belonging to a “button notice effect” that is a player participation type effect and a “normal notice effect” that is a player non-participation effect. Production modes (FIGS. 37 to 47 and FIGS. 49 to 53B, which will be described later). The special hold change notice belonging to the former “button notice effect” can change the hold display (hold icon) when the frame effect button 13 is operated, and the latter special notice belonging to the “normal notice effect”. In the hold change notice, the button notice effect is not displayed, and the hold display can be changed as the effect time elapses.

  Specifically, in the case of the production mode belonging to the former “button advance notice production”, when the special hold change notice is started, as a part of the production scenario, the “on hold” is displayed such that the hold display is temporarily hidden. “Display concealment effect (confidential effect)” appears, and during this concealment effect, a “button notice effect” prompting the operation of the frame effect button 13 appears for a predetermined effect time. The predetermined time after the button notice effect appears is set as an input reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the frame effect button 13, and whether the player has performed an operation within this input reception valid period. Whether or not is monitored. If the player operates the frame effect button 13 during this input reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), the above-described concealment state is canceled (the end of the concealment effect), and the concealed hold display mode is changed to the button operation. It can be redisplayed in a state changed to a display mode different from the previous display mode (display mode before concealment) (derivation of effect results). Special game information (predetermined game information such as information related to winning winning expectation and information related to reach type) is notified to the player by using the hold display mode after the change.

  On the other hand, in the case of the production mode belonging to the latter “normal notice production”, the “button notice production” does not appear because of the non-participation production of the player. The production scenario is expanded in chronological order, for example, the on-hold display is concealed → the on-screen display concealed state is released (end of concealment production) → the on-hold display mode is re-displayed (derivation of the production result)] It has become so.

  The special hold change notice is a notice effect mainly for the hold display (hold display portions a1 to d1, a2 to d2) in the hold display areas 76 and 77, but the game display hold in the variable display area 78 is being held. K can also be included in the object (see FIG. 38 and the like described later). The special hold change notice is an aspect of a pre-read effect form belonging to the “hold change notice” in that it is a notice effect using the hold display form. Hereinafter, in the present specification, unless particularly necessary, the “hold display” or “hold display” relating to the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 and the game execution hold K icon are not particularly distinguished. Sometimes referred to as a “hold icon”.

(Execution opportunity for special hold change notice (execution lottery opportunity))
Note that the special hold change notice is triggered not only by the occurrence of an action hold ball (winning prize), as in the case of a pre-reading notice effect (general hold change notice) of a winning change system. Sometimes when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when there are multiple hold indications when an operation hold ball is generated, or when a general hold change notice is scheduled for the previously stored operation hold ball) , A predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game (for example, at the start of the symbol variation display game (at the start of decoration symbol variation), or any one of the above-mentioned reach title, reach production, and symbol temporary stop state) For example) or a predetermined timing during a big hit game (eg, at the start of a specific round game, during a specific round game, at the end of a specific round game, The presentation start time, etc.) can be provided with the execution timing of such. However, in the case of the present embodiment, when executing the special hold change notice, it is ensured that an effect time width required for executing the special hold change notice is secured (for example, straddling a plurality of symbol variation display games during execution). "Appropriate appearance conditions" are ensured, such as the case where there is no hindrance to the performance execution, such as when a big hit game is started in the middle of execution, or other special notice changes are not significantly obstructed by the execution of special hold change notice (This will be described later in step S601 in FIG. 21).

(7-1. Special Hold Change Notice Effect Mode: FIGS. 37 to 53B)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 53B, the effect mode of the special hold change notice described above will be described. FIG. 37 to FIG. 53B are explanatory views for explaining the effect mode of the special reservation change notice according to the present embodiment.

  The special hold change notice is an aspect of the pre-read notice effect belonging to the “hold change notice” as described above, and the hold display form (hold display sections a1 to d1, a2 to d2) corresponding to the existing operation hold balls. This is a notice effect using the displayed hold display (hold icon). Therefore, the special hold change advance notice is performed based on information on the prefetch determination result (prefetch per hit determination and / or prefetch fluctuation pattern determination information), and as a result of the special game information related to the operation hold ball (winning expectation expectation) Degree, reach type, etc.).

  Here, in the special hold change notice according to the present embodiment, not only the hold display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, but also the hold K during the game execution is targeted (see FIG. 38 described later). Since the game-in-progress hold K is displayed as a hold icon for the currently running symbol variation display game, the effect result by the special hold change notice is basically based on the pre-read determination result information. It is based on the fluctuation pattern information at the start of change, and information related to the jackpot lottery result at the start of change (information on the winning winning expectation level and reach type related to the current symbol change display game) is the production result. Can appear as Of course, the pre-read determination result information based on the hold data acquired at the time of winning may be used for the hold K during game execution.

  The special hold change notice according to the present embodiment is merely a hold of the “change system at the time of winning a prize” in which the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are effected, because the hold K during the game can be set as the notice object. Compared to the change notice effect (general hold change notice), there are more variations of the effect, improving the fun of the game. Note that whether the hold display including the on-hold hold K during game execution is subject to the special hold change notice or whether the hold display excluding the game run hold K is subject to the special hold change notice is appropriately determined according to the game characteristics. (For example, refer to a fifth effect example (FIG. 42) described later).

  The special hold change notice will be described below with reference to FIGS. 37 to 53B (first to fifteenth example effects). FIG. 37 to FIG. 53B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the special hold change notice.

(First special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 37)
First, with reference to FIG. 37, a first effect example of special hold change notice will be described. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first effect example of the special hold change notice. In addition, (A)-(F) of illustration has shown the time-series effect transition state in this order (FIGS. 38-53A and FIGS. 54-58 are also time-sequentially in order from (A) of illustration similarly. It shows the stage transition state).

  In the first effect example, when a special hold change notice is generated when a plurality of operation hold balls are stored, that is, when a plurality of hold indications are displayed, as the effect result, It exemplifies a special hold change notice effect mode in which any one of them can change to another hold display mode (dedicated hold display mode).

  Specifically, in the first effect example, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed, the change of the plurality of hold displays is prohibited (prohibition of a duplicate hold change notice), and a predetermined priority (priority) One hold display to be changed is selected based on the hold change order), and any one of the plurality of hold displays is allowed to change. In other words, any one of a plurality of existing operation holding balls (in this embodiment, including the game execution holding K. The same applies hereinafter) is set as the target of the holding change. Here, as the “predetermined priority order”, an example is shown in which a hold display (hold icon) corresponding to an active hold ball having the highest expectation of winning winning among existing active hold balls is set as a target of a hold change notice. The level of the winning expectation is determined based on what the look-ahead variation pattern related to the operation holding ball is, or if the content is the variation pattern that is determined at the start of the variation if the game is on-hold K. (For example, refer to FIGS. 22 to 24 and 70 described later). In addition, when the winning winning expectation degree is the same for all the operation holding balls, one of them is determined as a target of the holding change notice by lottery. Hereinafter, the first effect example will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, referring to FIG. 37 (A), FIG. 37 (A) shows a display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36 before the special hold change notice appears. Here, a hold icon (hold image) indicated by a white circle is displayed on each of the hold display portions a1 to c1 of the hold display area 76, and a game running hold K indicated by a white circle is displayed on the icon of the receiving seat J. The case that is being shown. That is, a case is shown in which three special symbols 1 of action holding balls are currently stored on hold, and a special symbol variation display game corresponding to special symbol 1 is being executed (special symbol 1 is in a variation display operation). .

  Next, when the special hold change notice is started, as part of the production scenario, on the right side of the game running hold K, as the character image, “Character (Teruteru Shabu ) L ”and“ Character Appearance Production ”appearing as“ Cannon M ”as an item image simulating weapons. Note that the character effect image used in the character appearance effect is displayed after selecting one of a plurality of types of character effect images (see FIG. 26 (character effect mode lottery process described later). ), FIG. 73 (appearing character lottery table)). For example, one of a plurality of types of character effect images related to the level of expectation of winning winning can be selected (the same applies to other effect examples). In this example, a case where “character A (+ cannon M)” shown in FIG. 73 described later is selected by a predetermined character lottery is shown. In this way, by introducing a character according to the winning expectation degree, it is possible to give a guessing element of the winning expectation degree to the player in the stage before the effect result of the special pending change notice is derived. Can greatly increase the expectation of winning. In addition, together with the appearance character and the effect of the special hold change notice, it is possible to give the player an estimation element of the expected winning degree related to the existing operation hold ball.

  Next, moving to FIG. 5C, when the production scenario proceeds, an “action production” by the character L and the cannon M is executed. Here, as the action effect, an effect (artillery effect) scenario that expresses the process from when the character L operates the cannon M to the time when the bullet N is landed is developed. Specifically, the character L operates the firing angle of the cannon M so that the inside of the hold display area 76 is the landing point of the cannonball N, and then fires the cannonball N at a predetermined timing. Then, an image display effect such that the fired bullet N is landed in the hold display area 76 appears.

(Hold display concealment effect (hold icon (icon image) concealment effect))
Next, moving to (D) in the figure, when the fired ammunition N reaches the hold display area 76, the explosion R is generated so as to cover the three hold icons displayed in the hold display portions a1 to c1. The expressed “smoke production” appears. The explosion effect accompanied with this explosion (explosion image) R works as a “hold display concealment effect (hereinafter referred to as“ confidence effect ”)” that conceals at least the hold display (hold icon) relating to the existing operation hold ball. . In the case shown in the figure, in the on-hold display area 76, an effect mode in which the on-hold icon images of the on-hold display portions a1 to c1 excluding the on-hold display portion d1 in which no operation holding ball exists is covered with the explosion image R is displayed. Therefore, a concealment state (hereinafter referred to as “confidential state”) for concealing the hold display (hold icon) is made to appear. This concealment state is temporary, and when a predetermined production time elapses, a later-described disclosure effect (see (E) in the figure) is executed so that the concealed hold display unit is redisplayed. It has become.

  Here, the “confidential state” means that at least the on-hold display mode is in a state where it is difficult to discriminate (difficult to visually recognize) or indistinguishable (invisible). As a typical example, as shown in the present embodiment, the currently held display (the hold icon image itself) is made indistinguishable by a dedicated secret image (explosive smoke R) (in the drawing, the operation holding ball is shown). Presence / absence itself is also concealed), and when multiple hold indications (hold icon) are being displayed, the hold color (color), the shape of the hold icon, For example, a pattern or a picture may be changed to a display mode that is the same or very similar, and the difference in each hold display mode is controlled to be difficult or impossible to be determined.

(Current hold display secrecy effect)
In the case of the present embodiment, when the hold display is set in a concealed state, as shown in FIG. 37 (D), a hold display section (here, the hold icon display of the hold display section d1) in which there is no operation hold ball from the cover target. The hold display section excluding (region) is set in a concealed state (current hold display concealment effect). The reason is as follows. If the entire hold display area (76, 77, 76h) or the hold display part (a1 to d1, a2 to d2: the entire hold image display area) is concealed, a new operation hold ball is generated during the concealment state. In such a case, the hold display is also kept secret. For this reason, it is because the player cannot recognize whether there is an active holding ball by winning the start opening in the concealed state, or how many the active holding balls are present, and feels uneasy. . Therefore, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable to exclude the hold display portion (here, the hold icon display area of the hold display portion d1) where the operation hold ball does not exist from the concealment target.

(Hold display area (all hold display area))
However, not only the on-hold display (on-hold icon) that is being displayed is concealed, but also the entire on-hold display section including all on-hold display (on-hold icon) that has not yet appeared, as shown in FIG. The hold icon) may be concealed (hold display area (all hold display portion) concealment effect). FIG. 53B shows a concealment effect example in which the entire on-hold display area (76, 77, or 76h), or at least the on-hold display portions (a1-d1, a2-d2: on-hold icon image display areas) are all in a concealed state. . This concealment state is simply performed for the entire hold display area or the entire hold display section without searching for the number of the hold display currently displayed or performing image processing for the hold display. Therefore, it is preferable that the effect control process can be simplified (the burden of the effect control process is reduced).

(Hold display semi-confidential production)
In the present embodiment, the presence / absence of the operation holding ball itself is concealed by the explosion R, but the presence / absence of the operation holding ball itself can be kept in a concealed state (hold display semi-confidential effect). . For example, the hold color and shape of the hold icon are concealed so that the type of the hold display mode cannot be discriminated, but only the outline of the hold icon is displayed and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball itself can be discriminated. An embodiment is mentioned. In this case, it is possible to clearly notify the current number of suspended balls even during a secret effect. For this reason, the player will not feel anxiety that if the concealment occurs, the current number of active balls will not be known, and the special hold change notice will be displayed for the current symbol change display game and the next game. When the game is executed across the display game or when an operation holding ball is generated, the increase / decrease in the number of operation holding balls can be known, so that the production can be enjoyed with peace of mind. The same applies to the 2nd to 15th effects).

  In addition to the hold icon of the hold display portion in the hold display area (76, 77, or 76h), the concealment target may include the game running hold K in the changing display area 78 as in the present embodiment. it can. In this case, the target of the change on hold is the game execution hold K related to the currently running symbol variation display game and the hold display related to the operation hold ball of the symbol variation display game scheduled to be executed in the future. The game information that can be notified by can notify special game information related to the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed and the symbol variation display game that is scheduled to be executed in the future. 37 to 53B, the game execution hold K in the changing display area 78 and the hold icon in the hold display section in the hold display area (76, 77, or 76h) are concealed objects (changes in hold change). The target embodiment) is illustrated, but from the viewpoint of “pure pre-reading notice” in which an action holding ball that has not yet been used in the symbol variation display game is to be noticed, the game running hold K is concealed. You may exclude from the concealment object by an effect (the same is true of other effect examples (second to fifteenth effect examples)).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37, next, in FIG. 19E, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the concealment state by the explosive effect in FIG. 37D occurs (for example, several seconds later), the explosive effect (confidential effect). Is ended, and the three hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been concealed by the blast R and the hold K during the game are gradually (gradually) revealed (redisplayed). The “disclosure effect (hold redisplay effect)” is executed. However, the disclosure effect here is that all the hold display (three hold icons of the hold display units a1 to c1 and the hold K during game execution) which are in a concealed state are disclosed all at once or substantially at the same timing. Specifically, the explosion R covering the all on-hold icons gradually disappears, and the concealed on-hold icons are revealed all at once (on-hold display simultaneous disclosure effect). Also, as already explained, when a hold icon is disclosed, duplicate changes in hold display are prohibited, so if a hold change occurs, one of each hold display based on a predetermined priority order. One hold display is redisplayed (disclosed) in a state in which the hold display mode before concealment (for example, the normal hold display mode) is changed to another hold display mode (dedicated hold display mode).

  FIG. 6E shows that the display color (hold color) of the hold icon of the hold display part b1 is “normal hold color (for example, white)”, which is the normal hold display mode, by executing the disclosure effect. The case where it is disclosed in a state where it is changed to “dedicated reserved color (for example, green)” is shown. At this time, “telop display effect” in which the character L issues a message P such as “Succeeding to No. 2!” Is also executed as an effect of reporting which hold display is the target of the pre-reading notice. It is like that. As a result, the player is informed that, among the three existing action-holding balls (holding indication), the second action-holding ball whose order of change is scheduled has been subject to the pre-reading notice, and the second Information related to the symbol variation display game related to the action-holding ball (information related to the pre-reading determination result), for example, a special game such as the fact that the winning expectation is relatively high or that SP reach may occur Information is notified beforehand (for example, refer to FIGS. 71 to 72 described later related to the display mode). Note that the notification content by the above-mentioned telop display effect does not notify which operation holding ball is the target of the pre-reading notice, but notifies special game information such as the winning degree of winning and the reach type. You may comprise. For example, as message P, “The next symbol change display game is very hot!” “The third hold is a big win winning decision!” “The expectation of winning the third hold is 50%!” A telop display effect in which the character L issues a message such as

  Here, the hold display mode when all the hold displays are disclosed does not necessarily change from the hold display mode before concealment. That is, it includes a kind of “gase effect” in which no on-hold change occurs. Note that this gasse effect is the same for the pending change notice effect shown in FIGS.

  Turning to FIG. 5F, when the above-described disclosure effect is finished, the “end effect” is executed to hide the character L and the cannon M and notify the end of the special hold change notice. Thus, a series of special hold change notices will end.

  In this way, in the special hold change notice according to the first effect example, all the existing hold displays (the hold display in the hold display area and the game running hold K) are once set in a concealed state, and the concealment is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The state is canceled and the hold display is set to the disclosure state. And when disclosing a hold display, it is the production | presentation form that any one hold display aspect can be disclosed in the state changed into the hold display aspect different from the pre-confidential display among the secret hold displays. The post-change hold display mode is associated with the level of expectation of winning winning and the variation pattern type (for example, SP reach type). Predetermined special game information such as the contents of the reach effect to be executed can be notified in advance. Note that the special game information to be notified can be determined as appropriate according to the gameability (the same applies to FIGS. 38 to 58).

  In the first effect example, the example in which the hold color changes as the hold display mode has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image of the hold icon itself may be changed (the same applies to other effect examples (second to fifteenth effect examples described later)). Specifically, the hold icon may be changed to a hold icon that is larger than usual (it may be changed to a huge hold icon that protrudes from the hold display area), and is different from a circle or a star. The hold icon having a shape (for example, a rectangular shape or a hexagonal shape) may be changed, or the hold icon may be changed to another icon image (for example, an image of a character or a vehicle). By associating these changed hold icons with the level of expectation of winning winning and the variation pattern type (for example, reach type), it is possible to win a symbol variation display game to be executed in the future or a symbol variation display game currently being executed. It is possible to notify in advance the winning expectation and the contents of reach production.

  Moreover, various timings can be provided for the start timing of the special hold change notice effect according to game playability. For example, as the start timing related to the symbol variation display game, the timing at the start of the symbol variation display game, the start of the reach effect, the predetermined timing during the reach effect, the predetermined timing before the start of the reach effect (for example, before the start of the reach effect) For example, at the start of execution of the title notice effect to be executed). Further, in the case of “developed reach production” that develops to another reach production after one reach production (for example, SP reach production that develops to a specific SP reach after N reach: for example, the fluctuation in FIG. The special hold notice effect can be executed with the end of the one reach effect as a trigger or the start of the other reach effect as a trigger. In this way, by giving the start timing related to the symbol variation display game, a novel announcement effect such as “A pending change notice will appear in association with this symbol variation display game” appears. It becomes possible.

  Also, a special hold change notice may be executed during the winning game. The winning games are mainly divided into an opening production period, a round game period (1R to final R), and an ending production period, but with special holdings triggered by a predetermined timing in each period or the start / end of each period You may comprise so that a change notice may be performed. If the hold display changes during a hit game, in addition to the blissful feeling of the current hit game, there is a possibility that a so-called “reserved in-game chain” will occur in the symbol variation display game related to the active hold ball. It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation that suggests

  Such special hold change notice differs greatly from the conventional prefetch notice effect (general hold change notice) in the following points. The general hold change notice is an effect intended for each hold display, and the player's attention cannot be collected for all the hold displays being displayed. On the other hand, in the special hold change notice, a hold change may occur when all the existing hold displays are once hidden and then redisplayed. You can collect at once. In addition, the greater the number of the operation hold balls (hold display) in the concealed state, the more enjoyment of the hold change can be given to the player.

  In addition, since the game running hold K is also subject to the advance notice, what kind of result will be the result of the running symbol variation display game, what the winning expectation level is, or the development destination Information related to the current symbol variation display game result, such as what kind of reach is, can be notified in advance. Thereby, the variation of the notice effect can be made more varied than the pre-read notice effect only for undigested operation holding balls as in the prior art. Also, in addition to other notice effects that appear during the symbol change display game, if a special hold change notice for the game running hold K occurs, the effect during the symbol change display game can be effectively boosted. Since this is possible, the fun of the game can be further improved.

(Second special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 38)
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the second effect example of the special hold change notice will be described. In this second effect example, a plurality of hold icons can be changed to a dedicated hold display mode. This second effect example prohibits duplicate hold change notices as in the first effect example, in that “a plurality of hold indications can change”, that is, “a plurality of hold change notices are allowed”. Thus, it is different from a mode in which only one hold display is allowed to change. In the following, description of the contents of the effects similar to those in the first effect example will be made while omitting appropriately in order to avoid redundant description.

  FIG. 38A shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36 before the special hold change notice appears, and here, the same case as the first effect example is shown.

  When the special hold change notice starts, as shown in FIGS. (B) to (D), as in the first production example, the character L and the cannon M appear as “Character Appearance”. "Direction", "Action effect" by character L and cannon M, and "Explosive effect (secret effect)" in which bombardment N lands on hold display area 76 and generates smoke R are executed in sequence. The three hold icons displayed in the parts a1 to c1 and the game running hold K are kept secret.

  Next, moving to FIG. 5E, when the explosion effect is finished, the three hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been kept secret by the explosion smoke R and the hold K during the game are disclosed ( The disclosure effect to be redisplayed is executed.

  The difference between the second effect example (FIG. 38 (E)) and the first effect example (FIG. 37 (E)) is that a hold change for a plurality of hold displays is allowed. Here, the display color (hold color) of the hold icon of the hold display unit b1 is disclosed in a state where the normal white color (normal hold color) is changed to a dedicated hold color (for example, green), and the game is held during execution. A case where the display color of K is disclosed in a state where the display color is changed from white to a dedicated reserved color (for example, green) is shown. At this time, a “telop display effect” in which the character L issues a message P such as “the execution pending and hits second!” Is also executed. As a result, of the three action-holding balls (holding display) that are currently stored on hold, the action-holding ball with the second change schedule and the game-in-progress hold K that is currently being executed are subject to the pre-reading notice. Is notified to the player, and the special game information related to the second action holding ball and the symbol variation display game currently being executed is also notified.

  When the disclosure effect is ended, the end effect is executed, and a series of special hold change notices are ended (FIG. (F)).

  In this way, in the special hold change notice according to the second effect example, all the existing hold displays (the hold display in the hold display area and the game running hold K) are once set in a concealed state, and the concealment is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The status is released all at once, and the hold display becomes the disclosure status. And when disclosing a hold display, it can be disclosed in the state changed into the hold display mode different from before the concealment among a plurality of concealed hold displays. The above-described second effect example can also achieve the same effects as the first effect example. Furthermore, in the second production example, there are various types such as whether the change is one or more, or whether the all hold display is changed, in that a plurality of hold displays can be changed to a dedicated hold display mode. Expectation can be held to the player. The point which produces such an effect is a point greatly different from the 1st production example.

(Third special hold change notice effect mode: FIGS. 39 to 40)
Next, with reference to FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, a third effect example of the special hold change notice will be described. In the third effect example, as in the second effect example, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed, at least one of these hold displays can be changed to a dedicated hold display mode by a special hold change notice. However, in the third effect example, the disclosed effect when a plurality of concealed hold displays are disclosed is different from the second effect example. In the third effect example, for the convenience of explanation, the second effect example will be described as a representative. Moreover, in order to avoid duplication description, about the production content substantially the same as the 2nd production example, the description is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  FIG. 39A shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36 before the special hold change notice appears, and here, the same case as the second effect example is shown.

  In FIG. 39, when the special hold change notice is started, as shown in FIGS. (B) to (D), as in the first production example, the character L and the cannon M appear as part of the production scenario. “Character appearance effect”, “Action effect” by the character L and cannon M, and “Explosion effect (secret effect)” in which a bomb R is generated so that the bullet N lands on the hold display area 76 and covers the hold display. Are sequentially executed, and the three on-hold icons displayed on the on-hold display portions a1 to c1 and the on-game hold K are kept secret.

  Next, the process proceeds to (E), and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the concealment state by the explosion effect in FIG. (D) has occurred (for example, after a few seconds), the explosion effect is terminated and the explosion R has been performed so far. The disclosure effect of re-displaying (disclosing) a part of the three hold icons of the hold display units a1 to c1 that have been concealed and the hold K during game execution is executed.

  The difference between the disclosure effect according to the third effect example and the disclosure effect according to the first to second effect examples is not to disclose the concealment state of the hold display (hold icon) all at once, according to a predetermined priority order, It is a point that it is disclosed step by step (continuous) from the hold display (hold icon) with high priority (hold display sequential disclosure effect). Specifically, by partially disappearing the explosion R that covered the hold icon, the hold icons that have been kept secret by the explosion R until now are sequentially disclosed according to a predetermined priority order. Disclose all pending icons that were on hold. The disclosure time interval of each hold display may be a fixed (substantially constant) time (predetermined time), or may be entirely or partially different. Here, as the predetermined priority, a case where the hold display is disclosed from the hold display corresponding to the latest operation hold ball according to the newly generated order of the operation hold ball, specifically, “hold display portion c1 → A case where information is disclosed in the order of “b1 → a1 → game running hold K” is shown (for example, see FIG. 79).

  Specifically, referring to FIG. 5E, among the hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been concealed by the blast smoke R by the execution of the disclosure effect, first, one hold icon of the hold display portion c1. Only disclosed. However, the other two hold icons in the hold display portions a1 and b1 and the game running hold K are still kept in a secret state. In this example, the message P for the disclosed hold display can be issued for the telop display effect because the hold display (hold icon) is sequentially disclosed according to a predetermined priority order. ing.

  In the first (first) disclosure, the display color of the hold icon of the hold display portion c1 is maintained as normal white, and the telop display effect in which the character L issues a message P such as “No. 3!” Shows the case where is executed. As a result, among the currently held action-holding spheres (holding display), the action-holding sphere with the third change schedule is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the corresponding hold icon of the hold display section c1 is normally displayed. The player is informed that the reserved color has not changed. That is, it is a case where it was notified that the production result by this time disclosure was a production of gas. However, since the remaining two hold icons in the hold display portions a1 and b1 and the game running hold K are kept in a concealed state, these hold icons may change in the future. It is possible to give a winning expectation. As a result, the player expects the next pending change and can maintain the winning expectation.

  After disclosure of the hold icon of the hold display section c1 (see (E) in the figure), when a predetermined presentation time (for example, about 1 second) elapses, the time series shifts to FIG. 40 (F) and the second time When the disclosure effect is executed, one of the hold icons of the hold display part b1 is disclosed among the hold icons of the hold display parts a1 to b1 that are still concealed by the explosion R, and the other hold icons are concealed. The state is maintained.

  In the second disclosure, the display color of the hold icon in the hold display portion b1 changes from normal white (normal hold color) to a dedicated hold color (for example, green), and the character L is “2nd hit! This shows a case in which a telop display effect that issues a message P such as “is executed. As a result, among the currently stored operation holding balls (hold display), the second operation holding ball whose order of change is scheduled has been subject to the pre-reading notice, and the corresponding hold icon of the hold display section b1 changes. The player can be notified of the fact that he / she has done. Also, since the remaining hold icon of the hold display portion a1 and the hold K during game execution are kept in a concealed state, these hold icons may change in the future, and the player's winning expectation is expected. The feeling can be further sustained.

  In the same figure (F) and thereafter (FIGS. (G) to (H)), as in the production contents described in FIGS. The hold display portion a1 and the game running hold K are sequentially disclosed (FIGS. (G) to (H)).

  FIG. 5G shows the third disclosure effect. In this disclosure, the display color of the hold icon in the hold display part a1 is maintained as normal white (gase effect), and the character L is displayed. A case is shown in which a telop display effect that issues a message P such as “No. 1!” Is executed.

  The following (H) shows the final presentation (fourth) disclosure effect. In this disclosure, the display color of the game running hold K is changed from normal white (normal hold color) to a dedicated hold color ( For example, a case is shown in which a telop display effect is executed in which the character L is disclosed in a state of being changed to green) and the character L issues a message P such as “Hit hit!”. In FIG. 11H, the game running hold K has changed, and there is a possibility that a specific SP reach may occur in the future in the currently running symbol variation display game, and that the winning expectation level may be high. Special game information such as a certain fact is notified.

  Then, when the final presentation effect is ended, an “end effect” is executed, thereby completing a series of special hold change notices ((I) in the figure).

  In this way, in the special hold change notice according to the third effect example, all the existing hold displays are temporarily set in a secret state, and the hold icons of the hold display sections that are concealed are disclosed in order according to a predetermined priority order. It has become. This third effect example can achieve the same effects as the second effect example. Further, in the third effect example, the secret state is not changed to the disclosed state all at once as in the first effect example and the second effect example. In addition, the player can be depressed. Further, until the hold icons of all the hold display portions are disclosed, the special hold change notice can be watched carefully, and the player can be more enjoyed.

  When disclosing the concealment state of the hold display (hold icon), as in this example, the hold display corresponding to the latest operation hold ball is sequentially disclosed from the hold display corresponding to the latest operation hold ball. Instead, they can be disclosed in a different order (see FIG. 79 described later). For example, you may make it disclose sequentially from the hold display corresponding to the oldest operation hold ball to the hold display corresponding to the new operation hold ball. 39 to FIG. 40, the game is continuously disclosed in the order of “game on hold K → hold display unit a1 → hold display unit b2 → hold display unit c2 → hold display unit d2”. Thereby, it is possible to sequentially notify the degree of expectation of winning for the display of the display whose reservation is earlier in time. In order to allow the player to pay attention to the notice effect of the in-game symbol variation display game in progress, it is disclosed sequentially from the hold display corresponding to the oldest active hold ball among the hold displays in the hold display section, and the game is on hold K may be disclosed last.

  In addition, each hold display may be disclosed at random. Thereby, the player can give the player a sense of expectation, such as “Which hold display expectation level will be suggested next?”. In addition, the order of disclosure may be determined according to the expected winning degree. For example, it can be disclosed in order of relatively low winning expectation. This makes it possible to gradually increase the player's sense of expectation every time the hold display is disclosed. In addition, instead of disclosing one hold display at a time when disclosing a plurality of times, the number to be disclosed may be set at random (for example, one for the first time, two for the next time, etc.). In this case, if there are a plurality of hold indications to be changed, they can be disclosed all at once, so that it is possible to make a disclosure effect with an impact. Note that the on-hold display sequential disclosure effect described in the third effect example can be applied as appropriate to other effect examples.

(Fourth special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 41)
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the 4th effect example of special reservation change notice is demonstrated. The fourth effect example is an effect mode in which a variety of image displays related to the winning expectation degree can be displayed in the blast effect (secret effect) and / or the disclosure effect. In addition, in order to avoid duplication description, description is abbreviate | omitted suitably about the same effect content as the special reservation change notice effect demonstrated so far. Further, the disclosure effects after the fourth effect example will be described on the basis of the “hold display simultaneous disclosure effect” described in the first effect example and the second effect example for convenience of explanation.

  FIG. 41 (A) shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36 before the special hold change notice appears, and here, the same case as the first effect example is shown.

  In FIG. 41, when the special hold change notice is started, as shown in FIGS. (B) to (D), the character L and the cannon M appear as part of the production scenario, as in the first production example. “Character appearance effect”, “Action effect” by the character L and cannon M, and “Explosion effect (secret effect)” in which a bomb R is generated so that the bullet N lands on the hold display area 76 and covers the hold display. Are sequentially executed, and the three on-hold icons displayed on the on-hold display portions a1 to c1 and the on-game hold K are kept secret.

  Here, the “action effect” in FIG. 8C is such that an action effect selected from a plurality of types of action effects associated with the winning expectation degree is executed (for example, a later-described figure). 27, see FIGS. 74 to 75). The difference between the fourth effect example (FIG. 41C) and the first to third effect examples (FIGS. 37C, 38C, and 39C) is that the bullet N to be fired In addition to “white normal shell (normal shell) N”, there is a mixture of “special shell N” whose display mode has changed to the color and / or pattern related to the winning expectation and / or its shape. It is a point.

  In this example, in addition to the “white normal shell (normal shell) N”, one or a plurality of colored “special shells (dedicated shells) N” can be fired. In the drawing, as an example, in order from the first fired bullet, the red exclusive bullet N (circle filled in black), the white normal bullet N (white circle), and the green exclusive bullet N (hatched) This shows a case in which a total of three types of shells N were fired. The appearance of the shell N that has changed to a higher expectation than usual is a premonition that the hold display (hold icon) when disclosed will change to a dedicated hold display. That is, in the case where the special shell N is fired, it is suggested that there is a possibility that there is an operation holding ball having a high degree of winning expectation.

  It should be noted that the display mode of the shell N may indicate a direct winning expectation degree, but may indicate a pending change expectation degree (FIGS. 42, 46, and 47 described later). The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56). It should not be confused that the form of the shell N indirectly indicates the winning expectation degree indirectly, but does not necessarily indicate the direct winning expectation degree, but suggests the hold change expectation degree to the last. Is a point. In other words, “pending change expectation == winning expectation” is not satisfied. Further, depending on the expectation of winning, all the shells N may be only normal white, or may be colored.

  Regarding the form of the above-mentioned bullet N (for example, bullet color), the display mode used for the reserve change notice, for example, the same as the reserve color, is used, and in the order of expectation (white <blue <yellow <green <red <Rainbow color (holding change confirmation)) can be the same. In this way, by making the color used in other effects (cannonball N) the same as the reserved color used in the reserved change notice, it is possible to give the player the expected change in hold and the expected win rate. Can be notified more clearly. Further, it is possible to give the player a guess element of the effect result of the special hold change notice, and it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the disclosure effect (expectation that desires a change rather than a gaze effect).

  In addition, with respect to FIG. 4D, “the bullet N fired from the cannon M has landed on the holding display area 76 and a smashing effect has occurred, and three holding icons displayed on the holding display portions a1 to c1; This is the same as the other production examples in that the game display hold K in the changing display area is concealed by the explosion smoke R. However, the fourth production example is different from the other production examples in that the production mode of the explosion R is different. This will be described in detail below.

  Regarding the “explosive smoke R” according to the fourth effect example, the display color is different from the case shown in the first to third effect examples, and is not a normal white explosion R but a special color colored in a predetermined color. “Additional production (second special explosion production)” can appear, such as explosion R (first special explosion production) or “predetermined production” accompanied by “explosion R” production ( For example, see FIGS. 76 and 78). In the figure, the explosion R is displayed in blue (hatched color), and a “lightning effect (lightning image display effect)” simulating the occurrence of lightning (lightning image) S in a thundercloud has been added. The case where special explosion smoke R appeared is shown.

  The color of the explosion smoke R according to the present embodiment suggests the hold change expectation level or the winning winning expectation degree similarly to the color type of the shell N described above. For example, the color of explosion smoke R can be in the order of expectation (white <blue <yellow <green <red <iridescent (hold change confirmed)) similar to the reserved color related to the winning winning expectation. In addition, when the explosion R is the same color, the case where the lightning effect is not accompanied and the case where the lightning effect is accompanied, that is, the case where the lightning effect is accompanied, that is, the case where the additional effect is generated, is expected to change. The degree is getting higher. In this way, by making the colors used in other effects (explosive smoke R) and the reserved colors used in the reserve change notice similar to the case of the shell N described above, It is possible to clearly indicate the expected degree of pending change. In addition, it is possible to give the player an inferred element of the effect result of the special hold change notice, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of hold change expectation for the disclosed effect when disclosed. In addition, as with the above-described shell N, all of the explosion smoke R may be normal white or may be colored, depending on the degree of expectation.

  In addition, although it demonstrated that the display color of the cannonball N and the explosion smoke R showed a pending | holding change expectation degree, the display color of the cannonball N and the explosion smoke R is good also as a thing which suggests a win winning expectation degree. For example, when the red bullet N is fired, when the hold icon is disclosed by the disclosure effect, the hold icon of the same color (red) as the bullet N may be colored. In this case, the display color of the cannonball N directly suggests the reserved color that can be changed in the disclosure effect, so that the direct winning expectation can be suggested with the display color of the cannonball N. . In addition, the display color of the cannonball N may suggest what display mode the display mode of the hold icon changes to. For example, in the case of a red bullet N, it is suggested that the shape of the “pyramid (see FIG. 72)” (design) shown in FIG. In the case of N, the hold icon may be suggested to change to the shape of “emblem (see FIG. 72)”, which has a lower winning expectation than “pyramid”.

  Next, moving to FIG. 5E, by executing the disclosure effect, the hold display (hold icon) that has been concealed by the bomb smoke R is disclosed. Here, the game holding hold K, the hold icon of the hold display part a1, the hold icon of the hold display part b1, and the hold icon of the hold display part c1 are each disclosed in a state of being changed to a dedicated hold display mode, and the character L Shows a case in which a telop display effect is issued in which a message P such as “All hit!” Is issued. This case is a case where the hold icons of all the hold display units a1 to c1 that are currently held and changed and all the hold icons of the hold K during game execution have changed. Here, as a special case, the case where all the hold indications have been changed has been described. Of course, a case where there is a hold icon in which the hold indication does not change before and after the disclosure is also included.

  In addition, the hold icon with the item image and character information shown in FIG. 72 to be described later is one form of a dedicated hold display mode like the hold color, and these are also one of the hold icon images associated with the winning expectation degree. And, if the icons are different, the winning expectation is determined differently. In this way, not only the hold color but also the hold icon itself changes to various display modes, so that the special game information can be notified in various patterns.

  When the above-described disclosure effect is ended, an “end effect” is executed, and thereby a series of special hold change notices are ended ((F) in the figure).

  As described above, in the special reservation change notice according to the fourth effect example, a secret effect different from the first to third effect examples is executed. Therefore, the effect is also different as follows. In the fourth effect example, the hold change expectation degree can be suggested during the concealment effect. Therefore, the player is “in the stored hold display (including hold K during game execution) and the winning winning expectation is It is possible to have a sense of expectation such as "isn't it expensive?" In this regard, as in the case of the first effect example and the second effect example, the variation of the special hold change notice is more varied than that which does not suggest any hold change expectation during the concealment effect, and the fun is improved. be able to.

(Fifth special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 42)
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the 5th example of special reservation change notice is demonstrated. This fifth effect example does not include the hold K during game execution. As a general pachinko machine 1, as shown in the first to fourth production examples, as with the hold display relating to the operation hold ball, it is held as the hold K during game execution even after being used in the symbol variation display game. Unlike the pachinko machine 1 that keeps displaying the icon, it is different from this, and when it is used in the symbol variation display game, the “holding digesting effect” for notifying that the holding is digested is executed, and then the holding during the game is held. A pachinko machine 1 that does not display a hold icon such as (including a pachinko machine 1 that simply performs a shift display of the hold display without executing the hold digest effect itself) is known. Hereinafter, an example in which the special hold change notice is applied to the pachinko machine 1 whose hold display is not displayed after the start of the change will be described. In the fifth effect example, for convenience of explanation, the fourth effect example will be described as a representative. Moreover, in order to avoid duplication description, about the content of the production | presentation substantially the same as the hold change notice effect demonstrated so far, the description is abbreviate | omitted suitably.

  In FIG. 2A, white circle-marked hold icons (hold images) are displayed on the hold display portions a1 to d1 in the hold display area 76, and four special symbols 1 of action hold balls are stored. Shows the case. In FIG. 9A, a shift effect in which each hold icon shifts to the next display position is executed in conjunction with the start of the special symbol variation display. Specifically, the hold icon with a white circle in the hold display part a1 is placed on the icon of the receiving seat J in the changing display area, the hold icon with a white circle in the hold display part b1 is on the hold display part a1, and the hold display part c1. The white circle mark hold icon is shifted and displayed on the hold display section b1, and the white circle mark hold icon of the hold display section d1 is shifted and displayed on the hold display section c1. In conjunction with this shift display, the symbol variation display game is started as the oldest working ball is digested.

  Next, moving to FIG. 5 (B), first, paying attention to the operation holding ball provided for the current symbol variation display game, the game display is performed on the icon of the seat J for the holding display related to the operation holding ball. As the middle hold K, a shift display in which the hold icon moves is executed, and thereafter, the icon image of the game running hold K placed on the seat J is dropped into the “hole” at the bottom “ "Production" is executed (broken line K in FIG. 5C). As a result, the hold K during game execution is hidden, and the player is made aware that the operation hold ball (hold display) has been consumed.

  As for the special hold change notice, as shown in FIG. 5B, an “action effect” is executed by the character L and the cannon M, and then the display shifts to FIG. In other words, the “smoke effect (confidence effect)” in which the three hold icons displayed in the hold display portions a1 to c1 of the hold display area 76 are concealed by the explosion smoke R is executed. Here, a case is shown in which the above-described reserved digest effect is executed and an action effect in which a plurality of shells N are fired from the cannon M toward the hold display area 76 is executed as in the fourth effect example.

  Next, moving to FIG. 4D, when a plurality of fired ammunitions N land on the hold display area 76, a concealment effect is concealed by the explosion smoke R of the three hold icons displayed in the hold display portions a1 to c1. Executed. Thereafter, similar to the fourth effect example, a series of pending change notice effects are executed through FIGS.

  In the fifth effect example, the concealment effect is executed so as to exclude the display area of the game execution hold K. This makes it possible to clarify the shift display effect in which the hold display shifts to the player and the hold digest effect in which the operation hold ball is digested. In this example, the pachinko machine 1 in which the in-game execution hold K is hidden is described. However, the present invention can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the in-game execution hold K is displayed. In this case, a concealment effect may be configured to be executed so as to exclude the display area of the game execution hold K. In other words, with respect to the point where the game running hold K is not displayed and the point where the game running hold K is excluded from the concealment effect, other effect examples (first effect example-fourth effect example, sixth effect example- It can also be applied to the 15th effect example).

(Sixth special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 43)
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the 6th example of special reservation change notice is demonstrated. In the sixth effect example, the expected winning degree is not indicated indirectly by changing the hold display to various display modes, but by indirectly displaying the expected winning degree. For example, the expected winning degree is directly notified (suggested). In the sixth effect example, for convenience of explanation, the first effect example will be described as a representative. Further, in order to avoid duplicate description, description of the content of the production substantially the same as the pending change notice production explained so far will be omitted as appropriate.

  FIG. 43A shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36 before the special hold change notice appears, and here, the same case as the first effect example is shown.

  In FIG. 43, when the special hold change notice is started, the character L and the cannon M appear as part of the production scenario, as in the first production example, as shown in FIGS. “Character appearance effect”, “Action effect” by the character L and cannon M, and “Explosion effect (secret effect)” in which a bomb R is generated so that the bullet N lands on the hold display area 76 and covers the hold display. Are sequentially executed, and the three on-hold icons displayed on the on-hold display portions a1 to c1 and the on-game hold K are kept secret.

  Then, when the explosion effect is finished, the disclosure effect is disclosed to disclose the hold icons 3 of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been concealed by the explosion smoke R and the hold K during game execution. Executed.

  The difference between the disclosure effect (FIG. 43 (E)) according to the sixth effect example and the disclosure effect (for example, FIG. 37 (E), FIG. 38 (E), etc.) according to the first to fifth effect examples is a change in hold. Instead, a “numerical value (numerical image)” suggesting a winning expectation degree is displayed corresponding to each hold display (hold icon) (numerical value display effect). Here, the message image Q1 written as “10%” above the hold K during game execution, the message image Q2 written as “0%” above the hold icon in the hold display part a1, and the hold display part b1 A message image Q3 indicated as “80%” is displayed above the hold icon, and a message image Q4 indicated as “20%” is displayed above the hold icon in the hold display portion c1. In addition, a telop display effect in which the character L issues a message P “All hit!” Is also executed. About the "numerical value" by the numerical display effect, it may be an accurate winning expectation degree or an approximate value. Also, the degree of expectation determined in advance corresponding to the variation pattern type may be used. For example, out of the loss variation patterns, the normal variation type is 1%, the N reach type is 5%, and the normal SP reach 1, 2, ... 6, 7 is 10%, 20%, ... 60%, 70% The time reach (during probability change) SP reach 1, 2, 3 can be set to 20%, 30%, 50%, and so on.

  Further, the “numerical value” display by the numerical value display effect may be continuously displayed until the operation holding ball to be displayed is used in the symbol variation display game. However, when the numerical display is displayed for a long time, many players feel annoying this, so it is preferable to end the display when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses.

  Note that the above “numerical value display effect” can be executed for a part of the hold display without executing the numerical value display effect for all the hold displays (hold icon). For example, among the held displays that are concealed, target one or a plurality of held displays with a relatively high expectation of winning, or hold displays other than the held display with the lowest expected expectation, or a predetermined hit A numerical display effect can be executed for a hold display having a winning expectation level or higher, or for a hold icon having the highest win expectation level. In this case, with respect to the hold display that is the target of the numerical display effect, a display mode different from the normal display, for example, the “numerical value” display is made larger than the normal display, or the character display font is changed from the normal display. It is preferable to emphasize the winning winning expectation level by changing the shape of the balloon. In this way, since the winning winning expectation is displayed with emphasis, it is possible to greatly attract the player's interest.

  Further, when a numerical display effect is executed for a plurality of hold displays, a hold display mode associated with the values may be used. For example, an on-hold display mode associated with a numerical value representing the expected winning degree may be displayed. For example, the hold display less than the first numerical value can be displayed with the normal hold color white, and the hold display higher than the first numerical value can be changed to the dedicated hold color. In addition, you may maintain the hold display aspect after a change until the corresponding action hold ball is digested. In this case, even if the numerical display disappears, the expected winning degree can be continuously notified by the hold display mode.

  Next, when the disclosure effect is ended, the end effect is executed, and a series of special hold change notices are ended (FIG. (F)).

  As described above, in the special hold change notice according to the sixth effect example, when all the existing hold displays are temporarily concealed and the hold display is disclosed, the “numerical value (numerical image) that indicates the expected winning expectation degree is disclosed. "Is displayed in correspondence with each hold display (hold icon). Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize the winning winning expectation degree for the symbol variation display game currently being executed or the symbol variation display game that is scheduled. In particular, when a numerical value with a high degree of winning expectation is displayed, further attention can be drawn to the development of the future production. Note that the point of finally performing numerical display (numerical display effect) in the sixth effect example is also applicable to other effect examples.

(Seventh special hold change notice effect mode: FIGS. 44 to 45)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, a seventh effect example of special hold change notice will be described. In the seventh effect example, the concealment effect and the disclosure effect are not executed only once as in the first to sixth effect examples, but the concealment effect and the disclosure effect are repeatedly executed a plurality of times. This is shown (see FIG. 74 described later (2 to 4 times)). In the seventh effect example, an example in which the secret effect and the disclosure effect are repeated three times will be described as an example in which the secret effect and the disclosure effect are executed a plurality of times. The first concealment effect and the disclosure effect will be described on the basis of the second effect example (FIG. 44), and the next and subsequent concealment effects and the disclosure effect will be described based on the fourth effect example. (FIG. 45). In order to avoid duplication, the explanation of the contents of the production substantially the same as the pending change notice production described so far will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  44 (A) to (F) in the seventh effect example are different from the second effect example in the effect contents shown in FIG. 44 (E) and FIG. Focusing on this point, the seventh effect example will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 5E, here, the first (first) explosion effect (confidential effect) is finished, and the hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been concealed by the explosion smoke R until now, Then, a disclosure effect that discloses the hold K during game execution is executed. Here, a case is disclosed in which the display colors of the hold icons of all the hold display sections and the hold K during game execution are kept in the same normal white color (normal hold color) as before the concealment (case of the effect) Is shown. In addition, here, because the secret effect and the disclosure effect are executed a plurality of times, for the telop display effect by the character L, the secret effect is started again, for example, “I will continue!”. A telop display effect for notification is executed. As a result, when the first concealment effect and the disclosure effect are finished, which of the currently stored operation holding balls (holding display) is the target of the pre-reading notice, further concealment effect Is started so that the player can be notified that the hold icon may change.

  Then, the process shifts to (F) in the figure, and again (second time), the character L performs the action effect of firing the bullet N from the cannon M, and then shifts to FIG. 45 (G), where the fired bullet N is held. The display area 76 is landed again to generate a blast effect (secret effect), the three hold icons displayed in the hold display portions a1 to c1 of the hold display area 76, and the game running hold K in the changing display area Is concealed by the explosion R. In this example, the hold display changed in the first time is also concealed again.

  Next, moving to FIG. 5H, the second explosion effect (confidential effect) is completed, and the three hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been concealed by the explosion smoke R, and the hold during the game execution. A disclosure effect that discloses K is executed. Here, a case where a hold change is newly generated by the second disclosure effect is shown. Specifically, the display color of the hold icon of the hold display unit b1 that has not changed last time is normal white (normal hold color). The telop display effect is disclosed in a state where the character L is changed to a dedicated reserved color (for example, green), and the message P indicates that the concealment effect is started again, for example, “Accurate! Shows the case where is executed. As a result, the player is notified that the information regarding the operation holding ball that has been subject to the advance notice, that the concealment effect and the disclosure effect will be executed next time, and that the hold icon may change in the next disclosure effect will be given to the player. Can be notified.

  Next, the process proceeds to (I) to (J) in the figure. Here, the final action effect (here, the same action effect as the second) is executed, and subsequently, the explosion effect (secret effect) is executed. In addition, in this blast production that will be the final round, a case is shown in which a “directed lightning production (an aspect of additional production)” that simulates the occurrence of a lightning strike on the hold display portion b1 is executed. (Fig. (J)). This “directional lightning strike effect” is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the hold display mode will change, and the hold icon where the lightning strike image (lightning S in the figure) is located, or the hold icon indicated by the lightning strike image However, there is a possibility of a hold display mode (high expectation hold display mode: hereinafter referred to as a “high expectation hold icon”) having a relatively high expectation of winning winning, or a high expectation hold icon at the time of disclosure It is used as an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of change.

  In the drawing, a lightning strike image is generated for the hold display unit b1, and it is notified that the hold change expectation degree related to the hold icon of the hold display unit b1 is relatively higher than other hold icons. . By generating such a lightning strike effect (additional effect) during the concealment effect, it is possible to notify the expected change in hold. Thereby, a player's attention can be gathered to a specific hold | maintenance display part, and a player's hold change expectation can be greatly excited before disclosure production.

  Next, the process proceeds to FIG. 10K, and the explosion display in the figure (J) (here, the special explosion with additional effects) is finished, and the hold display sections a1 to c1 that have been concealed by the explosion R so far. The disclosure effect (the last (third)) in which the three hold icons and the game execution hold K are disclosed again is executed.

  Here, a case is disclosed in which the hold icon of the hold display portion b1 is changed from a dedicated hold color “green” to a hold icon having a different shape (for example, “sun”) (increased winning expectation). Show. In the figure, an example is shown in which the dedicated hold display mode before concealment is stepped up to a high expectation hold icon as another dedicated hold display mode that further increases the winning expectation degree. Thus, when changing to a high expectation hold icon, in order to notify that the hold icon (here, the operation hold ball related to the next symbol variation display game) has a particularly high winning expectation, A telop display effect that greatly enhances the sense of expectation appears. If the hold icon changes to a premium hold such as “Rainbow”, as a telop display effect, “Future fluctuations are certain!” Or “Future fluctuations have a dollar box ready!” A message P for informing the game result of the symbol variation display game can be displayed.

  When the final (third) disclosure effect is completed, the end effect is executed, and a series of special hold change notices are thereby ended ((K) in the figure).

  As described above, in the special hold change notice according to the seventh effect example, the secret effect (confidential state) and the disclosure effect (disclosure state) are repeatedly executed for all the existing hold indications a plurality of times. As a result, the player can be amazed at each disclosure effect from the first time to the last time.

(Eighth special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 46)
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, an eighth effect example of the special reservation change notice will be described. In the eighth effect example, in the pachinko machine 1 having a priority changing function, when an operation holding ball is present in a special symbol on the priority changing side (prior digestion side), a holding display corresponding to the special symbol on the priority changing side is displayed. For example, a special hold change notice is preferentially executed on the target. In this embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball in both the operation holding ball of the special symbol 1 and the operation holding ball of the special symbol 2, the special drawing 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, the special symbol variation display. The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed with priority over the game 1 (priority variation function: see “special symbol variation start process” in FIG. 9). Paying attention to this point, in the eighth effect example, when there is an operation holding ball in both the operation holding ball of the special symbol 1 and the operation holding ball of the special symbol 2 (only the operation holding ball of the special symbol 2 exists) The case where the special symbol 1 on the non-priority variation side is prohibited from being executed and the special symbol 2 on the priority variation side is prohibited from being displayed is described. In addition, in order to avoid duplication description, about the content of production substantially the same as the pending change notice production explained so far, the explanation is omitted as appropriate.

  FIG. 46 assumes a gaming state in which the operation holding ball of the special symbol 2 is easily held and stored, such as a gaming state (for example, a probable change state or a short time state) with a high base gaming state (electric support state). doing.

  FIG. 6A shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36 before the special hold change notice is displayed. Here, the hold icons indicated by white circles are displayed on the hold display areas a1 to c1 in the hold display area 76, respectively, and the hold icons indicated by white stars are displayed on the hold display areas a2 to c2 in the hold display area 77, respectively. A case is shown in which a game execution hold K indicated by a white star is displayed on the icon of the seat J. In other words, three special symbols 1 of action holding balls and three special symbols 2 of action holding balls are currently stored, and a special symbol variation display game corresponding to special symbols 2 is being executed (special symbol 2). Shows the case of the variable display operation).

  Next, when the special hold change notice is started, a character L2 representing a magician (character) with a magic wand M2 appears on the right side of the game running hold K when “Character L2” appears. "Appearance production" is executed. Here, the case where the character different from the 1st-7th production example is selected is shown (refer FIG. 73 mentioned later). The wizard character L2 is at least one of the existing action holding ball and the game running hold K that are subject to the special hold change notice this time, rather than the character (terutsu shaved character) L of the first to seventh production examples. In other words, it is a character that can suggest that there is a relatively high winning expectation degree or holding change expectation degree. Therefore, when the wizard character appears, the player expects great results from the special reserved change notice.

  Next, moving to FIG. 5C, when the production scenario proceeds, an “action production” is performed by the character L2 and the magic wand M2. Here, a magic character L2 casts a spell while waving a magic wand M2, fires a fire magic (flame bullet N2) from the magic wand M2, and expresses a process in which the flame bullet N2 lands. (Magic production) scenario is developed. Specifically, after the character L2 casts a spell while swinging the magic wand M2, the character L2 swings the magic wand M2, and a flame bullet N2 is released from the tip of the magic wand M2. A story tailored (story-like) image display effect such as N2 landing in the hold display area 77 appears.

  Next, moving to FIG. 4D, when the flame bullet N2 emitted from the magic wand M2 lands on the hold display area 77, a “smoke production (confidential production)” that works in the same manner as the first production example is generated. Then, the three hold icons displayed in the hold display portions a2 to c2 and the game running hold K in the changing display area 78 are concealed by the explosion smoke R. However, the three hold icons displayed in the hold display portions a1 to c1 of the special symbol 1 are not concealed by the explosion smoke R. Accordingly, the hold display related to the special symbol 2 on the priority change side is the target of the special hold notice effect of this time, and the hold display of the special symbol 1 on the non-priority change side is not the target of the special hold change notice effect of this time. become. Further, in this example, a case is described in which a game running hold K corresponding to the special symbol 2 exists, so that the game running hold K is set in a hidden state, but the game running hold K is special in the hidden state. If it corresponds to the symbol 1, it is not set in a concealed state. That is, in the case where the gaming state is a gaming state involving a high base gaming state (a state with electric support), a concealment effect is executed for the on-hold display corresponding to the special symbol 2 only.

  Next, the process moves to FIG. 5E, and a disclosure effect is disclosed that discloses the three hold icons of the hold display portions a2 to c2 that have been concealed by the explosion smoke R and the hold K during game execution. Here, it is disclosed in a state where the display color of the hold icon of the hold display section c2 is changed from normal white (normal hold color) to a dedicated hold color (for example, red), and the display color of the hold K during game execution is This example shows a case where a telop display effect is executed in which the character L2 is issued in a state of changing from a normal white color (normally reserved color) to a dedicated reserved color (for example, green), and the character L2 issues a message P such as “A hit!”.

  When the disclosure effect is ended, the end effect is executed, and a series of special hold change notices are ended (FIG. (F)).

  As described above, in the special reservation change notice according to the eighth effect example, when there is an active reservation ball of the special symbol 2 on the priority change side instead of all the existing reservation displays, the special symbol 2 is displayed. It is only subject to notice. Thereby, the hold change advance notice can be generated for the hold display on the symbol variation display game side that is preferentially executed, so that the hold change advance notice can be generated without a sense of incongruity in the progress of the game. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice on the special symbol 1 side or the special symbol 2 side is prohibited according to the gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support” state, it is not necessary to generate a pre-reading notice effect for the operation holding ball of the special symbol 1, and such an occurrence rate is low. From the viewpoint of increasing the control burden if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the operation holding ball of the low special symbol 1, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited (step of FIG. 10 described later). (See S316). For this reason, the special hold change notice for the special symbol 2 side is permitted when the operation-holding ball of the special symbol 2 is likely to be generated in the “high base game state”, while the special symbol for the special symbol 1 side is allowed. There is also an advantage that the control burden can be reduced by prohibiting the pending change notice.

  However, in the case where the above problem does not occur, or in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that does not have the priority variation function, it can be configured as in the following ninth effect example. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

(9th special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 47)
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a ninth effect example of special hold change notice will be described. This ninth production example is a pachinko machine 1 that does not have a priority variation function, that is, a type that sequentially digests the action-holding balls in the order in which the hold memory is generated (the hold memory (winning) order) (the oldest stored action hold) In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the ball is first used in the symbol variation display game), when there is an operation holding ball in both the operation holding ball of the special symbol 1 and the operation holding ball of the special symbol 2, the special holding change This shows a case where a notice is executed.

  FIG. 6A shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36 before the special hold change notice is displayed. Here, a hold icon corresponding to the special symbol type is displayed in each of the hold display portions a1 to c1 and a2 to d2 of the hold display area 76h. Indicates a case where is displayed. In other words, three special symbols 1 of action holding balls and four special symbols 2 of action holding balls are currently stored, and a special symbol variation display game corresponding to special symbol 2 is being executed (special symbols). 2 shows the case of the variable display operation).

  When the special hold change notice is started, as part of the production scenario, as shown in FIGS. (B) to (D), as in the eighth production example, “character appearance production”, character L2 and magic wand The “action effect” by M2 and the “smoke effect (secret effect)” in which the flame bullet N2 lands on the hold display area 76 and keeps the hold display in a secret state are sequentially executed.

  The difference between the ninth effect example (FIG. 47 (D)) and the eighth effect example (FIG. 46 (D)) is that in the hold display area 76h, except for the hold display part d1 having no operation hold ball, the hold display part. The points a1 to c1 and the hold display portions a2 to d2 are kept secret, and the game running hold K in the changing display area 78 is kept secret regardless of the special symbol type. In this example, since the target is a type that sequentially digests the operation holding balls in the order of winning, regardless of the special symbols 1 and 2, the entire existing holding display is kept secret. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that all the on-hold displays have been kept in a concealed state, and when a disclosure effect is executed, at least give an expectation of the on-hold change to all existing active on-hold balls. Can be done.

  Moving to FIG. 5E, when the explosion effect (confidential effect) in FIG. 4D is completed, the hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been concealed by the explosion smoke R until now, and the hold display portion. A disclosure effect is disclosed that discloses four hold icons a2 to d2 and a hold K during game execution. Here, the display color of the hold icon of the hold display portions b2 and a1 is disclosed in a state (same color hold change) that is changed from normal white (normal hold color) to a dedicated hold color (for example, green), and the character L2 Shows a case in which a telop display effect is issued in which a message P such as “Accurate!” Is issued. In this example, the special game information related to the existing operation holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be notified all at once.

  When the disclosure effect is ended, the end effect is executed, and a series of special hold change notices are ended (FIG. (F)).

  Thus, in the special reservation change notice effect of the ninth effect example, since the special hold change notice is executed regardless of the type of the special symbol, it is suitable for the pachinko machine 1 that does not have the priority changing function. Moreover, the effect can also show the effect similar to the above-mentioned 1st-7th production example. Moreover, you may apply the secrecy production of this example to other production examples.

(Tenth special hold change notice effect mode: FIGS. 48 and 49)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49, a tenth effect example of special hold change notice will be described. This tenth effect example shows an effect example including a player participation type “button notice effect”. In the tenth effect example, for convenience of explanation, the second effect example will be described as a representative. Further, in order to avoid duplicate description, description of the content of the production substantially the same as the pending change notice production explained so far will be omitted as appropriate.

  48 (A) to (E) in the tenth effect example are different from the second effect example in the effect contents of FIG. 48 (E). Focusing on this point, the tenth effect example will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 9E, in this example, when the explosion effect (confidential effect) shown in FIG. 10D occurs, a part of the button notice effect is provided in a predetermined area in the explosion smoke R that conceals the hold icon. "Button display effect" in which a button image Y imitating the frame effect button 13 appears is executed. Then, a telop display effect in which the character L issues a message P such as “Would you like to press it once?” Is executed. This button display effect prompts the player to press the frame effect button 13, and suggests that there is a possibility that the effect will develop (progress) by operating the button. .

  F1 in FIG. 49 shows a case where the player presses the frame effect button 13 within the input reception valid period (for example, about 8 seconds) during the button display effect, and the player presses the frame effect button. By operating No. 13, the “disclosure effect at the time of operation” is executed. Specifically, with the operation of the frame effect button 13, the three hold icons of the hold display portions a <b> 1 to c <b> 1 that have been concealed by the blast R and the hold K during game execution are disclosed. ing. Here, it is disclosed in a state where the display color of the hold icon of the hold display portion b1 and the hold K during game execution is changed from normal white (normal hold color) to a dedicated hold color (for example, green), and the character L Shows a case where an effect of issuing a message P such as “Hit hits the 2nd!” Is executed.

  Then, when the disclosure effect at the time of the button operation is ended, the end effect is executed, and thereby a series of special hold change notices are ended (FIG. (G1)).

  On the other hand, if the player does not operate the frame effect button 13 within a predetermined operation setting time (for example, about 3 seconds), the “disclosure effect during non-operation” is forcibly executed (FIG. 49). (F2)). Specifically, although three hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been concealed until now by the explosion smoke R and the hold K during game execution are disclosed, each hold display mode is the same as that before concealment ( It is disclosed that it does not change). That is, a kind of penalty is imposed such that a special hold change notice is generated but no button change is made, so no hold change is made (penalty production). Along with this, in the telop display effect by the character L, in order to cause the player to actively operate the frame effect button 13 when the special hold change notice accompanying the “button notice effect” is executed next time, The character L displays a message P prompting the operation of the frame effect button 13 such as “It may be good when pressed!”.

  When the disclosure effect is ended, the end effect is executed, and the series of special hold change notices is ended (FIG. (G2)).

  In this way, in the special hold change notice effect of the tenth effect example, after all the hold displays are once concealed, the effect when the hold display is disclosed depending on whether or not the effect button 13 is operated. The aspect is different. Thereby, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the player has an influence on the game result. If no button operation is performed, a kind of penalty is generated such that the originally derived effect result is not displayed. Therefore, the player actively operates the frame effect button 13. It becomes like this.

  Note that the “button notice effect” in the tenth effect example (for example, the effect mode in FIG. 48E) is applicable to all other effect examples. In this case, with respect to the other effects, the disclosure effect is not automatically executed with the progress of the effect scenario, but according to the operation of the frame effect button 13, the disclosure effect at the time of operation (pending at the time of disclosure) There is a possibility of change), or a disclosure effect at the time of non-operation (a penalty effect without a hold change at the time of disclosure) can appear.

(Eleventh special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 50)
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, an eleventh example of special reservation change notice will be described. The eleventh effect example shows an effect example in the case where the special hold change notice straddles the symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). Here, a case is assumed in which the currently running symbol variation display game is ended and a new symbol variation display game is started (so-called “fluctuation straddle”) during execution of the special hold change notice effect. Indicates. In the eleventh effect example, for convenience of explanation, the second effect example will be described as a representative. Further, in order to avoid duplicate description, description of the content of the production substantially the same as the pending change notice production explained so far will be omitted as appropriate.

  In the eleventh effect example, the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 50A to 50F are different from the second effect example in the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. Focusing on this point, the eleventh effect example will be described.

  Referring to FIGS. 4A to 4B, when the special hold change notice is started, first a character appearance effect (not shown) and an action effect are executed (FIG. 5A), and then an explosion An effect (confidential effect) occurs, and the three hold icons displayed in the hold display portions a1 to c1 in the hold display area 76 and the game running hold K in the changing display area 78 are in a concealed state due to the explosion smoke R. (FIG. 5B). Here, even in the concealed state, the symbol variation display game related to the game execution hold K is in progress. Therefore, depending on the start timing of the concealment effect, the current symbol variation display game may end during the concealment state.

  Here, if the special hold change notice has not occurred, when the current symbol variation display game ends, a shift effect is executed in which the hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 are shifted to the next display position. . As a result, the player is informed that the current symbol variation display game has been completed, and that the standby action pending ball has been used for the symbol variation display game (digested).

  However, the situation is different when the symbol variation display game is ended during the special hold change notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 5C, during the concealed state by the explosion R, the shift display of the operation holding ball is invisible due to the explosion R. In particular, when a special hold change notice is occurring, some players may miss the end of this symbol change display game by paying more attention to the special hold change notice than the decorative design change display game. Is also possible. As a result, depending on the timing at which the disclosure effect is executed, the operation holding balls are digested without the player's knowledge, and “the number of operation holding balls is decreasing?” “The operation holding memorized” It can cause problems such as giving a sense of anxiety and distrust such as “Is it different from the number of balls?”.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to notify that the current symbol variation display game has ended during the special hold change notice, the following secret effect can be displayed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the current symbol variation display game is ended while the hold display is in a concealed state, the hold icon of the hold K during game execution is covered as shown in FIG. An effect (secret area reduction effect) in which the explosion smoke R in the selected area disappears is executed, and the icon of the seat J in a state where there is no hold icon of the hold K during the game execution is displayed as a whole. In other words, when the symbol variation display game is finished, only the display area of the game execution hold K that is a part of the secret area (the icon display area in the variation display area 78) is disclosed. Next, a hold icon for a new game-in-progress hold K is displayed on the icon of the seat J in conjunction with the shift display in which the hold display is shifted. A concealment effect (confidential region shift display effect) for shifting and displaying the concealment region (confidential range) by the explosion smoke R is executed so that the conservative icons of the remaining conserving display units a1 to b1 are concealed. Thereby, the concealment state for the hold display in which one operation hold ball is digested is realized. In this way, it is possible to notify the player that the current symbol variation display game has been completed and that the next symbol variation display game will be started.

  Furthermore, in this example, in order to notify that the current symbol variation display game has ended in accordance with the shift display of the concealment area, for example, a telop display effect in which the character L issues a message P such as “the game is over!” Is executed. The player clearly indicates that the current symbol variation display game has ended.

  Next, the process moves to FIG. 5E, and the two display icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been concealed by the explosion smoke R and the disclosure effect disclosed by the hold K during game execution are executed. Here, the hold icon of the hold display part b1 and the hold icon of the game running hold K are disclosed in a state where the normal white (normal hold color) is changed to a dedicated hold color (for example, green), and the character L is disclosed. This shows a case in which an effect of issuing a message P such as “Hit hits the 2nd!” Is executed.

  When the disclosure effect is ended, the end effect is executed, and a series of special hold change notices are ended (FIG. (F)).

  In the special hold change notice effect according to the eleventh example described above, all the hold displays are temporarily set in a hidden state, and when the symbol variation display game being executed in this hidden state is ended, the end is notified. In addition, a part of the predetermined secret area (display area of the game execution hold K) is disclosed. In order to notify that a new symbol variation display game is to be executed, the concealment area by the explosion smoke R is also shifted and displayed in conjunction with the shift display in which the hold display is shifted. As a result, even if an irregular event such as the end of the current symbol variation display game during the special hold change notice and the start of the next symbol change display game occurs, the special hold change notice effect that is in progress is uncomfortable. It is possible to execute the game smoothly and without giving the player anxiety / distrust about the hold display.

  Note that in the case of a concealment effect that does not conceal the game running hold K, the game running hold K display disappears from the seat J in the changing display area 78 when the current symbol change display game ends. Then, when the next symbol variation display game is started, a new game-in-progress hold K is displayed on the icon of the seat J, and the secret area is shifted and displayed. That is, the above-mentioned “secret area reduction effect” in which the explosion smoke R in the area covering the hold icon of the hold K during the game execution disappears is not executed, and only the secret area shift display effect for the confidential hold display is performed. Will be executed.

(Twelfth special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 51)
Next, a twelfth effect example of special hold change notice will be described with reference to FIG. This twelfth effect example shows an effect example when a new hold memory (addition) occurs during the special hold change notice. In the twelfth effect example, for the convenience of explanation, the second effect example will be described as a representative. Further, in order to avoid duplicate description, description of the content of the production substantially the same as the pending change notice production explained so far will be omitted as appropriate.

  51 (A) to (F) in the twelfth effect example, the difference from the second effect example is that the effect contents of FIGS. 51 (C) to (F) (after the occurrence of a new reserved memory). The contents of the production).

  Referring to FIGS. 4A to 4B, when the special hold change notice is started, first, a character appearance effect (not shown) and an action effect are executed (FIG. 5A), then An explosion effect (secret effect) occurs, and the three hold icons displayed in the hold display portions a1 to c1 in the hold display area 76 and the game running hold K in the changing display area 78 are hidden by the smoke R. ((B) in the figure). At this stage, there is no operation hold ball corresponding to the hold display part d1, and the corresponding hold icon is in an erased state.

  When a new operation holding ball of the special symbol 1 is generated in the concealed state, a holding icon (white circle) is newly displayed in the holding display portion d1 of the holding display area 76 as shown in FIG. . At this time, a telop display effect in which the character L issues a message P such as “Add game!” Is executed in order to notify that a new operation holding ball has been generated with the generation of a new operation holding ball. As a result, the player is notified that the operation holding ball (holding display) of the special symbol 1 has been newly added. However, the hold icon of the new hold display portion d1 is displayed in the “white” normal hold color (general hold change notice prohibition processing: see steps S111 to S113 in FIG. 20 described later, FIG. 32C). .

  Next, moving to FIG. 4D, with the generation of a new operation hold ball, the concealed area by the explosion R is expanded to the hold display part d1 of the hold display area 76, and the hold icon of the hold display part d1 is set to the concealed state. A special concealment effect (confidential area expansion effect) is performed. At this time, for example, an effect is also executed in which the character L issues a message P such as “pounding!” In order to notify that the new operation hold ball is also subject to the special hold change notice of the hold K during game execution. It is like that. As a result, the player is notified that the new operation hold ball has been included in the advance notice of the special hold change notice and that a new operation hold ball has been generated.

  Next, moving to FIG. 5E, here, four hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to d1 that have been concealed by the explosion smoke R and the hold K during game execution are disclosed, and the hold icon of the hold display portion b1 is disclosed. Is changed from a normal white color (normally reserved color) to a dedicated reserved color (for example, green), and the display color of the reserved icon in the reserved display portion d1 is changed from the normal white color (normally reserved color) to the dedicated reserved color ( For example, a case is shown in which a telop display effect is executed in which the message L is disclosed in a state of being changed to red) and the character L issues a message P such as “A hit!

  When the disclosure effect is ended, the end effect is executed, and a series of special hold change notices are ended (FIG. (F)).

  As described above, in the special hold change notice effect according to the twelfth effect example, when all the displayed hold indications are once concealed and a new operation hold ball is held (added hold indication), After the hold display corresponding to the new operation hold ball is displayed and the occurrence is notified to the player, the secret area (range) is expanded so that the new operation hold ball is also subject to the advance notice. Thereby, even if a new operation hold ball is generated during the special hold change notice effect, the player can enjoy the special hold change notice including the new operation hold ball without feeling uncomfortable. However, when a new operation holding ball is generated, the special holding change notice is not necessarily required. In this case, a special hold change notice for the operation hold ball previously held and stored is executed.

(Thirteenth special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 52)
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a thirteenth example effect of special hold change notice will be described. In the thirteenth effect example, another hold change notice (for example, a pre-read notice notice effect (general hold notice, etc.) of a winning change system (hold display changing system)) is already being executed before the execution of the special hold change notice is started. In this case, an effect example when the special hold change notice is executed is shown. Further, in order to avoid duplicate description, description of the content of the production substantially the same as the pending change notice production explained so far will be omitted as appropriate.

  52 (A) to 52 (F) are different from the first to twelfth example productions in that the winning change system (holding display change) has already been executed before the execution of the special reservation change notice. System) pre-reading notice effect is being executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 6A, when a special hold change notice is generated, there are three hold memories on the special symbol 1 side (three hold icons corresponding to the hold display portions a1 to c1 in the hold display area 76). Lighting state) and the game running hold K corresponding to the special symbol 1 exist, and among these hold displays, the hold display portion b1 of the hold display area 76 has already been pre-reading notice of another hold display change system. A case is shown in which the hold change is made by the effect (here, the hold icon of the hold display portion b1 is changed to “red” of the dedicated hold color). Hereinafter, the hold display that is the target of the other pre-reading notice effect, such as the action holding ball of the hold display section b1, will be referred to as "other hold change notice".

  In this example, when a special hold change notice is executed, if another hold change notice has already been executed (if the hold display mode has changed to a dedicated hold display), the other hold change notice is displayed. A special hold change notice is executed without interruption. More specifically, referring to FIG. 52, when the special hold change notice is started, first, the character appearance effect (FIG. (B)) and the action effect are executed as in the first effect example. Then, an explosion effect (confidential effect) occurs, and each hold display is concealed by the explosion R (FIG. (D)). However, at this time, as shown in FIG. 4D, the state of being concealed by the explosion R is displayed on the hold display sections a1 and c1 except for the hold icon of the hold display section b1 related to other hold change notices. Each of the two held icons and the game running hold K in the changing display area 78 are concealed by the explosion smoke R. And about the hold icon of the hold display part b1 which is not made into the concealment state by the explosion smoke R, regardless of whether the special hold change notice is being executed, it is received in the changing display area 78 as the hold K during the game execution. It continues to be displayed in the hold display area 76 until it is moved over the icon of the seat J (see (D) to (F) in the figure).

  As described above, in the special hold change notice effect according to the thirteenth effect example, when another hold change notice for the one action hold ball is generated, the hold icon related to the action hold ball is in a concealed state. Thus, the other hold change notice can be executed as it is without being affected by the special hold change notice. As a result, the hold change notice that has already occurred is maintained as it is, and the hold indication (no change hold) for which no hold change notice has been made can be targeted for the special hold change notice. The player's attention can be gathered not only for other pending change notice but also for the unchanged pending display.

(Modification of the 13th effect example)
In the thirteenth effect example, when another on-hold change notice has occurred, the on-hold display (hold icon) is described as being excluded from the target of concealment. good. Special hold change notice in case of change to hold icon (low expectation hold display mode (for example, hold color is blue): low expectation hold icon) with low expected win probability due to other hold change notice Therefore, since there is a possibility that the icon is changed to a hold icon having a higher winning expectation than that, the special hold change notice is executed with the hold icon in a concealed state. On the other hand, if the high-winning expectation icon (for example, the hold color is green or red) has been changed due to another hold change notice, the hold display (hold icon) Is changed to the “rainbow-colored” hold icon (in this embodiment, the reserved hold: premium hold), which boasts the highest level of winning winning expectation among the above-mentioned high expectation hold icons. In such a case, since there is no need to change the hold any further, such a high expectation hold icon is not set as the execution target hold of the special hold change notice (at least the secret state is To keep this). As described above, when the change is already changed to the high expectation hold display by another hold change notice, only the hold display is excluded from the execution target hold of the special hold change notice, while the low expectation hold display mode is excluded. If it is changed to, the special hold change notice is set as the execution target hold, so that the low expectation hold display mode is changed to a hold display that further increases the winning winning expectation by the special hold change notice. In addition, the high expectation hold display can maintain the player's feeling of winning.

(14th special hold change notice effect mode: FIG. 53A)
Next, with reference to FIG. 53A, a 14th effect example of special hold change notice will be described. As a feature of this 14th effect example, when a change in hold is made, all of the hold indications (hold icon) subject to notice are the same exclusive hold display mode (same color hold or same pattern (same shape / same pattern). ) Is a case that appears as a hold). In the 14th effect example, for convenience of explanation, the second effect example will be described as a representative. Further, in order to avoid duplicate description, description of the content of the production substantially the same as the pending change notice production explained so far will be omitted as appropriate.

  53A (A) to (F) in the 14th effect example are different from the second effect example in the effect contents shown in (E) to (F) in the figure. Focusing on this point, the 14th effect example will be described.

  First, referring to FIGS. 4B to 4D, when the special hold change notice is started, the character appearance effect (FIG. 5B) and the action effect are executed first (FIG. 4C). Subsequently, a bomb effect (confidential effect) is generated, and each hold display is concealed by the bomb smoke R ((D) in the figure).

  Next, when the explosion effect (confidential effect) ends, the three hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to c1 that have been kept secret by the explosion smoke R and the hold K during the game are disclosed. A disclosure effect is executed. The difference between the fourteenth effect example (FIG. 53A (E)) and the second effect example (FIG. 38 (E)) is that in the fourteenth effect example, when a hold change occurs, the hold change target is changed. Not only the display but also the entire hold display is disclosed in the same hold display mode (all hold display same display mode). In FIG. 5E, the display color of the all-hold icon set in the concealed state is disclosed in a state where the display color is changed from the normal hold color (for example, white) to the dedicated hold color (for example, green), respectively (the same for all-hold display). (Display effect), a case where a telop display effect in which the character L issues a message P such as “Maybe!” Is shown.

  It should be noted that when disclosing the concealed hold icon, the concealed hold display (hold icon) is simultaneously displayed as in the first effect example and the second effect example shown in FIGS. 37 to 38 described above. The above-described “hold display simultaneous disclosure effect” may be adopted as the disclosure state, and the hold display (hold icon) that has been kept in a concealed state as in the third effect example shown in FIGS. The “hold display sequential disclosure effect” that is sequentially disclosed according to the priority order may be employed.

  When the “hold display simultaneous disclosure effect” is adopted, all the hidden hold icons are disclosed all at the same time or substantially at the same timing, and the displayed hold icons are in the same display mode, which is very impactful. A certain production effect can be expected. In particular, when a gorgeous hold display mode is disclosed all at once, such as a rainbow-colored hold icon, it becomes a masterpiece effect mode rather than the appearance of different hold display modes. On the other hand, when the above-described “hold display sequential disclosure effect” is adopted, since the secret hold icons are sequentially disclosed, for example, the first dedicated hold display mode of the hold icon disclosed first and the next disclosure are disclosed. If the hold icon is in the same dedicated hold display mode, the possibility of the same all-hold display and the same display effect increases at this point, and the hold icon to be disclosed after that is the same dedicated hold display mode. Whether or not it is so, the player can watch the performance with great tension and expectation, and can watch the special pending change notice carefully.

  In addition, as described above, the 14th effect example is a very strong impact change effect that is displayed in the same display mode in the all hold display during the disclosure effect, and therefore, the winning expectation expectation is relatively high. It is preferable to define as one aspect of “high expectation notice effect”. For example, if the variation pattern type related to the action-pending ball or the game-in-progress hold K that is subject to the advance notice is a hit variation pattern type, or a hit type with a relatively high profit status is specified among the hit variation pattern types Such as when it is related to a specific reach type with a relatively high winning expectation (for example, SP reach 6 or SP reach 7). It is preferable to define as a rare production mode that can be produced.

(15th special hold change notice effect mode (hold display area (all hold display part) concealment effect): FIG. 53B)
Next, with reference to FIG. 53B, a fifteenth effect example of special hold change notice will be described. As a feature of the fifteenth effect example, in the explosion effect (secret effect), by displaying the explosion R so as to entirely cover the hold display area (76, 77, 76h), the result is displayed. The hold display area (all hold display part) is a secret effect such that the hold display (hold icon) in the inside is hidden. FIG. 53B illustrates four types of on-hold display area concealment effects in the case of concealing different on-hold display areas (76, 77, 76h) as the fifteenth effect example.

  53B (A) and 53 (B) show a case where the entire hold display area 76 is concealed when the hold icon of the special symbol 1 is being displayed. ing. 53B (C) and 53 (D) show the hold display areas 76 and 77 when the hold icons of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are being displayed. The case where the whole is concealed is shown. 53B (E) and (F) show a case where the entire hold display area 76h is concealed when the hold icon is being displayed. 53B (G) and (H) show an example of the display (hereinafter referred to as “15th effect example D”) when the hold icons of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are being displayed. The case where the whole is concealed is shown. In the fifteenth effect examples A to D, at the start of the special hold change notice, there are three hold memories on the special symbol 1 side (three hold icons corresponding to the hold display portions a1 to c1 of the hold display area 76 are lit). And a case in which there is a game running hold K corresponding to the special symbol 1 is illustrated.

  As shown in (B), (D), (F), and (H) in the same figure, when the concealment state is generated, if the hold display area is entirely covered by the explosion smoke R, the currently displayed state is displayed. Regardless of the number of held displays (the number of held icons), it is possible to keep all held displays (all held icons) in a concealed state. Such a reserved display area concealment effect conceals only the on-hold display that is currently displayed, because the concealment area can be set without confirming whether or not the hold icon is displayed and how many display the display is. This is preferable in that the burden of effect control can be reduced rather than the concealment effect.

  In the fifteenth effect example A, the case where only the hold icon of the special symbol 1 is displayed has been described. However, when only the hold icon of the special symbol 2 is displayed, the corresponding hold display area 77 is entirely displayed. Should be kept secret. The fifteenth effect example can be applied to the first to tenth effects (FIGS. 37 to 49) and the thirteenth to fourteenth effect examples (FIGS. 52 to 53A). This is because the eleventh effect example is related to the display of the explosion R in relation to the shift display, and the twelfth effect example applies the fifteenth effect example because the secret area expansion effect appears when holding is added. Because you can't.

  Here, in the fifteenth production examples A to D, because of the concealment state of the hold display area, a special design actuating ball (for example, the fourth actuating reserve ball of the special design 1) during the explosion effect (confidential production). ) Is newly stored, it is difficult to determine whether or not a new operation holding ball has been generated because the hold display area is in a secret state as a whole, that is, the hold display portion is in a secret state. Alternatively, the state is indistinguishable. Therefore, when a new operation hold ball is generated during the concealment state, it is preferable to use the “hold display semi-confidential effect” for the hold display corresponding thereto. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the presence or absence of a new operation hold ball in the concealed state, and when a new operation hold ball is generated, the hold display including the operation hold ball is displayed as a special hold change notice. Can be the target of.

  In the first effect example to the fifteenth effect example described above, the example of realizing the concealment state using the dedicated concealment image (explosive smoke image R) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the confidential state may be realized by the following image processing. For example, the concealment state may be revealed by converting the resolution of the hold icon image to a lower resolution (for example, one tenth resolution) than the resolution before the concealment effect. When using the method of converting to the low resolution to make it a concealed state, first, the hold display (hold icon image) being displayed at a high resolution is gradually changed to a low resolution (for example, the normal resolution is reduced to 2 minutes). (1 → 1/4 → 1/12) so that the resolution is gradually lowered), the resolution is instantly switched to the lower resolution, and the hold display is kept in a secret state. The resolution can be switched to a high resolution gradually or instantaneously, and the hold display can be displayed again at the original resolution. In addition, about each holding | maintenance display mode, it may be made the same low resolution, and it may be made into a different low resolution according to a holding | maintenance display part. Can be determined. Further, the image processing method for converting from the normal high resolution to the low resolution is not particularly limited as long as the concealment state can be realized.

  In addition to the image processing for conversion to low resolution as described above, the concealment state may be realized by performing mosaic processing, blurring processing, grayscale processing, or darkness conversion processing for changing the color tone (brightness). . Note that these image processing methods are not particularly limited as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved.

(Concealment effect by moving object)
Moreover, not only the method of controlling to a concealment state by image processing, but a concealment state may be realized using a movable body accessory. For example, at the time of concealment production, a specific movable body accessory (confidential accessory) is displaced to the front side of the on-hold display area, and the on-hold display area is made entirely invisible from the player side. May be in a concealed state, or a concealed accessory made of plastic or glass with low transparency may be used to create a state in which the hold icon is difficult or invisible.

(Appearance of concealment production (confidential state) by different production means)
In addition, when the concealment effect using the concealment object and the concealment effect by the image processing are configured to be executable, and the hold icon is to be disclosed as a low expectation hold icon, image processing is performed as a normal concealment effect. In the case where the concealment effect is executed and the hold icon is a high expectation hold icon and is scheduled to be disclosed, the concealment effect using the concealment effect can be executed as a special concealment effect. Further, when the hold icon is a high-expectation hold icon and is scheduled to be disclosed, the concealment effect by the concealment object is executed with a higher probability than when the hold icon is scheduled to be disclosed with the low expectation hold icon. In this way, by making it possible to selectively execute the concealment effect using the movable object and the concealment effect by the image processing, the winning winning is determined according to what kind of effect means the concealment state is achieved. Since the expectation feeling and the hold change expectation can be heard, the special hold change notice effect can be further enjoyed.

(Pending display by sub liquid crystal display)
Further, as described above, in the first effect example to the fifteenth effect example as the special hold change notice effect, one liquid crystal display device 36 is used, and in the same liquid crystal screen, in parallel with the decorative symbol variation display game, The example in which the hold icon is displayed in the specific display area (hold display area) has been described, but instead of using one liquid crystal display device 36, another liquid crystal display device (hereinafter referred to as “sub-display”) provided separately. The liquid crystal display device) may be provided with hold display areas similar to the hold display areas 77, 76, and 76h (hold display portions a1 to d1, a2 to d2), and a hold icon may be displayed there. In this case, two liquid crystal displays, such as executing the concealment effect and the disclosure effect of the special hold change notice on the sub liquid crystal display device side where the hold display is performed, and executing the character appearance effect and the action effect on the liquid crystal display device 36 side. Since the special hold change notice can be executed in such a manner that the liquid crystal screens of the devices are linked together, the degree of freedom of production is increased as compared with the use of a single liquid crystal display device. Alternatively, the decorative symbol variation display game may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 side, and the special hold change notice may be executed on the sub liquid crystal display device side. In this case, since the notice effect related to the decorative symbol variation display game and the special hold change notice can be displayed on different LCD screens, both notice effects may be superimposed and difficult to see, or the player may confuse both notice effects. It is preferable in that it can be prevented.

  Further, the sub liquid crystal display device may be configured to be operable in a predetermined operation pattern (for example, the sub liquid crystal display device can be displaced and the liquid crystal screen can be rotated). By configuring the sub liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal screen) so that it can be displaced or rotated, it is possible to realize a concealed state using the sub liquid crystal display device itself and further enhance the production. For example, in a normal state (in a non-confidential state), the image display screen side is stopped toward the player side (normal position), and the hold display unit (hold icon) is stopped at a position where the player can visually recognize it. However, in the concealment effect, the image display screen is stopped at a position where the image display screen cannot be visually recognized (for example, the image display screen is rotated 180 degrees and turned upside down) (confidential position) so that the reserved display portion cannot be seen from the player. . In the case of a disclosure effect, the image display screen is rotated so as to return to the original position (the image display screen is rotated 180 degrees in the same direction and returned to the normal position), and the player visually recognizes the hold icon. As a result, the effect result can be derived and displayed.

  As one aspect of the pre-reading notice effect, if the above-mentioned hold addition command specifies 2R short open latency big win or small win, the possibility of CZ entry (2R short open latency big win or small win) A pre-reading notice effect for CZ rush notice, such as announcing (winning), can be configured to appear. Further, when an operation holding ball is generated during CZ, a pre-reading notice effect for the operation holding ball can be displayed according to the current jackpot lottery probability state. For example, when an operation holding ball is generated in CZ, a dedicated pre-reading notice effect (for example, a holding display related to the current operation holding ball is displayed with a higher probability in the high probability state than in the low probability state. , Change to a dedicated display during CZ indicating the possibility of a high probability state).

  Heretofore, the first to fifteenth effect examples have been representatively described as the special hold change notice effect. Of these effects, it can be determined as appropriate whether to adopt one or more types of special hold change notices. In addition, which production example is adopted is free.

  The special hold change notice effect according to the present embodiment described above can be configured as follows.

  When the starting means detects a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information, a lottery means for executing a lottery for winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, and a display of fluctuations in game symbols Until the symbol display means for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means in accordance with the stop display mode of the game symbol, and the game information acquired by the acquisition means for the game symbol change display operation in the symbol display means A holding storage means for holding and storing a predetermined maximum holding storage number as an upper limit, and a holding display means for notifying the fact by a predetermined holding display mode when game information is held and stored in the holding storage means (for example, liquid crystal The display device 36) and the game symbol variation display operation based on the hold memory are executed, and at least the lottery result by the lottery means is pre-readingly determined. A hold display mode (hold display portions a1 to d1, a2 to d2, game running hold K, and the like of hold icons such as a read determination unit and prefetch information related to a prefetch determination result by the prefetch determination unit is displayed on the hold display unit. And a hold display control means configured to be capable of notification control using a display mode).

  The hold display means is configured to be able to individually display a hold display mode corresponding to each hold storage of the hold storage means. In addition, when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when a plurality of hold display modes are displayed on the hold display unit, the hold display control unit performs the above-described hit display mode more than the current hold display mode. A hold change display determination means for determining whether or not to execute a hold change display that can be changed and displayed in another hold display mode (dedicated hold display mode) that suggests that the winning expectation degree of the is relatively high, and the hold Suspension change display control means for executing and controlling the change display. The hold change display control means is a concealment state that makes it difficult or impossible to discriminate a plurality of hold display modes displayed on the hold display means when the hold change display determining means determines to execute hold change display. Control (display control of the concealment effect) and the concealment state control means, the concealment state is canceled, and other hold display modes related to the change display target are displayed on the hold display means ( And release display control means for controlling the disclosure effect (see, for example, FIGS. 37 to 53A).

  Moreover, it can be set as another structure as follows. The hold display means displays the hold display mode corresponding to each hold data stored in the hold storage means in a specific display area (for example, the hold display areas 76, 77, and 76h). Composed. In addition, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied when a plurality of hold display modes are displayed on the hold display unit, the hold display control unit is more likely to perform the hit display than the current hold display mode for the plurality of hold display modes. A hold change display determining means for determining whether or not to execute a hold change display that can be changed and displayed in another hold display mode that suggests that the expected expectation is relatively high, and a hold change that controls execution of the hold change display Display control means. The hold change display control means controls, when each hold change display determination means decides to execute the hold change display, at least the specific display area in a concealed state in which it is difficult to determine or cannot be determined. The concealment state control means for making the display mode difficult or indistinguishable, and the release of the concealment state to release the other hold display mode on the hold display unit for the hold display mode related to the change display target Display control means (see, for example, FIG. 53B).

(7-2. Gimmick interlock button notice effect: FIGS. 54 to 58)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58, the “gimmic interlocking button notice” using the effect of the movable body accessory will be described in detail.

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the gimmick interlock button notice, an outline of the “gimmick interlock button notice” will be described first. This “gimmic interlocking button notice” is an effect mode belonging to “button notice notice” and “hold change notice” which are player participation type effects. In the case of the present embodiment, when the gimmick interlock button notice is started, as a part of the production scenario, first, the person gimmick 93 (fourth movable object) operates in a predetermined operation pattern, and this is used as a precursor effect or As an indication effect, a button notice effect (button display effect) that prompts the user to operate the frame effect button 13 appears for a predetermined effect time. The predetermined time after the button notice effect appears is set as an input reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the frame effect button 13, and whether the player has performed an operation within this input reception valid period. Whether or not is monitored. Then, when the input acceptance valid period elapses, an input acceptance invalid period in which the operation of the frame effect button 13 related to the current button notice effect is treated as invalid is entered.

  When the player operates the frame effect button 13 during the input acceptance valid period, an image display effect (action effect) accompanying the operation of the person gimmick 93 appears, and the hold display mode is a button operation as the effect result. It may change to a display mode different from the previous display mode (derivation of effect results). Special game information (predetermined game information such as information related to winning winning expectation and information related to reach type) is notified to the player by using the hold display mode after the change. Note that the game information can be notified by the hold change in the same manner as the special hold change notice and the general hold notice already described.

(Execution opportunity of gimmick interlock button notice (execution lottery opportunity)
As for the execution trigger of the gimmick-linked button notice, not only the action-holding ball (winning) is generated, but the action-holding ball is generated, as in the pre-reading notice effect of the winning change system (general hold change notice). Sometimes when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when there are multiple hold indications when an operation hold ball is generated, or when a general hold change notice is scheduled for the previously stored operation hold ball) , A predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game (for example, at the start of the symbol variation display game (at the start of decoration symbol variation), or any one of the above-mentioned reach title, reach production, and symbol temporary stop state) For example), a predetermined timing during a big hit game (for example, at the start of a specific round game, during a specific round game, at the end of a specific round game, Ingu the presentation start time, etc.) can be provided with the execution timing of such. However, in the case of this embodiment, when executing the gimmick interlock button notice, it is ensured that the presentation time width required for executing the gimmick interlock button notice is ensured (for example, a plurality of symbol variation display games are straddled during execution). (If the performance is not hindered, such as when a big hit game is started in the middle of execution), the “appropriate appearance conditions” are ensured, such as not significantly obstructing other notice effects by executing the gimmick-linked button notice. It is necessary to be. The point that an appropriate appearance condition is required is the same as the special hold change notice described above (see step S601 in FIG. 21 and step S1101 in FIG. 33 described later). As for the start timing, various start timings can be provided in the same manner as the special hold change notice described above.

  Next, the gimmick interlock button notice will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 54 to 58 are explanatory views for explaining a production mode of the gimmick interlocking button notice according to the present embodiment.

  54 to 58 show, as an effect mode of the gimmick interlock button notice, by associating the operation of the person gimmick 93 with the moving image in the liquid crystal screen 36 and changing the moving image along with the operation of the person gimmick 93, This is an example of a “pending change notice” that appears as if the hold display mode displayed as a hold icon image on the LCD screen is changed by the action of the person gimmick 93. is there.

(First gimmick interlock button notice effect mode: FIG. 54)
First, with reference to FIG. 54, a first gimmick production example of the gimmick interlock button notice will be described. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first gimmick effect example of the gimmick interlock button notice. Further, in this first gimmick production example, with respect to the hold display in the liquid crystal screen (liquid crystal screen 36) of the liquid crystal display device 36, the display mode of the hold icon is a moving image (projection N3) accompanying the operation of the person gimmick 93. This is an example of a case that is changed by movement.

  However, in this first gimmick production example, when a plurality of operation hold balls are stored, that is, when a gimmick interlock button notice is generated while a plurality of hold indications are displayed, these hold results are displayed as the production results. The production mode is such that any one of the displays can be changed to a dedicated hold display mode. In this respect, it has the same character as the first effect example of the special hold change notice in FIG.

  Specifically, in the first gimmick production example, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed, it is prohibited to change the plurality of hold displays (prohibition of a duplicate hold change notice), and a predetermined priority ( Based on the priority hold change order), any one of the plurality of hold displays is allowed to change. In other words, any one of a plurality of existing action-holding balls (in this embodiment, including the game-in-progress hold K. The same applies hereinafter) is set as the target of the hold change notice. Here, as the above-mentioned “predetermined priority order”, as in the first effect example shown in FIG. 37 of the special hold change notice, it corresponds to the action hold ball with the highest expected winning chance among the existing action hold balls. The hold display (hold icon) is the subject of the hold change notice. In addition, when the winning winning expectation degree is the same for all the operation holding balls, one of them is determined as a target of the holding change notice by lottery. Hereinafter, the first gimmick effect example will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Hereinafter, a first gimmick production example of the gimmick interlock button notice will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, as the display state of the liquid crystal display device 36 before starting the gimmick interlock button notice, the liquid crystal display device 36 (liquid crystal screen 36), which is a symbol variation display game, is displayed in the hold display areas a1 to a1 in the hold display area 76. A case where a hold icon with a white circle (normal hold color) is displayed on each of c1 and a game execution hold K with a white circle is displayed on the icon of the receiving seat J, that is, currently three special symbols 1 A case in which the operation holding ball is stored on hold and the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the special symbol 1 is being executed (the special symbol 1 is in the variable display operation) will be described as a representative example (described later in FIGS. 55 to 57). The same applies to the second to fifth gimmick examples.

  First, in FIG. 54 (A), a pedestal J, a game running hold K above it, and three hold icons on standby are displayed as images on the liquid crystal screen 36 during the symbol variation display operation. When the gimmick interlock button notice is started, the arm gimmick 93 located on the right side of the screen continuously swings the “arm 94” that is one of its movable parts up and down (arm sign operation state) It is in. This is a sign (predictor) effect that has a high expectation of winning, and it is expected that some effect will occur after this, increasing the tension of the player in the game.

  Next, the process moves to (B), and when the production scenario proceeds, the person gimmick 93 stops waving his arm, and then the button notice production is started. As part of this, the button image Y imitating the frame production button 13 is displayed. The “button display effect” to be executed is executed. In the illustrated example, the opening operation of “mouth 95” that is one of the movable parts of the person gimmick 93 appears, and in conjunction with this, the shape of the balloon is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 36 near the mouth 95. A telop P is displayed. Here, in order to prompt the operation of the frame effect button 13, as the display contents of the telop P, a “push button image Y” that imitates the frame effect button 13 and a message “try to press it all at once?” (Telop display) In this “button display effect”, the “movable body effect” by the person gimmick 93 and the “image display effect” by the speech balloon image are well linked to express a person uttering words while gesturing. Gimmick-linked button notice effect (gimmick-linked button notice effect) 'is realized. In particular, the push button image Y and the message prompting the button operation are displayed in the vicinity of the person gimmick 93, so that the push button image Y and the image display effect of the message are related to the movable object effect by the person gimmick 93. The player can be reminded of being there.

  Next, (C) shows a case where the player presses the frame effect button 13 within the input reception valid period during the button notice effect (button display effect), and the player presses the frame effect button 13. The person gimmick 93 performs an “arm swinging motion” by swinging the arm 94 (hand 96) up and down once or a plurality of times by pressing or every time the button is pressed. An item image imitating a flame bullet (guide bullet) in the liquid crystal screen 36 in the vicinity of the arm 94 (hand 96) of the person gimmick 93 so as to be linked well with the movement of the arm 94 (hand 96) by this arm swinging motion. (Projection N3) appears, and this projection N3 moves toward the hold icon while drawing a parabolic trajectory. As a result, an action effect (an operation-time gimmick-linked effect) that expresses that the person gimmick 93 throws the flame bullet at the hold icon (target) appears.

  In this example, in which part of the moving process until the projectile N3 (flame bullet) hits the target hold icon, it becomes unclear to which hold icon the projectile N3 moves. . As a result, it becomes unclear which hold icon the projective body N3 will hit, and the player will be inferred from the guess element such as “Which hold icon will hit (subject to hold change notice)?” Can be given.

  In addition, in (C) of the figure, the case where the number of shots of the projectile N3 is one is illustrated, but not limited to this, for example, as in a second gimmick effect example and a third gimmick effect example described later, A plurality of projectiles N3 (flame bullets) may be made to appear in accordance with the number of operations of the frame effect button 13 by the player. In this case, the number of shots of the projectile N3 (flame bullet) can be associated with the hold change expectation degree and the winning winning expectation degree. For example, the number of flame bullets is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 3-7, etc.) according to the degree of expected change in holding or the degree of expectation of winning a win, and many flame bullets appear. The degree of expectation can be increased as much as possible (for example, the expectation degree of winning is higher when only seven shots are revealed than when only five are revealed). In this way, since the number of shots appearing on the screen can be used as an estimation element of the winning expectation degree, the player will actively operate the frame effect button 13 and go to the effect. Can improve their willingness to participate.

  Next, in (D), the thrown projectile N3 (flame bullet) hits the landing icon of the target (landing), and a smoke screen (smoke screen image) R covering the area near the holding icon is generated. Here, a “landing effect (confidential effect)” representing that a flame bullet hits the hold icon and the smoke screen R is generated so as to cover the hold icon appears. When the smoke screen R is generated and the hold icon disappears from the liquid crystal screen 36, that is, when the smoke icon R is set in a secret state, the hold icon of the current hold change notice target is notified. As for the concealment state, as in the concealment state in the “special hold change advance notice (FIGS. 37 to 53C)” already described, at least the hold display mode is difficult to distinguish (difficult to see) or cannot be discriminated (not visible). In this example, there is one hold icon to be concealed.

  In this example, when the projective object N3 hits the target hold icon, the hold change target hold icon is temporarily set in a hidden state, the player is expected to change the display mode of the hold icon, and the hidden state is released. Until then, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation of changes on hold. The point that the hold icon is kept secret in this way and the expectation for the hold change is increased is the same as the effect of the covert effect in the “special hold change notice (FIGS. 37 to 53C)” already described.

  Next, in (E), the smoke screen R disappears, the hold icon is changed from the hidden state to the disclosed state, and the held icon is displayed again (disclosure effect). At this time, the hold display mode of the hold icon hit by the projectile N3 (flame bullet) may change at least one of the color and the pattern or the shape. Here, a case is shown in which the display color of the hold icon in the hold display portion b1 is changed from normal white (normal hold color) to a dedicated hold color (for example, green). As for the series of performance aspects of “the hold icon is set in a concealed state and then in a disclosed state” shown in (D) to (E) above, the concealment effect in the “special hold change notice (FIGS. 37 to 53C)” already described. The content is substantially the same as the series of presentation aspects of the disclosure effect. Here, a case where the normal white color (normally reserved color) is changed to a dedicated reserved color (for example, green) is shown. Note that the hold icon does not always change before and after the disclosure, and even if the projectile N3 (flame bullet) does not hit the target hold icon and disappears from the screen as it is or hits it, the hold display mode is changed. There is also a so-called “gase effect” that is maintained in the same hold display mode as before the hit.

  In (E), when the projectile N3 (flame bullet) hits, the “mouth 95” of the person gimmick 93 opens, and in conjunction with this, the telop P appears, For example, a message such as “A hit!” Is displayed in the display frame (telop display effect). Note that, here, an example in which the hold display has been changed by the message display of “Accurate!” Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special game information may be notified by a message of telop P. . For example, “Next time fluctuation ... Fever!”, “Next time, reach type is SP reach 6!”, “Winning expectation 50%!”, Etc. It is possible to notify the contents related to the reach production scheduled to be executed. Thus, by combining the effect by the person gimmick 93, the button notice effect, and the prefetch notice (holding change notice, telop notice), the range of effects can be expanded and the variations of the effects can be made rich. In addition, when the game running hold K is targeted, according to the notification timing of the effect result of the gimmick-linked button notice, the type of reach effect scheduled to be executed, the expected winning degree, etc. will be announced in the current symbol variation display game. be able to.

  Then, when the disclosure effect in (E) is ended, the movable part of the person gimmick 93 is returned to the initial position, and the display of the telop P is ended to notify the end of the gimmick interlock button notice. As a result, a series of gimmick interlock button notices are completed (the same applies to second to fifth gimmick effects shown in FIGS. 55 to 58 described later).

(About gimmick-linked production during operation)
The motion pattern (arm swing motion pattern) of the arm 94 of the person gimmick 93 in the above-mentioned “operational gimmick-linked effect” can be set to a different motion pattern according to the expected winning degree of the hold display to be changed. . For example, based on the pre-reading determination information if the target is an operation holding ball, if the target is an in-game execution hold K, the variation pattern information of the symbol variation display game or the notice effect to be developed from now on Based on the content of the (production scenario) (for example, the number of times information for pseudo-rendition, reach type information for reach production, etc.), one of a plurality of types of operation patterns associated with the winning expectation degree is selected. You may decide by lottery. For example, in the case of pre-read variation pattern information with relatively high win-winning expectation or variation pattern information at the start of variation (for example, in the case of SP reach 6 to 7), the arm swing is more flashy than the normal arm swing motion pattern The operation pattern (for example, one or a plurality of rotations of the arm 94) can be selected to increase the probability of being selected.

  In addition, as the “operational gimmick-linked effect”, the movement of a movable object (for example, the arm 94, mouth 95, hand 96, etc. of the person gimmick 93) and a specific image (for example, a projectile (flame bullet) in the liquid crystal screen 36). ) N3, telop P, aura Z, etc. (moving images or still images) are associated with each other, and a specific image is linked (operated in conjunction with the movement of the movable part) to form a design that makes one sense. Or it reminds the player something or feel a sense of unity, or they are mixed together, as if the specific image is part of a movable object, on the contrary, as if it is a movable object It is possible to present an effect such that an accessory behaves like an image display effect linked with a specific image. For example, in FIG. 54 (CF), a specific image display effect (aura Z (aura image Z)) is displayed in the peripheral area of the hand 96, and a state appears as if the aura is wrapped around the hand 96. The person gimmick 93 is thrown as much as possible when the throwing body N3 is thrown from the hand 96 by expressing the aura Z following the hand 96 as the arm 94 swings. Can be reminiscent, or it can be reminiscent of the projectile N3 moving toward the target (the hold icon of the hold display portion b1) with momentum. As described above, by executing the specific operation by the person gimmick 93 and the specific image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36 together, attention to the gimmick interlock button notice can be gathered. Note that a specific image such as the aura Z (specific image display effect) may be displayed by selecting one of a plurality of types related to the winning expectation degree. For example, it can be configured such that the winning winning expectation for the player increases in the order of white (normal color), blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors such that the aura color is a reserved color.

  In the gimmick-linked button notice effect according to the first gimmick effect example described above (as well as in the second to fifth gimmick effect examples in FIGS. 55 to 58 described later), the image display effect is exclusively used as in a conventional gaming machine. On the other hand, while the hold change notice is developed, the item image (projection N3) used for deriving the effect (hold change) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 first. As a sign effect that suggests the effect, a first effect aspect that executes a sign operation effect in which the person gimmick 93 operates in the first action mode appears, and after this first effect mode (after the sign operation effect) ), A second effect mode for displaying the item image on the liquid crystal display device 3 appears. In the present embodiment, when the gimmick-linked button notice effect appears, the predictive effect by the movable object is first displayed before the image display effect related to this. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a special notice effect that will be notified of advantageous information is started. Therefore, the player who sees the sign effect will have a sense of expectation that an opportunity to obtain advantageous game information has arrived as the game progresses.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the button notice effect is composed solely of the image display effect, whereas in the gimmick-linked button notice of the present invention, the “movable object effect” by the movable object and the frame effect button The “button notice effect (button display effect)” that prompts the user to operate 13 and the “hold change effect” derived as the effect result after the operation of the frame effect button 13 are closely associated with each other. It is designed to be versatile, and it is possible to demonstrate the full appeal of the effect of button notices. In particular, after the indication effect that moves the movable object appears, the appearance timing and the position of the button notification effect appear in a form that is well linked to the operation of the person gimmick 93. It is possible to strongly appeal the operation request to the button 13 and prompt the player to participate in the button notice effect. As a result, the original significance of the button notice effect can be fully exhibited. In addition, the appearance timing and the appearance position of the item image (projection N3) used for derivation of the effect result are also displayed in a form that is well coordinated with the operation of the person gimmick 93. Therefore, the fun of the button operation can be increased and the fun of the game can be improved as compared with the conventional game machine which is composed solely of the image display effect.

  If the player does not operate the button during the operation valid reception period during the button notice effect, the thrower N3 is forcibly thrown after the operation valid reception period, and the effect result (change in hold display) is derived. However, if you do not operate the button, do not derive the production result (do not cause any pending change), do not notify the special game information, gimmick interlock, It is preferable to encourage participation in the button notice.

(Second gimmick interlock button notice effect mode: FIG. 55)
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the 2nd gimmick production example of gimmick interlocking button notice is demonstrated. In this second gimmick production example, the display mode of any one of the on-hold hold icons on the liquid crystal screen 36 is changed by the movement of the moving image (projection N3) accompanying the operation of the person gimmick 93. Is the same as the first gimmick production example described above, but the second gimmick production example and the first gimmick production example differ greatly in the color associated with the expected winning degree in the displayed pitch N3. In addition, the “special pitch N3” in which the display mode is changed in the pattern or one or the shape thereof is mixed. In addition, below, description about the content of the production | generation similar to the 1st gimmick production example is demonstrated, abbreviate | omitting suitably in order to avoid duplication description.

  Here, as in the first gimmick production example, a hold icon with a white circle (normal hold color) is displayed on each of the hold display portions a1 to c1 in the hold display area 76, and a white circle is displayed on the icon of the seat J. The case where the game execution hold K is displayed is shown.

  First, in FIG. 5A, when the gimmick interlock button notice is started, a sign (predictor) effect accompanied by an arm swinging motion state in which the person gimmick 93 continuously swings the arm 94 up and down is executed. It will make you feel that there will be a production, and will increase the tension of the player.

  Next, in (B), the person gimmick 93 stops waving his arm, and then the opening operation of opening the mouth 95 of the person gimmick 93 appears, and in conjunction with this, the liquid crystal screen 36 near the mouth 95 is displayed. A telop P in the form of a balloon appears. Here, as the display contents of the telop P, a message “push button image Y” imitating the frame effect button 13 and a message “try to strike repeatedly?” Are displayed (gimmic interlocking button notice effect). Similar to the first gimmick effect example, this effect also prompts the player to press the frame effect button 13 as a player participation type button notice effect. In this example, during the button operation reception valid period, the projectile N3 is continuously fired every time a button operation is received as an effective operation. During the acceptance valid period, the push button image Y is continuously displayed on the telop P, and the player is notified that the operation of the frame effect button 13 can be performed again.

  Next, (C) shows a case where the player presses the frame effect button 13, and the person gimmick 93 pushes the arm 94 once when the player presses or presses the frame effect button 13. Or, swing up and down multiple times. Along with this arm swinging motion, a projectile N3 (flame bullet) appears one after another from the arm 94 (hand 96) of the person gimmick 93 (FIGS. (D) to (E)), and these are released toward the hold icon. Move while drawing the object trajectory. As a result, an action effect (a gimmick-linked effect at the time of operation) that expresses that the person gimmick 93 continuously throws the flame bullet (projection N3) toward the hold icon (target) appears. At this time, if there are multiple released projectiles N3 (flame bullets), they do not necessarily move toward the target, but move away from the hold display area and disappear from the screen. A throwing object N3 that appears off the screen without hitting the icon and moves off the target can appear. By the appearance of a plurality of the throwing bodies N3, it is possible to notify the player that there is a possibility that the display mode of the plurality of hold icons may change, not just the display mode of one hold icon.

  The difference between (D) to (E) in FIG. 55 and (C) in FIG. 54 is that in FIG. 55 (D) to (E), at least one of the color and pattern of the flame bullet as the projectile N3 or The shape is mixed with a normal shape and a shape whose expectation is higher than normal. This predicts that the pitch N3 will hit and the display mode of the hold icon will change to a higher win expectation than usual.

  In the case of the figure, the winning expectations are “small”, “medium”, and “large” in the order of flame bullets with “plain color <oblique line <filled”. That is, in FIG. 4D, first, regarding the degree of tension that predicts that the throwing object N3 will hit and the display state of the hold icon will change to a higher winning expectation than usual, The expected chance of winning is not increased so much because the flame bomb is a plain flame bullet with a winning expectation of “small”. However, since the second flame bullet is a flame bullet with a diagonal line with a winning expectation degree of “medium”, tension to the winning expectation degree is enhanced. Next, since the third flame bullet is a painted flame bullet with a winning expectation degree of “Large”, the winning expectation degree is raised to the climax. Next, the tension is eased by the fact that the fourth flame bullet is a plain flame bullet with a winning expectation of “small”. If one of these flame bullets has a high expectation level, the player determines that the game result of this symbol variation display game has a high winning expectation, and expects Will be greatly inflated. In this way, by mixing the flame bullets with those that are normal and those that have changed to a higher winning expectation than usual, the player's degree of tension to the winning expectation greatly varies Can be made.

  Next, in (E) to (F), each time the thrown projectile N3 (flame bullet) hits one of the held icons, a smoke screen R covering the held icon is generated. Here, the smoke screen R generated at the time of hitting has a change related to the hold change expectation degree (winning expectation expectation degree). The difference between (E) and (F) in the figure is that in (E), a plain flame bullet (winning expectation “small”) hits, but a white smoke screen with a low pending change expectation (winning expectation) (F) indicates a colored smoke screen R with a hatched or filled flame bullet hit and a high retention change expectation (winning expectation expectation) is high (for example, green) Yes.

  Next, in (G), the display mode of the hold icon hit by the projectile N3 (flame bullet) changes to a color and / or pattern having a higher winning expectation than usual, or one or the shape thereof. At this time, a telop P indicating that the player has hit is displayed as an image. In this example, the hold icon of the hold display portion b1 changes to a hold icon with a diagonal line having a higher win-winning expectation than usual.

  The above-mentioned second gimmick effect example can also exhibit the same effects as the first gimmick effect example. Furthermore, in the second gimmick production example, the pitch N3 is changed not only to the normal one but also to at least one of the color and the pattern or the normal one and the one with higher expectation of winning than usual. When the pitch N3 is thrown, it is possible to change the degree of tension to the player's winning expectation and improve the fun of the button notice effect.

(Third gimmick interlock button notice effect mode: FIG. 56)
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the 3rd gimmick production example of gimmick interlocking button notice is demonstrated. In this third gimmick production example, there are a plurality of types of flame bullets as thrown projectiles N3, and colors and patterns related to the winning expectation degree or one of them is included in the plurality of projectiles N3. Or it is the same as the second gimmick effect example that the display modes are changed in shape, but “multiple hold display can change”, that is, “multiple hold display change notice is allowed” ”Is different from the first and second gimmick effects examples in which redundant hold change notices are prohibited and only one hold display is allowed to change. In addition, below, description about the content of the production similar to the 2nd gimmick production example is demonstrated, omitting suitably, in order to avoid duplication description.

  Here, as in the second gimmick effect example, a hold icon with a white circle (normal hold color) is displayed on each of the hold display portions a1 to c1 in the hold display area 76, and a white circle mark is further displayed on the icon of the seat J. The case where the game execution hold K is displayed is shown.

  First, in FIG. 5A, when the gimmick interlock button notice is started, a sign (predictor) effect accompanied by an arm swinging motion state in which the person gimmick 93 continuously swings the arm 94 up and down is executed. It will make you feel that there will be a production, and will increase the tension of the player.

  Next, in (B), the person gimmick 93 stops waving his arm, and then the opening operation of opening the mouth 95 of the person gimmick 93 appears, and in conjunction with this, the liquid crystal screen 36 near the mouth 95 is displayed. A telop P in the form of a balloon appears. Here, as the display contents of the telop P, a “push button image Y” simulating the frame effect button 13 and a message “try to strike repeatedly?” Appear (gimmic interlocking button notice effect). Similar to the first gimmick effect example, this effect also prompts the player to press the frame effect button 13 as a player participation type button notice effect.

  Next, (C) shows a case where the player presses the frame effect button 13, and the person gimmick 93 pushes the arm 94 once when the player presses or presses the frame effect button 13. Or, swing up and down multiple times. When the player repeatedly hits the frame effect button 13 with this arm swinging action, images of the projectile N3 imitating flame bullets appear one after another in the liquid crystal screen 36, as in the second gimmick effect example. This projectile N3 moves while drawing a parabolic trajectory toward each holding icon (FIGS. (D) to (E)). As a result, an action effect (a gimmick-linked effect at the time of operation) that expresses that the person gimmick 93 continuously throws the flame bullet (projection N3) toward the hold icon (target) appears.

  56 (D) to (F) and the example of FIG. 55 (D) to (F) are different in FIG. 56 (D) to (F) in the target of the projectile N3 (flame bullet). Is a plurality of hold icons. For example, in FIG. 56 (D), two flame bullets move while drawing a parabolic trajectory so as to target different targets, respectively, and in FIG. 56 (E), three flame bullets respectively It moves while drawing a parabolic trajectory to target different targets.

  Next, in (F), a plurality of released projectiles N3 (flame bullets) hit two of the respective holding icons (in the drawing, holding icons of the holding display portions b1 and c1), and these holding icons A state (secret state) in which the smoke screen R is generated is shown. Thereby, it is notified that a plurality of hold icons have been subject to hold change notice.

  Next, in (G), the display mode of the hold icon hit by the projectile N3 (flame bullet) changes to a color and / or pattern having a higher winning expectation than usual, or one or the shape thereof. At this time, a telop P indicating that the player has hit is displayed as an image. In this example, two of the hold icons of the hold display portions b1 and c1 are a hold icon with a diagonal line that has a higher win-winning expectation than usual, and a filled hold icon with a higher win-win expectation than the hold icon with a diagonal line. To change.

  The above-mentioned third gimmick effect example can also exhibit the same effects as the first gimmick effect example and the second gimmick effect example. Furthermore, in the third gimmick production example, the player holds various expectations, such as whether the change is one or more, in that a plurality of hold displays can be changed to a dedicated hold display mode. Can do.

(Fourth gimmick interlock button notice effect mode: FIG. 57)
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the 4th gimmick production example of gimmick interlocking button notice is demonstrated. In the fourth gimmick production example, the display mode of the pending hold icon in the liquid crystal screen 36 is changed by the movement of the moving image (projection N3) accompanying the operation of the person gimmick 93. 57 is the same as the first to fourth gimmick effects examples shown in FIG. 57, except that the smoke screen R makes at least the hold display (hold icon) of the existing operation hold ball concealed. In the following, description of the contents of the effects similar to those in the first gimmick effect example in FIG.

  Here, as in the first gimmick production example, a hold icon with a white circle (normal hold color) is displayed on each of the hold display portions a1 to c1 in the hold display area 76, and a white circle is displayed on the icon of the seat J. The case where the game execution hold K is displayed is shown.

  First, in FIG. 5A, when the gimmick interlock button notice is started, a sign (predictor) effect accompanied by an arm swinging motion state in which the person gimmick 93 continuously swings the arm 94 up and down is executed. It will make you feel that there will be a production, and will increase the tension of the player.

  Next, in (B), the person gimmick 93 stops waving his arm, and then the opening operation of opening the mouth 95 of the person gimmick 93 appears, and in conjunction with this, the liquid crystal screen 36 near the mouth 95 is displayed. A telop P in the form of a balloon appears. Here, as the display contents of the telop P, a message “push button image Y” simulating the frame effect button 13 and a message “I want to press it all at once?” Appear (gimmic interlocking button notice effect). As in the first effect example, this effect also prompts the player to press the frame effect button 13 as a player participation type button notice effect.

  Next, (C) shows a case where the player presses the frame effect button 13, and each time the player presses or presses the frame effect button 13, the person gimmick 93 has the arm 94 (hand 96). Is moved up and down once or a plurality of times. As the arm swings, the item image of the projectile N3 (flame bullet) appears from the arm 94 (hand 96) of the person gimmick 93, and the projectile N3 (flame bullet) is released toward the target hold icon. Move while drawing the object trajectory. As a result, an action effect (a gimmick-linked effect at the time of operation) that expresses that the person gimmick 93 hits the hold icon (target) and throws a flame bullet (projection N3) appears. In (C), as in the first gimmick production example, an example of an action production in which only one projecting body N3 is thrown is shown, but this is an example, and the second gimmick production example or the third gimmick production example As in the example, it is possible to employ an action effect in which a plurality of projecting bodies N3 are thrown.

  Next, in (D), the thrown projectile N3 (flame bullet) hits the hold icon, and a landing effect (secret effect) that temporarily hides the hold icon appears. The difference between (D) in FIG. 57 and (D) in the example in FIG. 54 is that in FIG. 57 (D), when the throwing object N3 hits the hold icon as the target, the smoke screen R holds the hold change target. Not only the icons but also all the pending icons that are on standby are kept secret. In (D), the concealment effect in which the hold icon is concealed functions in the same manner as the “explosion effect (concealment effect)” related to the special hold change notice shown in FIGS. 38 to 53B. Any of the “explosion effect (confidential effect)” in FIGS. 38 to 53B can be employed. In addition, the concealment effect may be any of the current on-hold display concealment effect, the on-hold display semi-confidential effect, and the on-hold display area (all on-hold display unit) concealment effect.

  Next, in (E), the smoke screen R disappears and the hold icon is changed from the secret state to the disclosed state. The hold display mode of the hold icon hit by the projectile N3 (flame bullet) can change at least one of the color and the pattern or the shape. At this time, a telop P (“Accurate!”) Indicating that the game has been hit is displayed as an image. In this example, the hold icon in the hold display portion b1 and the hold icon K during game execution are expected to win more than usual. The disclosure effect with the disclosure state shown in (E) can be adopted as any of the disclosure effects related to the special reservation change notice shown in FIGS.

  The above 4th gimmick production example can also show the same operation effect as the 1st gimmick production example. Furthermore, in the fourth gimmick production example, all the standby icons that are on standby are in a concealed state, and the effect of the explosion effect (concealment effect) in a special on-hold change notice in which all of the on-hold icons are also concealed. The same effects can be achieved. The concealment effect in the fourth gimmick effect example is suitable for the third gimmick effect example that allows a plurality of hold display modes to be changed. Further, the concealment state by the smoke screen R may be the “hold display semi-confidential effect”.

(Fifth gimmick interlock button notice effect mode: FIG. 58)
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the 5th gimmick production example of gimmick interlocking button notice is demonstrated. The fifth gimmick effect example is different from the first to fourth gimmick effect examples in that the hold change does not occur but the special game information is notified by the telop P. In the following, description of the contents of the effects similar to those in the first gimmick effect example in FIG.

  Here, as in the first gimmick production example, a hold icon with a white circle (normal hold color) is displayed on each of the hold display portions a1 to c1 in the hold display area 76, and a white circle is displayed on the icon of the seat J. The case where the game execution hold K is displayed is shown.

  First, in FIG. 5A, when the gimmick interlock button notice is started, a sign (predictor) effect accompanied by an arm swinging motion state in which the person gimmick 93 continuously swings the arm 94 up and down is executed. It will make you feel that there will be a production, and will increase the tension of the player.

  Next, in (B), the person gimmick 93 stops waving his arm, and then the opening operation of opening the mouth 95 of the person gimmick 93 appears, and in conjunction with this, the liquid crystal screen 36 near the mouth 95 is displayed. A telop P in the form of a balloon appears. Here, as in the first gimmick production example, as the display contents of the telop P, the message “push button image Y” imitating the frame production button 13 and the message “I want to press it all at once?” Linked button notice effect).

  Next, (C) shows a case where the player presses the frame effect button 13, and each time the player presses or presses the frame effect button 13, the person gimmick 93 has the arm 94 (hand 96). Is moved up and down once or a plurality of times. As the arm swings, the item image of the projectile N3 (flame bullet) appears from the arm 94 (hand 96) of the person gimmick 93, and the projectile N3 moves toward the hold icon while drawing a parabolic trajectory. I will do it. As a result, an action effect (a gimmick-linked effect at the time of operation) that expresses that the person gimmick 93 hits the hold icon (target) and throws a flame bullet (projection N3) appears.

  Next, in (D), the fire bullet as the thrown projectile N3 does not hit the hold icon, and the landing position (in this case, the decoration is irrelevant to the hold display areas 76, 77, 76h and the changing display area 78). It shows a state where an explosion (erroneous explosion) has occurred at a substantially central portion of the symbol variation display area. This effect (error explosion effect) means that no hold change occurs in the present gimmick-linked button notice.

  Next, in (E), a smoke-shaped telop P is displayed at a substantially central portion of the decorative symbol variation display area which is an explosion point, and a “chance” message is displayed as the display content.

  The example of FIG. 58 (D) is different from the example of production of FIGS. 54 to 57 in that a hold change notice by a hold icon is not displayed. That is, the special game information related to the hold display in the liquid crystal screen 36 (in this example, character information of “chance”) is notified, and the player determines which hold icon the information is for. This is an unclear point. Moreover, you may alert | report the content which clarified which hold icon is made into object. For example, display the telop P of a message such as “The change is a big chance!”, Or “The next change is correct!” Or “The dollar box is ready for the next change!” Or a telop P of a message for definitely informing the user may be displayed.

  Unlike the other gimmick effects, the fifth gimmick effect example described above has a gimmick-linked button notice, but no pending change notice is generated as a result of the effect. However, for the player in that special game information related to the hold display (hold icon) in the liquid crystal screen 36 is notified (however, the display to which the hold display is targeted is not notified). Useful game information is reported, and the player can enjoy the game with a sense of expectation at the end of the symbol variation display game developed in the future. In addition, said 5th gimmick production example can be made into the production which can appear in any production example of the 1st-4th gimmick production example.

(Modification)
In addition, although the 1st-5th gimmick production example demonstrated embodiment which derives | leads-out a production result via a button notice production, this invention is not limited to this. For example, in the configuration in which the gimmick-linked button notice effect does not appear, that is, in the first to fifth gimmick effects examples, a “player non-participation-type effect (gimmick-linked effect)” in which no button notice effect is generated can be used. Specifically, after performing the sign (predictor) effect by the person gimmick 93 (without the button notice effect appearing), the swing motion of the person gimmick 93 according to the progress of the effect scenario (according to the progress of the effect time) Is executed, and the item image of the projectile N3 (flame bullet) can be displayed from the arm 94 (hand 96) of the person gimmick 93 in a form linked with the movement pattern of the arm swinging motion. Also in this modified example, when the gimmick-linked button notice effect appears, prior to the image display effect related to this, the indication effect by the movable body accessory appears first. This is the same as the 5 gimmick production example. Moreover, it can be set as the structure which can appear the player participation type | formula production | presentation like the example of a 1st-5th gimmick, and / or the player non-participation type production | presentation like this example.

  As described above, the first effect example to the fifth effect example have been representatively described as the gimmick-linked button notice. Of these effects, it can be determined as appropriate whether to adopt one or more types of gimmick-linked button notices. In addition, which production example is adopted is free.

  The gimmick interlocking button notice according to the present embodiment described above can be configured as follows.

  When the starting means detects a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information, a lottery means for executing a lottery for winning based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, and a display of fluctuations in game symbols A symbol display means for performing a symbol game by operation and deriving and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means, and the game information acquired by the acquisition means until a game symbol variable display operation in the symbol display means is determined in advance. An on-hold storage means for preserving and storing the maximum reserved storage number as an upper limit; a pre-reading determination means for pre-determining at least a lottery result by the lottery means before the game symbol variation display operation based on the on-hold storage is executed; The movable effect means configured to be able to execute the effect by the image, the image display means configured to be able to display the effect by the image, and the predetermined effect execution Preliminary effect control means for controlling the execution of a special preliminary announcement effect that can be derived as a result of the pre-reading information related to the pre-reading determination result by the pre-reading determination unit using the movable effecting means and the image display means . The special notice effect can be configured to include the following first to third effect modes.

  In the special notice effect, a special effect (for example, an item image (projection body N3)) used for deriving an effect result (pending change) can be displayed on the image display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 36). After the first effect mode in which the movable effect means (person gimmick 93) executes the predictive motion effect that operates in the first motion mode, and the first effect mode, A second effect mode for displaying a special effect on the image display means; a third effect mode for executing a result effect for deriving an effect result using the special effect that appears in the second effect mode; Can be configured. In addition, you may include the 4th effect aspect which performs a button notice effect after the 1st effect aspect and before the start of a 2nd effect aspect.

  Further, in the second effect mode, after the predictive action effect, the movable effect unit operates in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, and the second operation mode by the movable effect unit. It is possible to include an effect form that executes a linked effect (gimming effect during operation) that displays a special effect on the image display means. In addition, the above-mentioned special effect is relative to the first special effect (normal display color flame bullet) and the derivation expectation degree (holding change expectation degree) from which the prefetch information is derived as the effect result rather than the first special effect. And a high second special effect (a flame bullet with a dedicated display color).

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 7 to 16>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7-16, the game operation | movement process in the main-control part 20 side of this embodiment is demonstrated. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<6. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process starts when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (not shown), such as when recovering from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. May turn on. In any case, when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) starts the main control side main process shown in FIG. .

  In the main control side main process, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S011). For example, it first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, sets it to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch input through an input port (not shown) is determined (step S012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018). When the production control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, an initialization notification effect for notifying that the RAM has been cleared is executed until the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) elapses. The production mode is set to the normal production mode.

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random number for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subsidence used for winning per sub) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter, a special symbol determination counter, and the like as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, supplementary lottery, or variation pattern lottery, etc. There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary, a random number counter for variation pattern, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S021, the above-described special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial value of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as the variation pattern random number counter is 0 to 238, a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the variation pattern random number value in the RAM 203, and 1 is added to the obtained value. And then stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S012, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the initialization switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). In such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S012 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5AH (“XXH” means any hexadecimal number)) when the power is shut down, and the backup flag is set to the OFF state (backup flag = 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. The game restoration process necessary to start the game from the state is executed.

  When the game restoration process at step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process at step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set in the interrupt enabled state, and thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are set until an interrupt occurs. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<7. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program, etc. A process such as reading into and taking in a CPU built-in register is sometimes referred to as “acquisition”, and when the CPU 201 accesses a work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is sometimes referred to as “storage”.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by the various sensors is output from winning detection switches such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the like. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal. Thereby, it is monitored for each interrupt whether or not a winning is detected (a winning has occurred) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter provided corresponding to each winning opening and counting the number of game balls (winning balls) won.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variable display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or an auxiliary per-determination random number is updated (+1 for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). In this error management process, an abnormality in the gaming operation state is monitored, and when an abnormality (error) occurs, a predetermined error process is performed.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this winning ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of winning balls is issued as a payout control board Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the occurrence of a general electric opening game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary per lot in the normal symbol management process (step S057). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result. And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, a setting process necessary to execute and control the hit game corresponding to the win is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, when the high-base gaming state in which “electric support is present” occurs, right-handed instruction information (information for instructing to aim at the right flow path 3c (normal symbol start port) 37 is performed to display a “launch position guidance effect (right-handed notification effect)” that informs 37 of the instruction information for prompting a prize)). This right-handed information is reported in a case where it is presumed that the player accidentally targets the launch position on the left flow path 3b side in the state where there is electric support, and in the state where there is electric support. The case where a winning occurs at the upper start opening 34, or the case where no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time elapses. In such a case, in the right-handed notification information management process, a “right-handed instruction command” for instructing the start of the launch position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives the command. The launch position guidance effect is controlled to appear. Further, in a case where it is estimated that the player accidentally targets the launch position toward the right flow path 3c in the absence of the electric support, the left-handed instruction information (left flow instruction path 3b) is used as the launch position guidance effect. The processing for making a “left-handed notification effect” that reports an information) As a case where this left-handed information is notified, for example, there is a case where a winning is generated at the normal symbol start opening 37 in the absence of electric support. In such a case, in the right-handed notification information management process, a “left-handed instruction command” instructing the start of the left-handed notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Upon receiving this command, the effect control unit 24 receives the command. A left-handed notification effect (for example, a warning sound by voice) is controlled to appear.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (winning game start information, symbol variation display game start / end information, winning occurrence information, winning ball payout information, etc.) is transmitted through the frame external concentrated terminal board 21. Output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp.

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interrupt, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

(8. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9)
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol on the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302).

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH) In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, if the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or if the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing related to the variable symbol display operation of steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is displayed after the small hit or after the big hit) As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branch process in step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", or "confirming (03H)". The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H or 01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, a variation display operation that sets a variation start and a variation stop of a special symbol is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306), the special symbol variation processing (step S307), and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described later.

  When any of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If it is fluctuating, special symbol data (special symbol) that repeats blinking every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S062) of FIG. 8, and the special symbol variation display and stop display on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(8-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 10)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Here, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1, A process of adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure side caused by the winning of the upper start opening 34, a process of storing various random numbers, a process of creating a pending addition command, and the like are performed. The special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9), which will be described later, also serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, like the special figure 1 starting port check process. As the pre-start process for executing the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 side winning process), the special pending figure 2 side operation pending ball number addition process caused by the occurrence of winning at the lower start opening 35, various random numbers Storage processing, creation processing of a pending addition command, and the like are performed, and the same processing procedure as the special figure 1 starting port check processing described below is performed.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to the processing of step S320 described later. (S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from the random number counter, and the acquired random number value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation holding ball (holding data). In the reserved storage area, the various random numbers as the reserved data are stored in a special symbol. Until the first variation display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variation display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved memory area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) corresponding to. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment). (Holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area).

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each random number. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit that generates a random number by hardware (a jackpot determination random number counter for counting the jackpot determination random value: not shown). This random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. This count value is stored as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for special jackpot determination random values in RAM 203 (a special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer) provided separately from the reserved storage area of RAM 203, The CPU 201 reads out and uses the jackpot determination random number value stored in the special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer at a necessary timing.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “01H” for prohibiting the pre-read determination as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a pending addition command (details will be described later) ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed (the hold addition command is prohibited from prefetching by the process of step S315). As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (see the processing route of step S316: YES). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”. As described above, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side when the game state is accompanied by the electric support state is as follows.

  The first reason is that, when placed under the “electric support state”, the winning rate for the lower start opening 35 can be significantly improved over the normal gaming state “high base gaming state (movable wing piece 47 of operating rate improves condition: 255 next winning probability per auxiliary 256 minutes, since the open extension function is actuated) ", if the player has set aim the firing position so as to pay the normal symbol start hole 37 ( In this embodiment, when the aim is such that the game ball passes through the right flow down path 3c), the number of the operation reservation balls according to the special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 operation reservation ball") is frequently Presumed to occur. On the other hand, when placed in a state without electric support, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is low “low base gaming state (the winning probability per assist is 1/256, and the open extension function is not activated. In this embodiment, the game ball is hardly guided or guided to the upper start opening 34 side due to a falling direction changing member such as a game nail. When aiming at the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side, the game is such that it is particularly disadvantageous. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in view of the above problems, a section (prefetch prohibition state) for prohibiting the prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is provided, and these sections are switched according to the gaming state. It is configured to be controllable.

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S319) is not performed and the processing proceeds to step S320. .

  If the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then a random number determination process is performed (step S317). This random number determination process is performed as part of the 'look-ahead determination' process. Here, the “winning lottery” relating to the current operation holding ball (here, the special symbol variation display game 1 (special figure 1) side) is performed. 'Pre-reading determination (pre-reading failure determination)' is performed in advance. Specifically, the big hit determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired, and then the hit random number determination table is acquired. Then, based on the acquired jackpot determination random number value and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (another determination of jackpot and lose) for the current operation holding ball, that is, the current operation holding ball is changed to display the fluctuation The lottery result (the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation) of “special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process (see S409 in FIG. 12 to be described later)” executed when it is provided is prefetched and the result is acquired. To do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the state of the big hit determination flag (5AH or 00H) acquired in the random number determination processing in step S317 is taken into a general-purpose register (for example, A register) built in the CPU. Then, with the jackpot determination flag held in the register, the process exits the random number determination process and proceeds to the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318. That is, the CPU 201 does not store the winning lottery result fetched in the register in the RAM 203, but leaves this random number determination process while holding it.

  In the present embodiment, the determination result obtained in this random number determination process, that is, the data of the winning lottery result in the prefetch determination is immediately used in the subsequent “special stop symbol data creation process”, and then this data is required. There is nothing to do. Therefore, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the random number determination process (the determination result of the winning determination process in the winning process (winning result related to the pre-reading determination)), and is dedicated for storing the determination result. Since it is not necessary to provide a separate storage area, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM and reduce the control burden.

(R-1 per random number determination table)
The hit random number determination table includes a “random figure determination table for special figure 1 (not shown)” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 and a “random figure determination table for special figure 2” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 2. (Not shown) ”, during the special figure 1 start opening check process of FIG. 10“ random number determination table for special figure 1 ”, during the special figure 2 start opening check process of FIG. Reference is made to the “per random number determination table for FIG. 2”.

  In these winning random number determination tables, the winning type (whether big hit, small hit or lost) is determined for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). Are determined in association with a jackpot determination random number value (the size of the jackpot determination random number: 65536). Specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is any of the determination values. The big hit, the small hit, or the loss is determined depending on whether it belongs to or not. Therefore, even when the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (the same value for the jackpot determination random number value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Depending on the situation, the winning type may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “lost” on the other. The jackpot winning probability of this embodiment is about 1/397 in the low probability state, and about 1 / 39.7, which is about 10 times higher than that in the high probability state. The winning probability is about 1/200 regardless of the jackpot lottery probability state. In other words, the winning probability for the small hit is constant regardless of the big win lottery probability state, and in this respect, the personality is different from that of the above big hit whose fluctuation probability varies depending on the big win lottery probability state.

  In the winning lottery by the special symbol change display game 2 (step S337 (see FIG. 11) during the special chart 2 starting port check process described later), the lottery using the “special figure 2 random number determination table” separately provided. Is done. In the special random number determination table for special figure 2 of the present embodiment, the determination area for the big win is the same (the winning probability for the big win is the same), but the determination value itself for the small win is not defined. In other words, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1, the big win, the small hit, and the loss are targeted for the winning lottery, whereas in the special symbol variation display game 2, only the big win and the lost are targeted for the winning lottery. Of course, in the random number determination table for special figure 2 as well, the small hit may be determined as a winning lottery object.

  When the random number determination process in step S317 is completed, a special stop symbol data creation process is then performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation processing is performed as part of the 'prefetching determination' processing, and here, 'prefetching symbol determination' is performed in which the “symbol lottery” related to the current operation holding ball is determined in advance. Specifically, the lottery result (the symbol lottery result at the start of variation) of “special stop symbol creation process (see S410 of FIG. 11 to be described later)” executed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the variation display operation. ) Is prefetched. The random number determination process (step S317) to the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318) is a process related to the “prefetching determination”.

  When entering the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, first, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317 is acquired, and depending on the winning lottery result (big hit, small hit, and lost), the big hit One of the symbol table, the small hit symbol table, and the lost symbol table is selected. Then, the random number value for determining the special symbol acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for determining the special symbol, the pre-reading symbol determination for the current operation holding ball (winning (winning)) Type prefetch determination).

(T-2. Symbol table)
In each of the symbol tables described above, a “special symbol determination random value (size of special symbol determination random value: 200)” and a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on which determination value the random number value for special symbol determination belongs to.

  The above “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type). This is data for identifying which of the following is won: Probable big hit, 12R long open non-probable big hit, 16R long open probable big hit, small hits A to C, or loses A to B. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 12 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 and a process related to execution control of jackpot game) (This is the data used in the special electric equipment management process (step S060) in Fig. 6.) The "special stop symbol number" designates the special stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. This data is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side.

(T-2-1. Jackpot symbol table)
The jackpot symbol table of the present embodiment includes a “big hit symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a “big hit symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2. Is included. In each jackpot symbol table, a special symbol judgment random number value and a judgment value for determining the jackpot type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol judgment random number value is set to any judgment value. Depending on whether or not it belongs, any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is determined.

  In the jackpot symbol table 1, for example, when the random numbers for special symbol determination belong to the range of determination values 0 to 79, the “2R short open latency big hit” is won (symbol selection (lottery) rate: 80/200). If it falls within the range of the judgment values 80 to 119, the “12R long open uncertain big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 40/200). ”Wins (symbol selection rate: 60/200), and if it falls within the range of judgment values 180 to 199,“ 16R long open probability change big hit ”wins (symbol selection rate: 20/200), and the jackpot type is a predetermined symbol It is determined by the selection rate, and the special symbol determination data and special stop symbol number corresponding to this are determined.

  The jackpot symbol table 2 has the same basic configuration as the jackpot symbol table 1, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of determination values 0 to 39, “12R length open non-probable big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 40/200), and determination values of 40 to 79 If it belongs to the range, it will win the “12R long open uncertain big hit” (design selection rate: 40/200), and if it belongs to the range of the judgment value 80 to 199, it will be won (design selection) (Rate: 120/200), “2R short open latency big hit” does not have a determination value for winning. That is, the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 2 is more likely to be selected than the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 1, which is a symbol lottery advantageous to the player. As a result, the game development is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with the electric support, the winning probability on the lower start opening 35 side is dramatically improved and the execution chance of the special symbol variation display game 2 is increased, so that the state with the electric support is a high base game state. In addition to the symbol lottery, the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

(T-2-2. Small hits design table)
The small bonus symbol table of the present embodiment is used for both the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2, and the random symbol value for special symbol determination is any one as in the configuration of the big bonus symbol table. Depending on whether or not it belongs to the determination area (determination value), the small hit type (any of small hits A to C) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the corresponding special symbol determination data and special stop symbol number Is to be decided. The symbol selection rates for the small hits A to C can be set freely, but the relationship between the symbol selection probabilities is “small hit A <small hit B ≦ (or <) small hit C”. preferable. The reason is as follows. When winning a small hit A, the number of CZ continuations is set to the smallest one and the CZ period is the shortest, so even if it shifts to CZ, the tension to the latent state will end immediately, The fun in CZ is lacking. For this reason, the symbol selection rate of “small hit B or small hit C” in which the number of times of CZ continuation that can determine the latent state is set to four times is set rather than “small hit A” being a high symbol selection rate. This is because it is more effective to maintain the tension to the latent state and improve the fun in CZ.

(T-2-3. Lost design table)
In the lost symbol table of the present embodiment, the “lost symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 relating to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the “lost symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 relating to the special symbol variation display game 2 are included. And are included.

  The lost symbol tables 1 and 2 are classified according to whether the special symbol determination random number value belongs to one of the determination areas (determination values), as in the configuration of the big hit symbol table or the small hit table. (For example, either Loss A or Loss B) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and special symbol determination data and special stop symbol numbers corresponding thereto are determined. Note that the lost symbol table 1 and the lost symbol table 2 have different determination values related to the winning of the lost symbols A to B. Therefore, even if the random numbers for special symbol determination are the same value, the lost symbol table 1 is referred to. The case where the winning symbol table 2 is referred may be different from the case where the winning symbol table 2 is referred to.

  In the present embodiment, the loss B is determined to be lower than the winning probability of the loss A, and specifically, the winning probability is determined so as to satisfy the relationship of “lost A <loss B”. By using such a relationship, the reach effect can be made to appear at an appropriate frequency by increasing the selection ratio of the reach variation pattern in the case where the loss B is won than in the case where the loss A is won. It is like that. In the case of this embodiment, the reach variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that specifies SP reach is not selected in the loss A, and the SP reach variation pattern is selected in the case of the loss B (see FIG. 65). ).

  This will be described representatively during the “normal” period when the stay period is relatively long as the game progresses. When the operation holding ball related to the current special symbol variation display game is won by “losing A”, “normal variation pattern” or N reach is selected. In addition, when “losing B” is won, the “N reach” type or the “SP reach A” type having a relatively high expectation degree of winning can be selected. As a result, in the case of losing, the effect related to the normal fluctuation appears, and the SP reach effect can appear at an appropriate frequency. This prevents the player from being overwhelmed with the expectation of winning the jackpot.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 described above is completed, a starting port winning random number determination process in step S319 is then performed. This start opening winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the 'look-ahead determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). 'Prefetching variation pattern determination' is performed to prefetch the variation pattern at the start of variation related to the operation holding ball. Specifically, the result of the “special symbol variation pattern creation process (see S412 of FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the currently activated ball is subjected to the variation display operation (the variation pattern content at the beginning of variation) ) Is prefetched.

  Upon entering the start opening winning random number determination process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317, the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, the random number for the variation pattern, Is used to determine the look-ahead of the variation pattern at the start of variation, and based on the determination result, the winning command data (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used to create the “hold addition command” described later is used. Perform the creation process. The contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding the information on the number of suspended balls) are designated by the winning command data (EVENT) determined in the starting port winning random number determination process.

  When the random number determination process at the start opening winning prize in step S319 is completed, the winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies the number of balls to be held at the time of the pre-reading determination, and the lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the pre-reading fluctuation pattern A “hold addition command (see FIG. 59 described later)” composed of the winning command data is created (step S320) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S321). As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process (step S302) of FIG. 11 is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned hold addition command is specifically created according to the number of balls with active suspension and special symbol types (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). It is composed of the winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side to be designated and the winning command data on the lower byte (EVENT) side to designate the prefetch variation pattern type.

  The “hold addition command” mainly includes information related to the number of suspended balls and information related to the prefetch variation pattern type. In the present embodiment, since there are a plurality of special symbol types (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2), information on the special symbol type is also included. With such a hold addition command, effect control is performed regarding which special symbol side the current hold memory is, what number of action hold balls it is, and what variation pattern the prefetch determination result is It can be specified on the part 24 side. Note that the information related to the pre-reading variation pattern type is used as an opportunity to perform the pre-reading effect lottery on the side of the effect control unit 24, and the information related to the number of active reserved balls and the information related to the special symbol type are shown as the hold display areas 76 and 77 in FIG. As shown, it is used to distinguish the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side and display the number of reserved balls.

  As described above, the pending addition command includes a plurality of types of information. In the present embodiment, a single pending addition command is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pending addition command having the following configuration can be used.

  The hold addition command can be divided into a plurality of types of control commands, and these can be transmitted sequentially. As a plurality of types of control commands, for example, a control command including information related to the number of suspended balls for operation (second control command including information related to the number of retained balls held) and a control command including information related to the look-ahead variation pattern type (A first control command including information related to the prefetch determination result). In addition, when including special symbol type information, a control command including information regarding the number of suspended balls and a special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2), and a control command including information regarding a look-ahead variation pattern type Alternatively, the control command may include a control command including information related to the number of suspended balls, information related to special symbol types (special symbol 1, special symbol 2), and information related to prefetch variation pattern types.

  As described above, when a plurality of types of information are included in the effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the information is included in a single effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is divided into an effect control command including one information and an effect control command including other information, and information included in a single effect control command is converted into a plurality of effect control commands as described above. It is good also as a structure which transmits to the production | presentation control part 24 in the form to share.

(List of pending addition commands: Fig. 59)
FIG. 59 illustrates a pending addition command. In the drawing, as the hold addition command, a hold addition command that is normally used is typically illustrated, and other hold addition commands are omitted for the sake of convenience of description to avoid duplication.

  The pending addition command is composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59, the upper byte (first byte (MODE) data: “BXH”) created according to the number of suspended balls and the special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). (BXH is B5H to BEH)), and the lower byte (second byte (EVENT) data: “XXH” (XX is a numerical value corresponding to each command: 00H)) generated in the starting-port winning random number determination process in step S319 To 11H)).

  The high-order byte (MODE) data B5H to BEH specify the number of active suspension balls at the time of the pre-reading determination. , “BBH to BEH” respectively correspond to designation of 1 to 4 actuated balls of special symbol 2. Of the lower byte (EVENT) data 00H to 11H, 00H to 0AH corresponds to the designation of the lost prefetch variation pattern types X1 to X11, and 0BH to 11H corresponds to the designation of the perception prefetch variation pattern types Y1 to Y7. .

  Therefore, this pending addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S315 to S317) relating to prefetch determination, specifically, information that can specify a prefetch variation pattern. However, when the lower byte (EVENT) value is “01H”, prohibition of prefetching is designated.

  When the above-described pending addition command is shared by a plurality of types of control commands (the modified example), the pending addition command data value shown in the figure is appropriately changed to be assigned to each control command. A control command having a 2-byte configuration may be used so as to be able to specify the operation-reserved ball number information and the prefetch variation pattern information at the time of prefetch determination.

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the lottery and performs a lottery (prefetching notice lottery) regarding the appearance of the prefetching notice effect based on the information included in the holding addition command. When the pre-reading notice effect is displayed, the pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the game. In addition, when receiving the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 can cause a “winning production” to be displayed to notify that a winning has been made at the starting port.

  Even when there is a new winning when the number of balls held for operation is four or more, a holding addition command at the time of an overflow winning (hereinafter abbreviated as “OF holding addition command”) is created, and the production control unit 24 is transmitted. This OF pending addition command is also composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte (MODE) is “B5H (corresponding to special symbol 1)” or “BAH (corresponding to special symbol 2)”, and the lower byte (EVENT) is It is “00H” for designating an overflow prize.

  Further, the OF hold addition command is not used for the prefetch determination but is used exclusively for the above “winning effect”. However, the following effect may be displayed. For example, when the effect control unit 24 receives the OF hold addition command, an execution lottery of the above-mentioned “special hold change notice effect” and / or “gimmic interlocking button notice effect” can be performed. The overflow winning is not stored as an operation holding ball, and only a small number of winning balls can be obtained by winning at the starting port. From the player's side, there is no value. However, by receiving the OF hold addition command as a trigger for executing the above-mentioned “special hold change notice effect” and / or “gimmic interlocking button notice effect”, the result of the symbol variation display game for which the final result has not yet been derived There is a possibility that game information related to is notified. In this regard, it is possible to make the player feel more advantageous in that useful game information can be obtained in the progress of the game than when the OF hold addition command is not used for any notice effect. .

(8-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 In the same way as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above, as the pre-start process for executing the process, the addition process of the number of suspended balls for operation, the process of storing various random numbers, the process of creating a pending addition command, etc. Processing is performed. Hereinafter, the same processing contents as those in the special figure 1 start-up port check process (step S301) will be described by omitting them appropriately in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 4 or more (step S332).

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), the special figure 2 operation reservation balls number is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S333). Proceed to processing.

  When the processing proceeds to step S334, various random numbers (a jackpot determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a variation pattern random number) used in the special symbol variation display game 2 relating to the special symbol 2 operation holding ball generated this time are displayed. The current value of the random number counter is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (step S334). This process is the same as the process in step S314 of FIG. The special figure 2 operation hold ball is stored in the order in which the start conditions are satisfied, with the maximum hold storage number as a predetermined upper limit value, until it is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol 2.

  Next, prefetch prohibition data (lower byte “01H”) prohibiting prefetch determination is acquired as winning command data (step S335), and it is determined whether or not the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S335). S336). The “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 2 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 2 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (Step S336: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by a “game state with no electric support” state, that is, when the internal game state is in the normal game state or in the latent state, the special symbol 2 side is read ahead. Judgment is prohibited. As described above, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 2 side when the game state is accompanied by the state without the electric support is as follows.

  If it is in the “normal game state” or “latent state”, it is placed under the “no electric support” state, and the winning rate of the lower start opening 35 is significantly reduced. Further, as already described, in the present embodiment, when the player targets the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side in the state without the electric support, the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the left flow path 3b. This is a gameability that is disadvantageous for the player, such that the winning rate of the upper start opening 34 is significantly lower than the case where the above is determined. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not aim the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side during the state without the electric support. Therefore, in the absence of the electric support, it is not necessary to generate the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the prefetch determination is performed one by one for the special figure 2 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate. This is because there arises a problem that the control burden increases.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 1 side (prefetching prohibited state period) and the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 2 side can be switched according to the gaming state. It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which no prefetch determination is performed on either the special symbol 1 side or the special symbol 2 side according to the gaming state. In particular, a configuration in which no prefetch determination is performed in the CZ may be employed. During the CZ, the player's expectation of the latent state is struck by an effect made under the corresponding CZ effect mode. The CZ period is also relatively short. For this reason, it is good also as a structure which does not appear a prefetch notice effect (the inside of CZ is made into a prefetch prohibition area).

  Returning to the description of step S336 again, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the process proceeds to step S340. However, if the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S336: NO), the process proceeds to step S337, and random number determination processing is performed (step S337). In this random number determination process, “prefetching winning determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the processing method is substantially the same as the random number determination processing in step S317 during the special figure 1 starting port check processing of FIG.

  When the random number determination processing in step S337 is completed, special stop symbol data creation processing is then performed (step S338). In this special stop symbol data creation process, “prefetch symbol determination” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. The processing method is substantially the same as the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 during the special chart 1 start port check process of FIG.

  Next, the starting port winning random number determination process similar to that in the special figure 1 starting port check process is performed (step S339). Based on the winning command data and the number of suspended balls in operation, the holding addition command (MODE data of BAH.about. BEH and EVENT data are 00H to 11H) (step S340), the created hold addition command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S341), and the special figure 2 start port check process is exited.

(8-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 12)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S305) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the change for the operation holding ball to be used for the current change display is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S402). If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the suspended action ball used for the present variation display is performed. Do. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, “priority” indicating which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is to be preferentially used for the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Change order" is determined. The processing in steps S401 and S402 is performed as “priority change means” for preferentially digesting the special figure 2 operation holding ball when both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball exist. Function.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball by the priority changing means, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. More specifically, on the condition that the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the first reserved storage area (first reserved storage means (the reserved storage area related to the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side)). ) Is stored with the hold data relating to the special symbol 1 (first hold memory: special figure 1 operation hold ball), the second hold storage area (second hold storage means (the operation hold ball on the special symbol 2 side) If the second reserved data relating to the special symbol 2 (second reserved memory: special figure 2 operation holding ball) is not stored in the reserved memory area))), the second of the first reserved data When the second special hold data is stored in the second reserved storage area while the variable display of the first special symbol based on the previously stored reserved data is started, the first reserved The first hold data is stored in the storage area. Regardless of whether or not they are 憶, so as to start earliest variable display of the second special symbol based on the stored pending data out of the second pending data. Note that the priority symbol changing means may not be provided, and the special symbol variation display may be started in the order in which the reserved data is stored. In this case, the special symbol variation display based on the stored data stored first is started (started in the storage order).

  In addition, when the number of operation hold balls of both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of “no operation hold ball” It becomes. This “no operation hold ball” state is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 side is informed that it has entered this state, and the liquid crystal display The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H)” indicating the state of “no operation hold ball”. (Step S417).

  When the determination process of step S417 is passed, that is, when the state of “no operation hold ball” is entered, and the special symbol operation status at this time is “standby (01H)” (step S417: NO: Refer to step S472 in the special symbol confirmation time process of FIG. 21A described later), and the special symbol operation status is switched to “standby (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, a “demonstration display command” for displaying a demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. Thus, the reason for switching the special symbol operation status to “waiting (00H)”, transmitting the effect control command, and exiting the special symbol variation start process is as follows.

  If the demonstration display command is sent without condition when the number of active balls is zero, the demonstration display command is repeatedly transmitted at a period of 4 ms while the number of special figure active balls is zero. Occurs. Therefore, when the “no operation hold ball” state is reached, a demonstration display command is transmitted once, and if the demonstration display command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display command is sent to the effect control unit 24. This special symbol management process can be skipped without sending to the user.

  If the presentation control unit 24 does not receive any presentation control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol fluctuation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demonstration display command, the fluctuation display operation is performed for a certain period of time. Assuming that an undisturbed state (a waiting state for waiting for customers) has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 36 performs a “demo screen display” for notifying that the game is waiting.

  If the number of special figure 1 action hold balls or the number of special figure 2 action hold balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), to start the change of the special symbol for the action hold ball for the current fluctuation display Such processing (steps S403 to S417) is performed. In addition, about the process of step S403-S417 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S401, it is the process for the special figure 2 action holding ball, and by determination of said step S402. If it is NO ', it will be the process for the special figure 1 action hold ball, but the way of the process is the same, so unless there is a special need, the action on the special symbol 1 side is held to avoid duplication The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for a sphere or a process for an operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  If the number of special figure 1 action hold balls or the number of special figure 2 action hold balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), to start the change of the special symbol for the action hold ball for the current fluctuation display Such processing (steps S403 to S417) is performed. In addition, about the process of step S403-S417 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S401, it is the process for the special figure 2 action holding ball, and by determination of said step S402. If it is NO ', it will be the processing for the special figure 1 action holding ball, but the way of processing is the same, so unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description, the action holding on the special symbol 1 side The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for a sphere or a process for an operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  When the process proceeds to step S403, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls for operation (the number of reserved balls for operation on the special symbol side used for the current variation display operation-1: step S403), and a control command including information on the number of reserved balls after operation is subtracted. Is created as a “holding subtraction command” (FIG. 60) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404).

(Pending subtraction command: FIG. 60)
FIG. 60 shows a list of pending subtraction commands. This pending subtraction command is also composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, upper byte (MODE) data created according to the special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2): “B0H” to “B1H” (“B0H” is the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 subtracted) Designation, “B1H” is composed of special symbol 2 reserved ball number subtraction designation) and lower byte (EVENT) data: “XXH” (XX is a numerical value corresponding to each command: 01H to 05H). The MODE data “B0H” (special symbol 1 reserved ball count subtraction designation) and “B1H” (special symbol 2 reserve ball count subtraction designation) respectively correspond to EVENT data 01H to 05H. “01H to 05H” of the EVENT data corresponds to designation of 0 to 4 balls for operation reservation. Note that “05H” (specifying that the number of reserved storage is 4) is used when setting at power-on, and is not used in this embodiment. Therefore, the pending subtraction command whose EVENT data is “05H” is not transmitted. By such a hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 can grasp one of the existing operation hold balls used in the special symbol variation display game and digest it, and know the number of operation hold balls after the digestion.

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of Steps S406 to S407, the hold data (the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern use) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1. The random number is read and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage area (the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, the reserved 4 memory) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4). The hold data stored in (area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared (step S407). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → holding 2 storage area, holding 4 storage area → holding 3 storage area) and overwriting, and providing an empty area in the holding 4 storage area (if no new active holding ball is generated, processing in step S407) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state is terminated) described later is zero. A “remaining short time number command” including the remaining short time number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S408). By this “remaining short time number command”, the production control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining short time number, for example, using the effect means and can notify the remaining short time number information.

  Next, a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the jackpot determination random number value. The random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is “random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. In this example, the “winning lottery” in “determination at the start of change” is performed for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. Since the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is substantially the same as the random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10 and step S339 in FIG. 11), it is omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication. To explain.

  Here, first, a hit random number determination table corresponding to the current variation display side is acquired based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This winning random number determination table is the same as the winning random number determination table used in the random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 10 and step S337 in FIG. 11). Next, the big hit determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and another winning lottery of big hit, small hit, and loss based on the big hit determination random value and the hit random number determination table is performed.

  If the winning lottery results in a “big hit” win, the big hit determination flag is set to “5 AH (the big hit determination flag is ON)”. The determination flag is in the OFF state). If the “small hit” win is selected, the small hit determination flag is set to “5AH (the small hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “small hit non-win (small) The hit determination flag is in the OFF state). Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The current winning determination result is “lost” (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are in the OFF state).

  When the random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creating process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is the same as the “special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “symbol lottery” is performed. Here, the “design lottery” is performed in the “determination at the start of change” for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10 and step S338 in FIG. 11), in order to avoid duplication, the description will be made with appropriate omission. .

  Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery results (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag) obtained in the random determination processing for special electric component operation determination in step S409 are acquired, and based on these As the symbol table corresponding to the current fluctuation display side, one of the big hit symbol tables 1-2, the small hit symbol table, and the lost symbol tables 1-2 is selected. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11). Next, a special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, the “symbol selection lottery” related to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. The symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) is stored in a predetermined region (special symbol determination data storage region, special symbol stop symbol number storage region) of the RAM 203. Thereby, the winning type (winning type) related to the current special symbol variation display game is determined.

  Here, the reason why the data obtained by the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data obtained in the special stop symbol creation process (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) is obtained by the “special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10, step S338 in FIG. 11)” at the time of prefetch determination. It is not data that is immediately used in the subsequent processing and is unnecessary after that, as in the case of the data, but is necessary in the special symbol variation pattern creation processing (step S412) or the special electric accessory processing (step S60). Because it is data.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating a game state after a winning game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). This special symbol variation pattern creation process uses the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode) (current gaming state), the special lottery symbol creation result of the special stop symbol creation processing, and the variation pattern random number, etc. The variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball provided for is determined by lottery. Then, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern, a “variation pattern designation command” including variation pattern information that can specify the content of the variation pattern is created as an effect control command, and this is controlled by the effect control. Transmit to the unit 24 side. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a random number determination process at the time of winning a winning prize, which is one of the 'look-ahead determination' processing in terms of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a creation process related to the pending addition command (step of FIG. 10) S319 to S320, and processes similar to those in steps S339 to S340 in FIG. 11, but here, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation, that is, A variation pattern at the start of variation is determined.

  Here, first, random numbers for fluctuation patterns are acquired, and then, based on the big hit lottery results (win lottery, symbol lottery), the following hit fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIG. 64) or loss variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 65). ) To get. Then, based on the variation pattern distribution table and the random number value for variation pattern, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by lottery.

(T-3. Fluctuation pattern distribution table: FIGS. 64 and 65)
FIG. 64 shows a winning variation pattern distribution table, and FIG. 65 shows a loss variation pattern distribution table. The variation pattern distribution table for winning is selected when winning (big hit or small hit) is won, and the variation pattern distributing table for loss is a variation pattern distribution table selected when winning for loss. is there.

  As shown in the figure, each of the above-mentioned variation pattern distribution tables includes a plurality of types of variation patterns related to special symbols, including a variation pattern allocation designation number (current game state), the number of suspended balls (loss variation pattern distribution table). In the case of, the notation of “Hold 0” to “Hold 3” in the figure indicates the remaining number of held balls “0” to “3” excluding the currently held balls used for the variable display operation this time. ), The jackpot lottery result (the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process (step S410)), the random number for the variation pattern (the size of the random number: 239), etc. One variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns by lottery. In FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the “selection rate (lottery probability)” of the variation pattern is shown for convenience of explanation, but actually, a determination region (determination value) for determining the variation pattern is determined. The target variation pattern is determined depending on which determination value the variation pattern random number value belongs to.

  As the variation pattern is determined, a “variation time determination table” corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined. In this “variation time determination table”, a variation time (variation display operation time) corresponding to each variation pattern is determined, and thereby the variation time of the selected variation pattern is determined. This variation time is the game time of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display time (effect time)).

  Information on the variation pattern determined in this way mainly includes another winning / losing winning lottery result (detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current gaming state type, The information includes execution time (specific information such as presence / absence of reach effect, reach effect type (N reach type or SP reach type), presence / absence of pseudo-continuity, number of pseudo-continuations). The main control unit 20 creates a “variation pattern designation command” that can specify the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24 side. When the effect control unit 24 receives the change pattern designation command, the effect control part 24 controls the appearance of the effect in the current symbol change display game based on the change pattern information included therein.

(About loss variation pattern in CZ)
In the present embodiment, the loss variation pattern that can be selected during CZ is the number of operation suspension balls (the number of operation suspension balls remaining (excluding the operation suspension balls used for the current variation display operation) (0 to 3 retention)). Regardless, a single loss variation pattern (CZ loss variation) is selected (see the column “CZ (01H)” in the loss variation pattern distribution table in FIG. 65). As a result, the same variation time determination table is selected as the variation variation pattern selected during CZ, regardless of the number of suspended balls, so that the variation time has the same time width. As described above, the reason why the variation variation pattern selected during CZ is set to the same variation time regardless of the number of operating balls is as follows.

  In general, even if there is no electric support, the number of balls that can be suspended can be changed in a relatively short time (in a general ball game machine, the operation is suspended during a single symbol variation display game. If there are many cases where the number of balls is increased by about 1 to 3), and if this is used to select a variation pattern according to the number of suspended balls, the presentation time (design) for each symbol variation display game The execution time of the variable display game) can be changed, and various effects can be generated. As such a gaming state, there are, for example, a “normal state” and a “short time state” (see FIG. 65).

  However, if the effect time of the symbol variation display game is made different depending on the number of activated balls, the effect time of the current symbol variation display game and the effect time of the next symbol variation display game are likely to be different. In a short period of time, the production time of the symbol variation display game changes frequently, and there is a continuous relevance effect (for example, a story-style production of a story tailored) across multiple symbol variation display games. It will be difficult to deploy. For example, in the CZ effect mode, when a story-like effect including a related story effect of multiple stories is displayed, if the effect times of all story effects are the same, this is continuously developed. It is easy to proceed (the effect selection process on the effect control unit 24 side is facilitated, and the effect control burden is reduced). However, if the production time changes depending on the number of active balls, there are not many productions corresponding to 0 to 3 active balls for each story production because of the story development. In addition, it is necessary to make the expressions having relevance between the productions having different production times, the types of production patterns increase, and the production control burden increases.

  In addition, when a narrative-like effect as described above is displayed, it is conceivable to use a pre-reading notice effect. However, since the pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect that targets the number of active pending balls, Depending on the start timing of the notice effect, the number of existing operation hold memories varies depending on the start timing of the look-ahead notice effect (it is highly likely that the number of executions of the look-ahead notice effect varies each time). It is considered that the production time of the variable display game frequently changes, and it is difficult to continuously develop the production having the above-mentioned relevance. For this reason, as in the present embodiment, the longer the number of times the CZ effect mode is continued, the higher the expectation of the latent state, or when the CZ effect mode continues a predetermined number of times, the mode is shifted to the latent effect mode. In other words, it is impossible to make a definite notification that the state is in the latent state. In particular, the CZ effect mode works as an effect mode that can conceal the probability of winning a lottery, so under such an effect mode, it is possible to develop a narrative-like effect that enlivens the expectation of a high probability state. This is extremely effective in improving the fun of the game.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the length of the production time as much as possible, a variation pattern having the same variation time is selected and “CZ)” is provided as a specific gaming state regardless of the number of balls for which action is held. ing. Then, the number of fluctuations that “CZ” can continue is fixed according to the winning type (2R short open latency big hit, small hits A to C), and the development of the above narrative style production is facilitated, and the production control burden is reduced. So that it can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as already described, the expectation of the latent state transition can be changed according to the number of CZ continuations (the greater the number of CZ continuations, the higher the expectation of the latent state can be increased). It has become. The upper limit number of times is set to 4 times the same value as the maximum reserved storage number. The reason is as follows.

  First, when the concealment effect mode such as the CZ effect mode is continued for a long period of time (for example, for several tens of games), until the player can be sure that it is not in a latent state (for example, the concealment effect mode ends) In other words, the game is shifted to a normal performance mode in which the normal state becomes definitive), and the number of games has to be consumed for a long period of time, which is disadvantageous for the player. In particular, in recent years, there are many players who refrain from gaming machines in which the concealment effect mode continues for a long period of time. For this reason, it is preferable to set the number of concealment effect mode continuations to a relatively short number of games.

  Secondly, when determining the number of times that the concealment effect mode such as the CZ effect mode is to be continued, the effect made under the concealment effect mode is to be a continuous notice effect such as a prefetch notice effect in order to improve the fun of the game. It is effective. In other words, it can be said that it is preferable that the effect made in the concealment effect mode is pretending to be like the pre-reading notice effect. This will be described as follows.

  Since the pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect for the existing operation holding ball, the number of executions is limited to the maximum number of reserved memories (four times). Focusing on this point, the CZ continuation count is set within a range of four times of the maximum reserved storage number so that the player can perform the performance under the CZ production mode as if the pre-reading notice production is performed. . This does not mean that many players are engaged in the game while paying attention to the on-hold display that informs the number of balls that are on-hold, but they are engaged in the game while paying attention to the notice effect that is displayed in a position that is larger and easier to see than the on-hold display. In addition, as described above, even if the number of active reserved balls is one time during the symbol variation display game, it is increased by 1 to 3 and the number of active reserved balls can be changed in a short period of time ( For example, there is a high possibility that even if there is only one operation holding ball when entering the CZ, the number of operation holding balls increases to 2 to 4 at the start of the next game). In the present embodiment, by limiting the number of CZ continuations within the range of the maximum number of reserved memories, an effect made under the CZ effect mode can be disguised as a pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect). Yes.

(About 2R short open latency big win / small win win pattern)
With reference to the variation pattern allocation table for winning in FIG. 64, in the present embodiment, the same variation pattern (normal 2R latent probability / Small hit 1, normal 2R latency / small hit 2, 2R latent probability / small hit 1 in CZ, 2R latent accuracy / small hit in CZ) are selected. In this case, the same variation time (direction time) is determined for the case where 2R short open latency big win is won and the case where a small win is won. This is to perform a rendering process that makes it unclear.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 11 again, when the special symbol variation pattern creation processing in step 412 is finished, 5AH (ON state) is then set to the special symbol N variation flag (N = 1, 2) for designating that the variation is being displayed. ) Is stored (step S413). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). This decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating a special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) for designating a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning category (symbol lottery result). For example, the upper byte (MODE) side is set to “BBH” when the special symbol on the variable side is Special Figure 1, “BCH” is set to Special Figure 2, and the lower byte (EVENT) side is selected as winning. “01H” to “02H” when the type is Loss A to B, “03H” to “05H” when the small hits A to C, “06H” when the big hit is “06H”, 12R length The open non-probable big hit is set to “07H”, the 12R long open probable big hit is set to “08H”, and the 16R long open probable big hit is set to “09H”. Since this decoration designating command includes winning type information, on the effect control unit 24 side, mainly a combination of decorative symbols (reach symbols) when forming a reach state, or a decorative symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. This is used when determining the combination of (decoration stop symbol).

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S059) is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S060) of FIG.

(8-3-1. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 13)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first acquires a big hit determination flag and determines the state of the big hit determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S431: = 5 AH), the big hit gaming state transition table selection table (FIG. 61) is acquired (step S432).

  Next, referring to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a gaming state transition table (FIG. 63) corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step S433). Then, the data determined in this gaming state transition table is stored in various buffers described later (step S434: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these buffers are read out in the jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 16) during the special electric utility management process described later, and are stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage areas corresponding to the respective buffers). And the counter storage area). When the process of step S434 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) of FIG. In this game state transition preparation process, a setting process related to a game state transition when a big win is won is performed, and a setting process related to a game state transition when a small win is won is an electric game management process described later. The small hitting process is performed (see step S504 in FIG. 16).

(T-4. Game state transition table selection table for jackpot: FIG. 61)
FIG. 61 shows a big hit gaming state transition table selection table. The jackpot gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables (bonus jacks) associated with a gaming state determination number (YJ) and a winning type (special symbol determination data: here a jackpot type). Gaming state transition tables JTTBL-B1 to B4: see FIG. 631 described later)), and based on the gaming state determination number (YJ) and special symbol determination data, a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables are selected. One of the game state transition tables is selected.

  Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 66, when the gaming state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal gaming state (no power support state, low probability)” is set to “01H ”Is“ latent probability state (without electric support, high accuracy) ”,“ 02H ”is“ time-short state (electric support is present, low accuracy) ”, and“ 03H ”is“ probability change state ( "Electric support support state, high probability)". Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

(T-5. Game state transition table: FIG. 63)
FIG. 63 shows the gaming state transition table described above. In the game state transition table of the present embodiment, “JTTBL-1” to “JTTBL-4” of the game state transition table for jackpots that can be selected in the case of jackpot, and the game for small hits that can be selected in the case of jackpot State transition tables “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” are included.

  In these game state transition tables, a plurality of types of data groups for designating game states to be transferred after winning games are defined. Specifically, the utility power release extended transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol probability transition buffer, special symbol short transition transition buffer, special symbol probability transition transition buffer, special symbol short transition counter buffer Various data to be stored in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer, the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and the special symbol variation count counter buffer are defined. The values stored in these buffers are read at a necessary timing and set in a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each buffer, the game state after the winning game is determined.

  In this embodiment, “JTTBL-1” is “probability change state”, “JTTBL-2” is “latency probability state”, “JTTBL-3” is “CZ”, and “JTTBL-4” is “time reduction state”. In addition, “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” are game state transition tables for shifting to “CZ”. However, regarding “JTTBL-3” and “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” related to the CZ transition, “JTTBL-3” is set to CZ (four times), and “JTTBL-5” Is CZ (one time) for CZ continuation times, "JTTBL-6" is CZ (two times) for CZ continuation times, and "JTTBL-7" is CZ (three times for CZ continuation times) (3 times) is a gaming state transition table. The role of the various buffers described above will be described below.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol short time state flag. The “ordinary symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “normal symbol short time state flag” indicating that the normal symbol short time function is in operation. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Normal symbol change transition buffer)
The “normal symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol probability change state flag. The “normal symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating an auxiliary lottery probability state, that is, an operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the normal symbol probability changing function is set. It indicates that the state is the “probability change state per assistance” during operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is a “low probability state per assistance” in which the normal symbol probability change function is not activated.

(Special symbol short state transition state buffer)
The “special symbol short time state transition state buffer” is used for setting a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “special symbol short time state flag” during the special symbol short time function is operating. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special Symbol Probability Transition Status Buffer)
The “special symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability change state flag. The “special symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “high probability state during the special symbol probability changing function is operating”. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol probability changing function is not activated in a “low probability state”.

(Special design short time counter buffer)
The “special symbol short time counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time counter. The above “special symbol time reduction counter” means the number of remaining times until the operation of the “special symbol time reduction function” is terminated due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the end. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state, which is in the state of electrical support, is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 15B).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol probability variation counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability variation counter. The above “special symbol probability change counter” means the remaining number of times until the operation of the “special symbol probability change function” is finished, that is, the “high probability state” is ended due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the number of times (remaining ST number).

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used to set a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is game state data for specifying the game state. The variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203, and this variation pattern allocation designation number is changed based on a predetermined change condition (game state transition condition). (Steps S481, S486, S490 of special symbol confirmation time processing (FIG. 15B), game state transition preparation processing (S411 of FIG. 12, S434 of FIG. 13, special electric accessory management processing (FIG. 16), etc.).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of a special symbol that is a gaming state transition condition (hereinafter referred to as “the prescribed number of gaming state transitions”). In the special symbol variation number counter of the present embodiment, the CZ continuation number is set as the specified number of game state transitions (see “JTBL-3”, “JTBL-5” to “JTBL-7” in FIG. 63). Functions as a management means for managing the number of CZ continuations.

(8-4. Special symbol change processing: Fig. 14)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory action timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). With this change stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (decision display) the decorative symbol that is currently being changed. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “confirming (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is an extra time for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been determined and displayed. It is. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 of FIG. 9 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display process of step S060 of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(8-5. Special symbol confirmation time processing (variation stop processing): FIGS. 15A and 15B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  15A and 15B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). Here, the “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer (see step S453 in FIG. 14). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, General symbol release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probability variation state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol certain variation state flag, special symbol short variation counter, special symbol certain variation counter, and special symbol variation count 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the counters, 00H (usually A is specified) is stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and the game state notification LED (not shown) is turned on / off. 00H is stored in the status notification LED output number, and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited. The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, if the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determination flag as various setting processes (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of the small hit symbol stop are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

  When the processing proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol short time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digest of the current fluctuation number, and the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol short time state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), setting processing at the time of short time end is performed assuming that the number of times of termination of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached (step S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is changed for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag as setting processing at the time-short-time end. 00H is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming status notification LED output number. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time-short end in step S481 is finished, a “short-time end command” indicating that the special symbol time-short state has ended (electric supportless state transition information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command ( Step S482). By receiving the short end command at this time, the effect control unit 24 grasps that there is no electric support from the next game. In the present embodiment, when the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state is the same as the transition from the probability change state to the normal A, the presentation control unit 24 receives this “short time end command”. For example, when the next decorative symbol variation display game is started, the effect control process is performed under the effect mode by switching to the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode”.

  Next, when the processing proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484) as the current symbol variation variation digest, and the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is determined to be zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST prescribed number has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), setting processing at the end of probability variation is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation count has reached the ST specified count (10000 in this embodiment). (Step S486). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the latent probability state or the probability changing state, the normal utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol probable state flag, the special symbol short state flag, In addition, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability changing state flags, 00H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol short-time state designation) is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number. To do. Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 is completed, the process proceeds to step S487, and whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, the specified number of game state transitions (in this embodiment, the number of CZ continuations). Whether or not is zero is determined (step S487).

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the game state transition setting process is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation number has reached the prescribed game state transition number (step S490: variation pattern change). Minute designation number setting process). Here, a transition setting process of the game state after the CZ continuation count is completed is performed. In the present embodiment, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on whether the big hit lottery probability state at the end of CZ is a low probability state or a high probability state. Here, the game state determination number (YJ) is first acquired, and the current internal game state is the normal state (game state determination number (YJ) = 00H) or the latent state (game state determination number (YJ) = 01H). At this time, if the current internal gaming state is the normal state (low probability state), the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set to “00H” that designates the normal state, and the latent state (high probability state) ), It is set to “02H” for designating the latent state. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the “normal state” or the “latent state” is selected. This step S490 process serves as an updating means for updating the variation pattern selection condition (variation pattern selection mode) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including the game state information of the transfer destination is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S491). With the above game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 can grasp that “CZ” is ended in the current symbol variation display game, and that it becomes “normal state” or “latency state” from the next game. Thereby, when starting the next symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 controls to switch to the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode” or the background image for the “latent effect effect mode”. An effect control process under the effect mode is performed. The gaming state designation command is transmitted in advance than the variation pattern designation command relating to the next symbol variation display game. For this reason, when the production control unit 24 receives the game state designation command, the production for the current production mode (for example, one background display) before the variation pattern designation command related to the next game is sent. To other effects modes (for example, other background display). Thereby, even when the operation holding ball does not exist (when the next symbol variation display game is not started), the player can grasp in advance the effect mode related to the next symbol variation display game. is there.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 9 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step S060 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

(9. Special electric equipment management process: FIG. 16)
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device (open / closed opening / closing control) related to the small hit game. A process is performed (step S504), and this special electric accessory management process is exited.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

  When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). . The “special electric accessory operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable prize winning device 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203. Is done.

  In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, a process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

  The big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit game control process (step S504) will be described below.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
First, the big hit starting process (step S505) will be described.

(9-1. Big hit start processing)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, the big hit starting process is first performed.

  Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the big hit game necessary for starting the big hit game, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “operation start process”. "Middle (01H)" (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the accessory continuous actuating device is operating. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game, and the current round number is stored here. Since “01H” is set in the continuous number counter here, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, a “big hit start setting table (not shown)” in which the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) and round display LED numbers according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type) is determined is acquired. Referring to this jackpot start setting table, each data corresponding to the special symbol determination data of this time is stored in the storage area of the corresponding RAM 203, and "start interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer To do. The above “start interval time” means that after the special symbol fixed display time elapses and the jackpot is fixed (see step S 471 in FIG. 14 and step S 471 in FIG. 15A), the special variable winning device 52 is activated. , Which is a time interval that defines an interval in which the opening effect is performed (first effect time before the first round game is performed). The “round display LED number” is data specifying the notification mode of the round number display device 39b (round number display means), and indicates the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) of the current big hit game.

  Next, a “hit hit command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process goes to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, the “big hit start command” includes information that can specify the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit, and the effect control unit 24 side It is also used when determining a series of winning effects (opening effects, round effects, round end effects, ending effects, etc. corresponding to each jackpot type) developed during the game.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As the interval time, in the first round (1R), the “start interval time” set in the jackpot start process (step S505) is monitored. When passing (step S506), “interval time before opening (interval time set in special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) described later)” is monitored. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory action timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of the first round (1R), the start interval time) has elapsed, the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current round The opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 according to the number is set (large winning opening / closing operation setting process). Specifically, the special prize opening / closing operation time for opening the special prize opening 50 (for example, 29.8 seconds for the long opening time, 0.1 seconds for the short opening time) is used as the special symbol accessory. The solenoid control data for controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c is set in the operation timer. As a result, the special prize opening solenoid 52c is operated, and the special prize opening 50 is opened with the upper prize opening / closing operation time as an upper limit. Also, in response to the start operation for opening the big prize opening, a “big prize opening command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This “big prize opening release command” includes round game start information (round production start instruction information) and current round number information, and when the production control unit 24 causes a round production corresponding to the number of rounds to appear. Used for When the special prize opening / closing operation setting process is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Active (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(9-3. Special electric equipment during operation)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507) will be described.

  Here, first, the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number (large winning opening maximum winning number confirming process), and the maximum winning number is reached. If you do, clear the special symbol accessory operation timer. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) is forcibly set to zero, and the open large winning opening 50 is closed when the maximum winning number is reached. It has become. Until the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (until the opening time of the big prize opening expires or the maximum number of winnings is reached), this special electric accessory operating process is performed without doing anything. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (when the maximum number of winnings has been reached or the opening time for the special prize opening has elapsed), the special electric accessory action status is determined as the end of the current round game. Switch to “Continue judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), the remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operating process The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 in FIG.

(9-4. Special electric equipment operation continuation determination process)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time after closing the big prize opening is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see the special electric accessory operating process (step S507)), this remaining ball discharge time is set. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapses), the continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether the current number of rounds has reached the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added to the continuation counter (+1) as the process for continuing the round game, and the “interval before opening” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The object operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). As a result, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  When the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the “end interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory action timer, and then the special electric accessory action status is “finished” as various setting processes at the end of the round game. “Processing (04H)” (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). The above “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and defines the section where the ending effect is performed. Refers to the time span.

  Then, a “big hit end command” for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process exits the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process and proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. . This `` big hit end command '' includes information regarding the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, that is, information that can specify the gaming state (including the internal gaming state) after the big hit game ends. It is also used when determining the effect mode after the big hit game on the control unit 24 side. Therefore, this “hit end command” has a role as a game state designation command for designating a game state since it can specify a game state after the end of the big hit game in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect. Yes. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode based on the information included in the jackpot end command, so that the game state after the end of the jackpot can be matched with the effect mode related to the game state. It has become.

  Note that the information on the gaming state at the time of winning the above-mentioned jackpot can include information on the variation pattern allocation designation number or information on the variation pattern allocation designation number and the internal gaming status. When the game state at the time is CZ, the information that can specify whether the game state at the time of winning is “CZ (normal)” or “CZ (latency)” distinguished by the internal game state Is included.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the big hit end process (S509) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero, nothing is done and the jackpot end process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time elapses), the value of each transition state buffer is stored in each state flag, and the gaming state after the big hit game is designated. Specifically, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process in step S411 (see step S411 in FIG. 12, see FIG. 13 showing the details) during the special symbol variation start process is used as the game state. To specify the utility power open extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, It is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number and the special symbol variation counter. Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified.

  Next, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed. Here, as various data used during the big hit game control processing, the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter, the maximum number of rounds, the round display LED number, various buffers, etc. are cleared respectively. The special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Starting process (00H)” (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed. Here, it is confirmed whether the special symbol short time state flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) or OFF state (≠ 5 AH), and in the case of the ON state, data for lighting the gaming state notification LED, specifically, the gaming state notification LED 01H is stored in the output number.

  When the jackpot ending process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Small hit game control processing>
(9-6. Small hit processing)
Next, the small hit process (step S504) will be described.

  In the small hit game, the “round game” like the big hit game is not executed. Accordingly, here, the process for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening 50 is performed so that the operation mode during the small hit game is substantially the same as the operation mode of the “2R short open latency large hit game”. Is called.

  When the small hit processing is entered, first, the “start interval time” in the small hit game is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and a “small hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. . After the start interval has elapsed, a small hit game state transition preparation process for designating a game state after the small hit game, which will be described later, is performed, and then the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 is “2R latent probability big hit game”. The control data for the solenoid for controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c is set so as to be the same or very similar to the operation mode. As a result, the big winning opening 50 is opened like a 2R latent big hit game, and a pseudo round game during the small hit game is executed. Note that the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening 50 during the small hit game is the same as that due to the big winning, and when the maximum winning number is reached, the big winning opening 50 is closed. However, since the round game like the big hit game is not executed in the small hit game, the pseudo round game itself is ended when the maximum winning number is reached.

  When a series of opening / closing operations of the big prize opening 50 is completed, a “small hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The “small hit end command” includes information that can specify the type of the small hit this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, and the effect control unit 24 determines the post-small hit effect mode. It is also used when Therefore, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect, this small hit end command also plays a role as a gaming state designation command for designating the gaming state, and an effect that functions in the same way as the “big winning end command” related to the big hit game Control command.

<9-6-1. Game state transition preparation process for small hits>
Next, the small hit game state transition preparation process will be described.

  In the small hit game state transition preparation process, a setting process for specifying the game state after the small hit game is performed in order to specify the game state after the small hit game. Specifically, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is acquired first, and then the gaming state transition table selection table for small hits (FIG. 62) is acquired. Then, referring to the small hit game state transition table selection table, based on the variation pattern allocation designation number and the small hit type (special symbol determination data), the game state transition tables “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL- 7 ”is obtained, and the corresponding data is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 203 (fluctuation pattern allocation designation number storage area and special symbol fluctuation number counter) with reference to this gaming state transition table. Thereby, the game state after the small hit game is designated.

(T-6. Game state transition table selection table for small hits: FIG. 62)
FIG. 62 shows a small hit gaming state transition table selection table. The game state transition table selection table for small hits according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of games associated with a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and a winning type (special symbol determination data: here, a small hit type). State transition tables “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” (see FIG. 63) are defined, and specifically, a plurality of types based on the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and special symbol determination data. Any game state transition table (game state transition table for small hits) is determined from among the game state transition tables.

(T-7. Game state transition table for small hits: FIG. 63)
With reference to FIG. 63, the small hit gaming state transition tables “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” will be described. These small hit gaming state transition tables include data for storing in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter as data for designating the gaming state to be transferred after the small hit game. It has been established. When these data values are stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter, the gaming state after the small hit game is identified. Here, in “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7”, only the data to be stored in the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number buffer and the special symbol fluctuation number counter buffer is determined. However, there is no transition of the internal gaming state, and only the transition of the gaming state as the variation pattern selection mode (change of the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode)) is performed. Of the above game state transition tables, “JTTBL-5” is “CZ (1 time)”, “JTTBL-6” is “CZ (2 times)”, and “JTTBL-7” is “CZ (3 times)”. It is a game state transition table for shifting to ').

  In the small hit game state transition table selection table, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the normal state (variation pattern allocation designation number 00H) or CZ (variation pattern allocation designation number 01H). Only in some cases, one of the small hit gaming state transition tables “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” is selected. That is, when the gaming state is the short-time state (variation pattern allocation designation number 03H), the probability variation state (variation pattern allocation designation number 04H), and the latent state (variation pattern allocation designation number 02H), the gaming state transition No, the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued. In addition, in the case of winning a small hit during CZ, any one of the game state transition tables for small hits “JTTBL-5” to “JTTBL-7” is selected again, and the number of CZ continuations is determined according to the type of the small hit. It will be reset.

  When the small hit process is completed, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 17 to 36>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36, an effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the production control unit 24 mainly includes predetermined main processing (production control side main processing: FIG. 17) and timer interruption processing (production control side timer interruption processing: 19).

<11. Production control side main processing: FIG. 17>
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control unit side (production control side main processing). The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 17 when the gaming machine main body is turned on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S71 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed every predetermined time as the process during normal operation. Otherwise, the effect soft random number update process in step S080 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 19) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S72: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read, and an effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. This effect control command includes the already described hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decorative symbol designation command, variation stop command, and the like.

  For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command (in this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command and a decorative symbol designation command) is received and stored in the reception buffer, information ( One or more types of effect patterns are determined based on the variation pattern information and the winning information (or winning type information). The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and compose the production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense.

  When the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the determined effect scenario, the “non-operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is not operated is constructed as a basic effect scenario. However, when the frame effect button 13 is effectively operated during the execution of the button notice effect, the non-operation effect scenario is changed to the “operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is operated. Such a process relating to the scenario change is performed in a “scenario update process” in step S074 described below.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an effect process such as an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) described later. Here, the production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data and the image display for the speaker 46 are displayed when the production of the sound production or the image display production is necessary. A liquid crystal command for control is created and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  In the scenario update process, the “basic effect scenario” determined in the received command analysis process (step S073) may be changed to a different effect scenario. For example, as described above, when the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the basic effect scenario, it is necessary to change the effect scenario depending on whether or not the frame effect button 13 is operated. Specifically, when the “non-operational notice effect scenario” is incorporated as part of the basic effect scenario, if the frame effect button 13 is effectively operated during the button notice effect, the “operation effect scenario” It is necessary to change to. Here, when it is confirmed that the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button notice effect, the operation is changed to “operation effect scenario” (for example, the parts effect is rearranged based on the operation detection of the frame effect button 13). The changed production scenario data is reset in the scenario setting area.

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 19) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, control data for the movable accessory motor related to the movable accessory to be operated is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 19) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is terminated, and the effect soft random number update process in step S080 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

(12. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 18)
Next, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interruption process is executed preferentially over an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(13. Production control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 19)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 19, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 241 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in the RAM 243 in a predetermined manner. Store in the area. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 17, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this stage actor operation management, a control signal is output to the movable body accessory motor through the drive control unit based on the motor control data for the movable body accessory created in the stage actor control data update process (step S077). To do. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory along a production | presentation scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Process: FIGS. 20 to 36>
20 to 36 show processing closely related to the present invention among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 17). Hereinafter, a case where a “hold addition command”, a “variation pattern designation command”, and a “decorative symbol designation command” are received will be described.
(16-9. Hold addition command analysis processing: FIG. 20)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating received command analysis processing when a pending addition command is received. This hold addition command is an effect control command transmitted in the special figure 1 start opening check process or the special figure 2 start opening check process. Further, the pending addition command is composed of winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies the number of suspended balls at the time of pre-reading determination, and winning command data on the lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the pre-reading variation pattern. ing. Here, based on the number of active balls held at the time of pre-reading and the pre-reading variation pattern information obtained by the holding addition command analysis process, pre-reading pre-notice effects (including various pre-reading notice effects that can be executed during the symbol variation display game) ) Is determined.

  In FIG. 20, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the content of the hold addition command and acquires the content (step S101). Here, the acquired prefetch determination information is stored in a predetermined storage area (prefetch information storage area) of the RAM 243.

  Like the reserved storage area of the RAM 203, the pre-read information storage area of the RAM 243 is a pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side, A pre-read information storage area) corresponding to the special symbol 2 side is provided. These pre-read information storage areas are provided with hold 1 to hold n pre-read information storage areas (where n is the maximum number of active holding balls: in this embodiment, n = 4), and each of the pre-reading information for the maximum number of holding balls is pre-read. The determination information can be stored (the storage order is stored in the order of the hold 1 prefetch information storage area, the prefetch information storage area,..., The hold n-1 prefetch information storage area, and the hold n prefetch information storage area. It ’s like that) For example, if the hold addition command received this time is a command “B707H”, the CPU 241 determines that “special figure 1 hold 2 designation, SP reach 4, and lose (in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of loss. The content of “specify“ losing B ”” ”(see the pre-reading fluctuation pattern X7 with two reserved special figures 1 refer to FIG. 59) is grasped, and this is stored in the reserved 2 pre-reading information storage area on the special symbol 1 side. As a result, it is possible to specify what kind of pre-reading determination result the existing operation holding ball has. In the case of “** 01H” (“**” on the MODE side is B5 to BE), “prefetching prohibited” is designated (see FIG. 59).

  Further, in the processing of step S101, the storage reserved area (sub-side reserved ball number management area: sub-side reserved ball number storage means) of the RAM 243 managed by the effect control unit 24 side, the number of operating reserved balls specified by the received hold addition command this time. ). The reserved ball number information stored in the sub-side reserved ball number management area is used in a special notice effect setting process (step S121 in FIG. 20, step S121 in FIG. 36) described later. In addition, when the pending subtraction command is received, this retained ball count information is updated (subtracted by 1) to the number of activated pending balls specified by the pending subtraction command.

  Next, based on the information obtained in the process of step S101, a lottery for the execution of the “general hold change notice” of the hold display change system and the “lightning continuous notice” of the image display change system is performed (step S103: general hold / Lightning continuous notice execution lottery process).

  In the present embodiment, as a pre-reading notice effect, a notice change effect of a hold display change system (appearance of color change hold) is continued, that is, a hold change notice performed by shifting the display position and a symbol variation display operation of a symbol game are executed. Change start notice effect that occurs at the time of start of change (that is, at the start of change) by displaying a plurality of symbol change display operations for a plurality of symbol change display operations (in this embodiment, the notice display effect of the image display change system ( There is a lightning bolt notice). In the present embodiment, the general hold change notice, the “special hold change notice”, and the “gimmic interlock button notice” can be displayed as belonging to the “hold change notice”. In this lottery process, an execution lottery regarding general hold change notices is performed among these hold change notices, and processing related to “special hold change notice” and “gimmic interlock button notice” when receiving a hold addition command will be described later. This is performed in the process of step 121.

  In the general hold / lightning continuous notice execution lottery process in step S103, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a prefetch notice effect is performed based on the prefetch change pattern type specified by the hold addition command. The “pending addition command” in the present embodiment includes information relating to each of the number of suspended balls, the prefetch variation pattern type, and the special symbol type. Therefore, the prefetch variation pattern type among these pieces of information Information is used for the lottery opportunity of the pre-reading effect lottery. However, in the case where the information on the number of suspended balls, the look-ahead variation pattern type, and the special symbol type is shared by a plurality of effect control commands, a control command including information on the look-ahead variation pattern type in those forms is used. When at least received, a pre-reading effect lottery is performed. However, when a pre-reading effect lottery according to the special symbol type (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) is performed, a control command including information on the reading variation pattern type and a control command including the special symbol type are received. In addition, a pre-reading effect lottery will be performed.

  In this general hold / lightning continuous notice execution lottery process, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned "general hold change notice" (whether or not to change the hold display of the operation hold ball related to the winning to the exclusive hold display mode) A lottery and / or an execution lottery is performed as to whether or not to display “continuous lightning warning (lightning bolt continuous warning by lightning image 365)” for the operation holding ball. Note that the execution lottery of the “pre-change notice at the time of winning” and the execution lottery of the “lightning continuous notice” can be performed independently. However, only when one pre-reading notice effect is won, the other pre-reading notice effect execution lottery may be performed. For example, the execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the “lightning continuous notice” may be performed only when the “general hold change notice” is selected. In this case, since the lightning bolt continuous notice appears in accordance with the change in the holding color, it is possible to clarify to the player which operation holding ball is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. Accordingly, in this lottery form, (I) only the pending change notice at the time of winning can be executed, (II) both the pending change notice at the time of winning and the lightning continuous notice can be executed, or (III) any pre-reading notice Can be determined by lottery. Which case is determined is determined based on, for example, the reach type determined by the main control unit 20 or the selection rate of the look-ahead variation pattern, and the reach type (for example, N reach) having a relatively low expectation of winning In the case of SP reach 1-2), the selection rate of the above case (I) tends to be relatively high, and in the case of a big win or a reach type having a relatively high expectation of winning win (for example, SP reach) In the case of 4 to 7), it can be determined that the selectivity of the case (II) is relatively high. Further, in the case of the normal variation pattern type, it can be determined so that the selectivity of the case (III) is relatively high.

  Returning to the description of step S103, the general hold / lightning continuous notice execution lottery process is determined by a lottery table in which a predetermined appearance probability is determined based on the prefetch variation pattern type specified by the hold addition command. For example, in general description of the general hold change notice, in the case of the prefetch variation pattern types X1 to X11 and Y1 to Y7 in FIG. 59, refer to the prefetch effect lottery table shown in FIG. 67 based on the variation pattern types. Then, the pre-reading notice effect is determined by lottery (pre-reading effect lottery), and effect information (information on the pre-reading effect lottery result) based on the result of the pre-reading effect lottery is set. In the next general hold / lightning notice effect display setting process (step S105), the effect information includes effect display data (effect scenario data) necessary for the appearance of the pre-read notice notice (general hold change notice, lightning continuous notice). Used when setting. This effect information is used when an effect scenario is created in step S105 (general hold / lightning notice display setting process) described later.

  The production information set here includes (i) information specifying general hold change notice, for example, information related to hold display shown in FIG. 67 (information specifying hold display mode by hold color and icon image: general hold change) (Ii) Information for designating continuous lightning warning (information on execution designation of lightning continuous notice at the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, for example, type of lightning production (strong lightning production (winning)) Expectation level), Naka Lightning Production (Medium Expectation Expectation), Weak Lightning Production (Low Expectation Expectation), the number of executions: Data for creating a lightning trailer production scenario), Information (for example, information indicating that neither the pending change notice nor the lightning continuous notice is executed) is included.

(T-8. Pre-reading effect lottery table: FIG. 67)
FIG. 67 shows a pre-reading effect lottery table. As a pre-reading variation pattern type serving as a lottery trigger for executing a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading notice effect of change system at winning time: here abbreviated as “pre-reading hold notice”), FIG. The configuration includes a part of 65 loss variation pattern types and a part of the hit variation pattern type of FIG. Here, as an example, those corresponding to the pending addition commands of “normally” prefetch variation pattern types X3 to X11 and Y1 to Y7 illustrated in FIG. 59 are shown (prefetch variation pattern type X1 is for over winning, X2 designates prohibition of prefetching, and is excluded from the variation pattern type serving as a lottery trigger for the prefetching notice effect). However, together with these, or separately from these, other variation pattern types may be treated as prefetched variation pattern types that become lottery triggers.

  In FIG. 67, as the prefetch variation pattern type, in the case of a loss, the prefetch variation pattern types X3 to X11 whose designated contents are “normal variation”, “N reach”, and “normal SP reach 1 to 7” are hit again. In this case, the pre-reading variation pattern types Y1 to Y7 whose designated content is “Normal SP Reach 1 to 7” is a lottery opportunity. The variation modes of these prefetch variation pattern types are normal variation, normal reach (N reach), first reach effect A, first reach effect B, first + second reach effect A, first + second reach effect B, second. Reach production A, second reach production B, and special reach. In addition, the selection ratio of the reserved color for the general hold change notice (prefetch hold notice) selected by lottery in these prefetch change pattern types is indicated by a numerical value.

  However, in FIG. 67, for simplification of description, an example in which “white”, “blue”, and “red” are used as the reserved colors used for the reserved change notice is shown. It shows how it changes. In other words, as the production scenario of the hold change notice, the hold color changes at the time of winning a prize, and the hold color may continue to be displayed until the operating hold ball is digested as it is, or the hold color changes when triggered by the shift display. Alternatively, the reserved color may change step by step for each shift display. For example, in the pre-reading effect lottery table in FIG. 67, the “general scenario for notice of general hold change notice” is actually set. Until it is digested, the general hold change notice including the timing of the hold icon, the display mode, and the final display mode Scenario creation data is selected (other hold change notices (the same applies to special hold change notices and gimmick-linked button notices).

  Specifically, for example, in the production scenario of the general hold change notice, the current operation hold ball is the third operation hold ball, and the hold icon at the time of winning is displayed in white. The hold display mode is “white circle mark hold (when winning a prize) → white circle mark hold (first shift display) → yellow circle mark hold (second shift display) → yellow circle mark hold (third shift display: A production scenario that changes to “Holding when moving to hold K during game execution” and “White circle hold (when winning) → Yellow circle hold (first shift display) → Red circle hold ( (Second shift display) → sun icon image (third shift display: hold display when moving to hold K during game execution) ”(for example, FIG. 31 described later) (See (A)). In FIG. 67, one or more types of presentation scenario information relating to the display mode of such a hold icon are determined according to the prefetch variation pattern type, and any one of these presentation scenario information can be selected by lottery. Has been. The effect scenario of the general hold change notice may be an effect scenario related to a hold change including the display mode of the game running hold K, or an effect scenario not including the game running hold K display mode. Good (other hold change notices (same for special hold change notices and gimmick-linked button notices)). In the case of an effect scenario that does not include the display mode of the game running hold K, how to change the display mode of the game running hold K is shown in the effect mode during the decorative symbol designation command analysis process of FIG. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may determine in the production | presentation scenario setting process (step S876 to S880) according to.

  67, the prefetch fluctuation pattern types X3 to X11 in the case of a loss include “normal fluctuation”, N reach (normal reach), normal SP reach 1 (first reach production A), and normal SP reach 2 (first reach production B), normal SP reach 3 (first + second reach production A), normal SP reach 4 (first + second reach production B), normal SP reach 5 (second reach) Effect A), normal SP reach 6 (second reach effect B), normal SP reach 7 (special reach), and the selection ratio when the color of the pending change notice is “white” “blue” “red” Is shown numerically. Similarly, the pre-reading variation pattern types Y1 to Y7 in the case of winning are also normal SP reach 1 (first reach effect A), normal SP reach 2 (first reach effect B), and normal SP reach. 3 (first + second reach effect A), normal SP reach 4 (first + second reach effect B), normal SP reach 5 (second reach effect A), normal SP reach 6 (second reach effect B) ), There is a normal SP reach 7 (special reach), and the selection ratio when the color of the pending change notice is “white” “blue” “red” is indicated by a numerical value.

  Of the above-described fluctuation modes, the “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation mode of a symbol fluctuation pattern that ends without going through the reach state. For example, “normal fluctuation 3 s”, “normal fluctuation 5 s”, and “normal fluctuation 8 s” in FIG. ”,“ Normal fluctuation 12 s ”, and the like. In the case of this normal variation, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue”, and “red” being selected is 256 for “white”, 6 for “blue”, and 0 for “red”. .

  In addition, “normal reach (N reach)”, as shown as “variation pattern 0” in FIG. 68, informs the losing without causing SP reach effect only by passing through the normal reach state after normal change. This is a variation mode in the case of termination. In the case of this normal reach, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue”, and “red” is 256, “white” is 244, “blue” is 12, and “red” is 0.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 as “fluctuation pattern 1”, “first reach production A” or “first reach production B” is the first reach production (for example, via normal reach) after normal fluctuation. This is a variation mode (direct SP type reach) in the case where an effect by the animation image (a reach effect including the first effect) is generated and then the winning or losing is notified and terminated. In the case of the “first reach effect A” or “first reach effect B” of the loss, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue”, and “red” being selected is “white” out of 256 in total. 230, “blue” is 25, and “red” is 1. In the case of the winning “first reach effect A” or “first reach effect B”, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue”, and “red” is “white” out of 256 as a whole. Is 216, “blue” is 30, and “red” is 10. Therefore, when the first reach effect is accompanied, the rate of occurrence of the hold change notice increases, and the rate of occurrence of the hold change notice increases in the case of winning than in the case of losing.

  In addition, “first + second reach effect A” or “first + second reach effect B”, as shown as “fluctuation pattern 2” in FIG. 68, after the normal fluctuation, the first reach via the normal reach. After an effect (for example, a reach effect by an animation image) is generated and a loss is notified once, a second reach effect (for example, an effect by a live-action image (the first effect by a live-action image) is higher than the first reach effect). This is a variation aspect (developed SP reach) in the case where a reach effect including a second effect) indicating that the winning expectation degree is higher than the effect of 1 is generated, and a winning or losing is notified and terminated. In the case of “first + second reach effect A” or “first + second reach effect B” of the loss, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue” and “red” is selected from 256 “White” is 186, “Blue” is 50, and “Red” is 20. In the case of the winning “first + second reach effect A” or “first + second reach effect B”, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue”, and “red” is 256 in total. , “White” is 166, “Blue” is 60, and “Red” is 30. Therefore, in the case of “first + second reach effect A” or “first + second reach effect B”, “blue” and “red” are higher than in the case of “first reach effect A” or “first reach effect B”. The selected ratio is high, and the relative ratio of “white” is low. In addition, in the case of winning than in the case of losing, the ratio of selecting “blue” and “red” is higher, and the ratio of selecting “white” is relatively lower.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68 as “fluctuation pattern 3”, “second reach effect A” or “second reach effect B” passes through the normal reach state after the normal change, but the first reach effect ( This is a variation mode (direct SP reach) in which the second reach effect (actual image effect) immediately occurs without passing through (animation image effect), that is, is omitted, and immediately ends when a hit or loss is notified. . In the case of “second reach production A” or “second reach production B”, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue” and “red” being selected is “white” out of 256 in total. 176, “blue” is 40 and “red” is 40. In the case of the winning “second reach effect A” or “second reach effect B”, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue”, and “red” is “white” out of 256 as a whole. Is 106, “blue” is 70, and “red” is 80. Therefore, in the case of “second reach effect A” or “second reach effect B”, “red” is selected more than in the case of “first + second reach effect A” or “first + second reach effect B”. The ratio increases, and the ratio of selecting “white” and “blue” decreases relatively. In addition, in the case of winning than in the case of losing, the ratio of selecting “blue” and “red” is higher, and the ratio of selecting “white” is relatively lower.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 64, “special reach (for example, normal medium SP reach 7 in FIGS. 64 and 65)” is a big hit with a relatively high profit status (eg, 16R probability variable big hit). Since the reach form (for example, such a form in a reach state with a specific symbol (7 symbols)) appears, it is named in view of its speciality. In the case of “special reach” in FIG. 67, the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue”, and “red” being selected is “white” 206, “blue” 0, “Red” is 50. Further, in the case of “special reach” (the normal SP reach 7 in FIG. 64), the ratio of the pending change notice “white”, “blue”, and “red” being selected is “white” out of 256 in total. 128, “blue” is 0, and “red” is 128. Therefore, in the case of “special reach”, the ratio of selecting “red” is higher than in the case of “second reach effect A” or “second reach effect B”. In addition, in the case of winning than in the case of losing, the ratio of selecting “red” is higher, and the ratio of selecting “white” is relatively lower.

(Characteristics of pre-reading lottery)
As can be seen from the description of FIG. 67 above, in the case of the present embodiment, as the reach effect, normal reach, first reach effect (for example, an effect based on an animation image), and the second reach with higher win expectation than the first reach effect. There are three types of effects (for example, effects based on live-action images). In addition, as the type of the symbol variation pattern that handles the reach effect, after the first reach effect is performed, at least the success / failure result of the winning is notified (in the case of winning, the winning type may be notified. Similarly, when the “first variation pattern (variation pattern 1 in FIG. 68)” that ends the symbol variation display operation is performed, the second reach effect is performed after the first reach effect is performed, and then the success / failure result of the winning is notified. The “second variation pattern (variation pattern 2 in FIG. 68)” that ends the variation display operation, the second reach effect is performed without performing the first reach effect, and then the winning / failing result is notified and the symbol variation display operation is performed. “3rd variation pattern (variation pattern 3 in FIG. 68)” is completed. After normal reach is performed, the winning / failing result is notified and the symbol variation display operation is terminated. Pattern 0) "includes a total of four types.

  Then, in the lottery process in step S103 of FIG. 20, a specific pending change notice (here, a pending change notice in a color (blue or red) other than the normal color (white)) is executed in relation to the type of the variation pattern. Here, the specific pre-reading notice effect is executed in the case of the third variation pattern (variation pattern 3 in FIG. 68) in which the second reach effect is performed without performing the first reach effect. The ratio is higher than the ratio of executing the specific pre-reading notice effect in the second variation pattern (variation pattern 2 in FIG. 68) for performing the first reach effect and the second reach effect.

  In the pre-reading effect lottery table of FIG. 67, when looking at the ratio of “blue” or “red” hold change notices other than the usual “white” as a specific pre-reading notice effect, Variation is '6', normal reach is '12', 'first reach production A' or 'first reach production B' is '26', 'first + second reach production A' or 'first + second reach production B' "70", "Second Reach Production A" or "Second Reach Production B" is "80", and "Special Reach" is "50". In the case of winning, “first reach production A” or “first reach production B” is “40”, “first + second reach production A” or “first + second reach production B” is “90”, “ The “second reach effect A” or “second reach effect B” is “150”, and the “special reach” of the loss is “128”. Therefore, as a hot look-ahead effect, the ratio of “blue” or “red” other than the usual “white” selected and displayed is “second reach effect A” or “first” in both cases of losing and winning. “2 reach production B” is the highest, and the selection ratio in the case of winning is higher than in the case of losing.

  In this way, the change in the hold in the case of the “second reach effect A” or the “second reach effect B” is changed compared to the case of the “first + second reach effect A” or the “first + second reach effect B”. The reason why the selected ratio of “blue” or “red” is set higher as the notice is selected by the variation pattern 2 (“first + second reach effect A” or “first + second reach effect B”). During the first reach production when a hot look-ahead notice effect (pending change notice “red” or “lightning bolt continuous notice”) occurs, many players are told, “This first reach effect is off, The cold view of “I will develop into the 2nd reach production anyway”, that is, the 1st reach production itself has a meaningless view, and there are few situations where it is a waste of time to go through the 1st reach production It is to do.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of executing the specific prefetching notice effect in the variation pattern 3 of FIG. 68 is higher than the ratio of executing the specific prefetching notice effect in the variation pattern 2 of FIG. When a prefetch effect with a high degree of expectation occurs, the first reach effect is omitted, and the occurrence rate of the third variation pattern in which the second reach effect is suddenly increased. Therefore, the time required for the first reach effect is increased. It is possible to eliminate waste as much as possible. That is, when a pre-reading notice effect with a high expectation level occurs, a reach effect with a high expectation level for winning is executed as soon as possible, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the symbol variation display game.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of executing the specific prefetching notice effect in the variation pattern 3 of FIG. 68 is higher than the ratio of executing the specific prefetching notice effect in the variation pattern 2 of FIG. When a pre-reading notice effect with a high expectation of winning is generated, the first reach effect is omitted, and the occurrence ratio of the variation pattern 3 in which the second reach effect is suddenly increased. Therefore, the time required for the first reach effect is increased. Can be eliminated as much as possible. In other words, when a pre-reading notice effect with a high expectation degree of winning occurs, a reach effect with a high expectation degree is executed as soon as possible, and the interest in symbol games can be improved. From this point, in the above-mentioned “variation pattern 2” and “variation pattern 3”, the winning expectation relationship satisfies the relationship “variation pattern 2 ≦ variation pattern 3” or “variation pattern 2 <variation pattern 3”. Preferably

(Relationship between the production time of the first reach production and the production time of the second reach production)
Moreover, it is preferable to have the following relationship about the said 1st reach production and the 2nd reach production. About the production time of the 1st reach production and the production time of the 2nd reach production, it defines so that the relationship of "the production time of the 1st reach production <the production time of the 2nd reach production" may be satisfied. In this way, when a pre-reading notice effect with a high expectation of winning is generated and the variation pattern 2 is executed, it is more than when “the effect time of the first reach effect ≧ the effect time of the second reach effect” is set. The second reach effect with a high expectation of winning is executed in a shorter time when it is determined that “the effect time of the first reach effect <the effect time of the second reach effect”.

  Accordingly, as a first effect, when a pre-reading notice effect with a high expectation of winning is generated, the first reach effect is omitted, and the occurrence ratio of the variation pattern 3 in which the second reach effect is suddenly increased is increased. As a second effect, a pre-reading notice effect with a high expectation of winning is generated as a second effect, while exhibiting the above-described effect that it is possible to eliminate as much of the time required for the first reach effect as possible. Thus, even if the variation pattern 2 in which the second reach effect is executed via the first reach effect is executed, the second reach effect having the higher winning expectation can be executed in a relatively short time. And the like. Due to the synergistic effect of the first action effect and the second action effect, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the design game.

(About fluctuation patterns with pseudo-ream)
Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern 2 with pseudo-continuations and the variation pattern 3 with pseudo-continuations are provided, about these “variation pattern 2 with pseudo-continuations” and “variation pattern 3 with pseudo-continuations” It is preferable to have the following relationship.

  In the case of a fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuations, the winning expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuations increases. In other words, the occurrence rate of the SP reach type having a high winning expectation increases. Therefore, for example, “pseudo consecutive N times (for example, N = 2 to 4) + variation pattern 2” is provided as a variation pattern with pseudo-continuous belonging to variation pattern 2 in FIG. 39, and pseudo-continuous belonging to variation pattern 3 in FIG. When “pseudo M times (for example, M = 2 to 4) + variation pattern 3” is provided as the variation pattern, the selection ratio of a specific pre-reading notice effect is “M = N”, that is, the same number of times. In the case of accompanying pseudo-variation, the selection ratio of a specific pre-reading notice effect is “'pseudo N times + variation pattern' 2 ≦“ pseudo M times (M = N) + variation pattern 3 '”, N times + variation pattern 2 ′ <“pseudo M times (M = N) + variation pattern 3 ′” is preferably determined so as to satisfy the relationship. Further, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured so that the occurrence of the second reach effect is confirmed when the number of pseudo consecutive occurrences is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, N, M = 3 times), the same relationship is also satisfied. It is preferable to define.

  In this way, when a relatively large number of pseudo-reams (N, M = 3 to 4) occurs, during the first reach production at this time, a large number of pseudo-reams are executed. So, the first reach production will be lost, and it will develop into the second reach production anyway ”, that is, the first reach production itself has a meaning that is not meaningful, via the first reach production This can reduce the situation where time is wasted.

  Therefore, when the variation pattern 2 and the variation pattern 3 have the same number of pseudo-continuations, the ratio of executing a specific pre-reading notice effect at the time of the variation pattern 3 with the pseudo-sequence is set at the time of the variation pattern 2 with the pseudo-sequence. By setting the ratio to be higher than the rate at which a specific pre-reading notice effect is executed, when a pre-reading notice effect with a high winning expectation occurs, the first reach effect is omitted and the second reach effect is executed suddenly. Since the rate of occurrence of the fluctuation pattern 3 is increased, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the waste of time required for the first reach production. Even when a variation pattern with pseudo-reams is provided in this way, if a pre-reading notice effect with a high expectation of winning is generated, a reach effect with a high expectation will be executed as soon as possible. Improvements can be made.

  A gaming machine configured to be able to show the above pseudo-ream can be configured as follows, for example.

  An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied; and a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding whether or not to generate a winning game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means; The symbol display means for displaying the lottery display operation of a plurality of types of symbols, and the symbol display means for displaying the lottery result by the lottery means according to the combination of the stop symbols when the fluctuation operation ends, and the lottery Based on the lottery result by the means, based on the variation pattern determining means for determining the variation pattern related to the symbol variation display operation in the symbol display means from among a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means And a symbol display control means for controlling the symbol variable display operation in the symbol display means. Over emissions, in variable display operation of the design, including a pseudo continuous variation pattern to perform re-variable display operation of symbols (the pseudo variation) from the suspend state and the temporary stop state of the symbol. The variation pattern according to the variation pattern 2 includes a plurality of types of pseudo continuous variation patterns having different pseudo variation times, and the variation pattern according to the variation pattern 3 includes a plurality of types of pseudo continuous variation patterns having different numbers of pseudo variation. (For example, pseudo N times (N = 2 to 4) + variation pattern 2, pseudo M times (M = N, or M ≧ N) + variation pattern 3). At this time, the first pseudo continuous variation pattern related to the first pseudo continuous variation pattern related to the variation pattern 2 of N times of pseudo variation and the second pseudo continuous variation pattern related to the variation pattern 3 of the same pseudo variation N times. When the prefetching is determined to be the second pseudo-continuous variation pattern, the specific prefetching effect is executed at a higher rate than when the prefetching is determined to be.

  Further, as the specific pre-reading notice effect, “special hold change notice and / or gimmick interlock button notice” may be adopted, and when the variation pattern 3 in FIG. Can be made higher than the ratio at the time of variation pattern 2 in FIG. Also, the exclusive hold display mode when the “special hold change notice and / or gimmick interlock button notice” is executed can be determined so as to have a tendency as shown in FIG.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 20, next, based on the production information (production data for production scenario) obtained in step S103, production scenario data for general holding notice and lightning notice production scenario data are created and set (step S105: General hold and lightning notice display setting process). Here, for example, when the general hold change notice is not executed with respect to the general hold change notice, the production scenario data for causing the hold display to appear in the normal hold display mode is created and set (normal hold display process). When the general hold change notice is executed, the production scenario data for causing the hold display to appear in the dedicated hold display mode specified by the play information instead of the normal hold display mode is created, and a predetermined storage area of the RAM 243 is created. Set to (hold display data storage area) (dedicated hold display processing). Similar to the reserved storage area of the RAM 203, the reserved display data storage area corresponds to the reserved display data storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the special display 1 reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1). , A special figure 2 holding display data storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2 is provided. These hold display data storage areas are provided with hold 1 to hold n display data storage areas (where n is the maximum number of active hold balls: in this embodiment, n = 4), and each of them is the maximum number of hold balls for operation. The hold display data can be stored (the hold storage order is the hold 1 display data storage area, the hold 2 display data storage area,..., The hold n−1 display data storage area, the hold n display data storage area. Are stored in order).

  In the present embodiment, when the gimmick interlock button notice is being executed, the display form according to the general hold change notice is not particularly limited, and is displayed in the dedicated hold display form set here. . In addition, among the special reservation change notices according to the first to fifteenth production examples, as shown in the twelfth production example shown in FIG. 51, when a new operation reservation ball is generated, the special reservation change is also targeted for the operation reservation ball. When the advance notice is configured to be executable, if a special hold change notice is scheduled to be executed, or if a special hold change notice is being executed (especially before the start of concealment), a new action hold ball is Restricted general hold change notice to be displayed in the normal hold display mode (general hold change notice prohibition processing), special hold change notice in the special hold change notice in the special hold display Is preferably displayed (for example, see FIG. 32B described later).

  Regarding the lightning continuous notice, if the lightning continuous notice effect is executed based on the effect information in step S103, the lightning type effect data specified by the effect information for the lightning effect that appears in the symbol variation display game. And a lightning bolt continuous notice display process for setting the number of executions to the lightning effect execution execution counter. In addition, when winning the lightning continuous notice execution lottery (step S103), in order to manage the number of symbol fluctuations (notice number) that is the same as the number of reserved storages existing at the time of winning for the lightning effect execution counter, If there is a value of the number of active reserve balls (the number of reserved storage) existing in FIG. In addition, when a lightning bolt continuous notice is displayed in a symbol change display game related to other ball holding balls except for the lightning bolts that are subject to continuous lightning warning, for example, when there are three holding memories (here, lightning bolt continuous) The operation hold subject to advance notice is the third hold), and “2” may be set. The value of the lightning effect execution counter is decremented by 1 in step S873 (lightning bolt continuous notice effect setting process) of FIG. 36, which will be described later, every time the symbol variation display game is performed thereafter, and the lightning effect execution counter is set to zero. Until then, a lightning bolt continuous notice effect will appear.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a special hold change notice is being executed (step S107). When the special hold change notice is not being executed (step S107: NO), the process proceeds to the determination process of step S119, and it is determined whether the gimmick interlock button notice is being executed (step S119). When the gimmick interlocking button notice is being executed (step S119: YES), nothing is done and the hold addition command process is exited.

  On the other hand, when the gimmick-linked button notice is not being executed (step S119: NO), that is, when neither the special hold change notice nor the gimmick-linked button notice is being executed, the later-described “ “Special hold change notice setting process (FIG. 21)” or “gimmic interlock button notice process (FIG. 33)” related to the overall effect control of the gimmick interlock button notice is performed (step S121). As a result, the pending addition command process is exited.

  When either one of the special hold change notice and the gimmick interlock button notice is being executed, the execution of the other effect is restricted. Therefore, if neither the special hold change notice nor the gimmick interlock button notice is executed, any notice effect will be allowed, but whether to execute any notice will be decided by lottery. However, it is preferable to set a predetermined priority execution order.

  In the case of the present embodiment, when a new operation hold ball is generated, the twelfth effect example in which the special hold change notice is executed for the operation hold ball as well as the general hold change notice in FIG. Considering the thirteenth effect example, the special reservation change notice is preferentially executed. However, depending on game play, the gimmick-linked button notice may be executed with priority over the special hold change notice. The reason is that the gimmick-linked button notice is a player-participation-type notice effect, which is more effective than the non-player-participant-type notice effect. Since an image display effect has an organic relevance and develops an effect scenario for tailoring a story, it has a high visual effect and a high degree of player attention.

  When it is determined in the determination process of step S107 that the special hold change notice is being executed (step S107: YES), what kind of display form is used for the hold display mode for the general hold notice determined in step S103. In relation to the above, an effect setting process for incorporating into the effect scenario of the special hold change notice is performed (steps S111 to S113).

  The above "special hold change notice is being executed" means that a special hold change notice is already scheduled to be executed when a new active hold ball is generated, or a special hold change notice is in progress. . This means that if a special hold change notice is already scheduled to be executed when a new action hold ball is generated, the hold icon of the new hold action ball will also be subject to the special hold change notice notice. When there is a special hold change notice in the middle, depending on the progress timing of the production scenario of the special hold change notice, the hold icon of the new hold action ball may be targeted for the special hold change notice. Specifically, the process of steps S109 to S113 corresponds to a process of performing an effect setting process necessary to reveal the effect mode described in FIGS. 51C to 51D of the twelfth effect example. . In the case where a new operation hold ball is generated while such a special hold change notice is being executed, the display state of the hold icon of the new hold action ball is incorporated into the special hold change notice effect scenario. It is preferable to proceed with. For example, when a new holding action ball is generated, if it is before the start of the concealment effect or during the concealment effect (except during the concealment effect, the fifteenth effect example (FIG. 53B) for concealing the entire hold display), It is displayed in the “white” normal hold color (general hold change notice prohibition processing: see FIGS. 51C and 32C), and then this “white” hold icon is concealed by the explosion smoke R (see FIG. 51 (D)), and in the case of a presentation effect as a notice subject of a special hold change notice, the display state of the hold icon is changed such that the hold display form may change. We will proceed in the form incorporated in.

  Therefore, first, in step S109, the currently executing special hold change notice scenario is acquired (step S109), and the progress of the special hold change notice is in a state where hold display is possible as shown in FIG. It is confirmed whether or not there is (for example, whether it is before the start of the concealment effect or during the concealment effect). Then, if the hold display is possible, the general hold change notice prohibition process is performed, and the new hold display is necessary to incorporate the new hold display into the execution scenario of the special hold change notice that is scheduled or in progress. A scenario is created (step S111) and set (step S113).

  Here, in the “new effect scenario” created in the process of step S111, in the case of the twelfth effect example of FIG. 51, the hold icon for the hold display (hold icon) related to the new operation hold ball is displayed. As shown in FIG. 4D, a production scenario (confidential area expansion production) that is concealed by “explosion R”, and the hold icon is disclosed by executing a disclosure production as shown in FIG. At that time, the production scenario about how to display the hold display mode is included.

  When creating the above-mentioned new production scenario, various lotteries regarding the hold display mode during the special hold change notice setting process (FIG. 21) described later are performed, and the effect control process required for executing the new special hold change notice. I do. As a result, the hold indication relating to the newly generated action hold ball is incorporated into the special hold change notice scenario. For example, a production scenario as shown in FIGS. 51C to 51E is developed and newly generated. The special hold change notice including the actuated hold ball as the notice object is realized. The old scenario may be executed as it is without being visible on the liquid crystal screen (executed on the back side layer), and the new scenario may be executed so as to be visible (executed on the front side layer). In this case, there is no need to stop the production of the old scenario, and the possibility of malfunction due to production control can be reduced.

  When it is determined that the special hold change notice is being executed (step S107: YES), the new operation hold ball generated this time may be excluded from the notice object of the special hold change notice. In this case, with respect to the hold display (hold icon) of the new operation hold ball, the hold display is performed based on the production scenario of the general hold change notice. Further, the new operation hold ball generated this time may be excluded from the target of the general hold change notice and the special hold change notice. In this case, it is sufficient to invalidate or cancel the effect scenario for the general hold change notice. In this case, the new operation hold ball continues to be displayed in the normal hold display mode without causing any hold change. In both the former case and the latter case, it is not necessary to create a new production scenario as described above related to a new operation-reserved ball, which can contribute to a reduction in production control burden.

(16-3. Special hold change notice effect setting process: FIG. 21)
Next, the special hold change notice effect setting process (step S121) performed during the hold addition command shown in FIG. 20 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the special hold change notice effect setting process.

  In the special hold change notice effect setting process, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first determines whether or not the special hold change notice execution prohibition condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the special hold change notice can be executed ( It is confirmed whether or not the production situation is suitable for execution (step S601).

  The case where “it is not possible to execute” is, for example, a predetermined number or more of existing operation holding balls (in this embodiment, it is a condition that there are two or more operation holding balls: see FIG. 69). Or not. This is because the special hold change notice makes a hold change via the secret effect, the impact degree when the disclosure effect is executed is stronger when the hold indication is larger than when the hold indication is small, This is because the production effect is enhanced. In addition, it corresponds to whether or not the current game state (game state) is a prefetch prohibition state, whether or not an effect that is not suitable for execution of the special hold change notice is being executed.

  The above-mentioned “effects that are not suitable for executing special hold change notice” are, for example, notice effects with a relatively high expectation of winning wins (for example, strong reach effects such as reach 6 and reach 7, premium effects, etc.) In addition, specific notice effects related to the symbol variation display game (notice effects with high expectation of winning, cut-in notice effects, other button notice effects, etc.), gimmick-linked button notice effects, and the like are applicable. When such a notice effect is appearing or is scheduled to appear, if the special hold change notice (FIGS. 37 to 53B) is made to appear, the special hold change notice and the notice effect are duplicated. There is a possibility of appearing. As a result, problems such as the player not being able to enjoy the high-anticipation performance at the corner, or confusion of the player due to the occurrence of a duplicate announcement performance, are lost, and the significance of the corner-direction announcement performance is lost. This is because there is a possibility that attention to the performance may be dispersed, and there is a problem that the player's gaming interest may be lowered.

  In addition, it is preferable to define a condition for prohibiting execution of the special hold change notice due to the effect time of the special hold change notice. This is the case, for example, when a hit game (a big hit game or a small hit game) is started before the special hold change notice ends. This is because if the player enters the winning game during the special hold change notice, the effect of the winning game will be reduced. Further, depending on the start timing of the special hold change notice, for example, as shown in Production Example 12 shown in FIG. 50, the current symbol variation display game is ended and the next symbol variation display game is started. There may be a “fluctuation straddle” state in which the notice is executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. In such a case, a problem arises when there are two existing action-pending balls and the current (in process) symbol variation display game is just before the end. In this case, during execution of the special hold change notice, the operation hold ball is digested and the next symbol variation display game is started, that is, the hold display becomes one. In such a case, even if the “confidential effect → disclosure effect” by the special hold change notice is executed, the effect is diminished. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to prohibit execution of the special hold change notice if the time width is not equal to or longer than the effect time width of the special hold change notice until the end of the current symbol variation display game.

  Moreover, if the special hold change notice is continuously executed in a short period of time, the real pleasure as an important notice effect is lost. Therefore, after executing the special reservation change notice this time, at least the maximum reserved memory number (for example, the maximum reserved memory number of 4 times for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or the total maximum reserved memory number of the special symbols 1 and 2) 8), special execution change notice can be prohibited. Instead of prohibiting the maximum number of reserved memories, it may be prohibited for the number of existing stored memories when the special reservation change notice is executed.

  In this way, by confirming whether or not the situation is suitable for the execution of the special hold change notice, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the special hold change notice and other effects, and to suppress the decline of the game entertainment interest. Or suppressing a sense of incongruity.

  If the special hold change notice can be executed or is suitable for execution (step S601: YES), a special hold change notice random number is acquired as a production random number (step S603). The production random numbers include a plurality of types of production random numbers used in special hold change notices, gimmick-linked notices, other notice effects, and the like. The random number for special hold change notice is a random number used when determining the contents of production (scenario) related to the special hold change notice.

  Next, information necessary for executing this special hold change notice is acquired (command information acquisition process: step S605). Here, from the information obtained when various commands are received, for example, variation pattern information (prefetch variation pattern or variation pattern information at the start of variation), winning type information, and the like, an execution lottery of the current special pending change notice ( Information necessary for step S609) to be described later is acquired. Thereby, the information required for executing the hold change notice for all or part of the existing operation hold ball and game execution hold K is acquired. Thus, for example, with respect to fluctuation pattern information (fluctuation pattern information at the start of fluctuation or look-ahead fluctuation pattern information), information indicating the result of winning lottery (separate from big hit, small hit, and lose) and information about reach production (reach production) In the case of presence / absence and reach production, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream and the number of times) can be confirmed. In addition, as other information, for example, information included in a command related to a normal symbol (lottery result information per auxiliary) is acquired, and whether or not a predetermined condition related to the normal symbol is satisfied (for example, an operation holding ball of a normal symbol) Depending on whether or not a predetermined number is stored and whether or not the number of the operation holding balls is included in the hit, the contents of the special hold change notice may be changed. Specifically, when a predetermined condition regarding a normal symbol is satisfied and a special hold change notice may be executed, a setting to execute the special hold change notice may be performed without fail. As a result, it becomes possible to make a special hold change notice with a relationship between the decorative symbol variation display game related to the special symbol and the normal symbol variation display game related to the normal symbol, and a variety of production variations can be made (described later). The same applies to the gimmick-linked button notice setting process (FIG. 33).

  As for the reach production according to the present embodiment, “N reach <SP reach 1 <SP reach 2 <... <SP reach 6 <SP reach 7” is defined from the one with a low expected winning expectation. In the following, in order to simplify the explanation and make it easier to understand the present invention, the types of reach production are increased from those with a low winning expectation to “weak reach <medium reach <strong reach”. This will be described separately (the same applies to the gimmick interlock button notice setting process (FIG. 33) described later). For example, the reach production belonging to the weak reach is “N reach and SP reach 1-2”, the reach production belonging to the medium reach is “SP reach 3-5”, and the reach production belonging to the strong reach is “SP reach 6-7”. Divide into conditions. It should be noted that the reach with pseudo-continuity is also included in one of weak reach, medium reach, and strong reach depending on the expected winning degree. In addition, weak reach, medium reach, and strong reach can be appropriately assigned from those with low winning expectation.

  Next, the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table of FIG. 69 is acquired (step S607), and the special hold change notice notice lottery is performed based on the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table (step S609). This special hold change notice effect execution lottery table includes the number of hold indications (the number of hold during game execution and the number of existing action hold memories) and the change pattern information (the change pattern information at the start of change or the look-ahead change pattern). This is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute a special hold change notice based on (information). An example of this special hold change notice effect execution lottery table is shown in FIG. In the following description, as an example of the special lottery change notice execution lottery opportunity, “when an activated ball is generated” or “when a decorative symbol variation display game starts” will be described as an example.

(Special hold change notice effect execution lottery table: FIG. 69)
FIG. 69 shows a special reservation change notice effect execution lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in the drawing, in the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table, the execution lottery probability of the special hold change notice shows the current hold display number and change pattern information (change pattern information at the start of change or look-ahead change pattern information). It is defined in association with. In the illustrated special hold change notice effect execution lottery table, a special hold change notice effect execution lottery table is provided for each special symbol type. Here, the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 1 is shown, and the illustration of the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table corresponding to the special symbol 2 having substantially the same configuration is omitted. .

  In the figure, the “relevant” notation of “pending display number (pending ball number)” indicates holding K during game execution, and “+1”, “+2”, “+3”, “+4” The notation indicates the number of active reserved balls corresponding to special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 (in this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved symbols for each special symbol is four). For this “pending display number (actuation holding ball number)”, information in the sub-side holding ball number management area of the RAM 243 is used. Specifically, when the special lot change notice advance lottery is performed in the process of step S121 in the “hold addition command analysis process” of FIG. 20, the “hold addition command (FIG. 59) transmitted when the winning occurs. The number of the operation holding balls specified by “see”) (the number of stored storage after addition) is used. On the other hand, in the process of step S121 in the “decorative symbol designation command analysis process” of FIG. When the execution lottery is performed, the notice effect process is performed at the start of change. Therefore, the number of the operation hold balls designated by the “hold subtraction command (see FIG. 60)” transmitted at the start of change (after the subtraction) Reserved memory number) is used. The same applies to the gimmick-linked button notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  Further, the column of “variation pattern information” in the figure means pre-reading variation pattern information or variation pattern information at the start of variation. Which variation pattern information is to be used can be determined according to the execution lottery of the special hold change advance notice, or the execution lottery form, triggered by the reception of the effect control command. This will be described in detail below.

("Read-ahead variation pattern information" is used (use case 1))
In the illustrated special hold change notice effect execution lottery table, for example, the above-mentioned “look-ahead variation pattern information” is used, for example, when a special hold change notice notice lottery is performed when a new action hold ball is generated. This is a case (use case 1) in which the execution lottery of the special hold change notice is performed using only the pre-reading variation pattern information related to the new operation hold ball. . Specifically, the lottery processing content can be as follows.

  (A-1) In the case of this use case 1, first, the prefetch fluctuation pattern information related to the new operation hold ball is acquired from the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 243, and then the hold display number information is held on the sub-side hold of the RAM 243. Obtained from the number-of-balls management area (in the sub-side reserved number-of-balls management area, the number of reserved balls for operation specified by the hold addition command is stored). At this time, if the symbol variation display game is in progress, since there is a game-in-progress hold K, the number of hold displays is included. For example, a case where the symbol variation display game is currently being executed (the game holding hold K exists) and there are three operating hold balls will be described as a representative example. In this case, the number of held display is “game running hold K (related) + actuated hold ball 4 (3 + new actuated hold ball)”. Then, if the pre-reading variation pattern information of the new operation holding ball is “big hit strong reach”, “big hit strong reach” in the column of fluctuation pattern information in the special holding change notice announcement execution lottery table of FIG. 69, The column corresponding to the number of held display “corresponding +4” is referred to, and in this case, the special hold change notice is executed with a probability of “30%”. Since the special hold change notice can be executed when there are a plurality of operation hold balls, the “hold display number” column of the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table in FIG. The number of spheres should be taken into consideration. The illustrated execution lottery table takes into consideration an embodiment in which a hold display including a game running hold K is targeted for a hold change notice. Therefore, when the game-in-progress hold K is not considered, only the number of the operation hold balls need be considered (the same applies to the gimmick-linked button notice effect execution lottery table in FIG. 80 described later).

(Case where “look-ahead variation pattern information” is used (use case 2))
As another case (use case 2) in which the “prefetch variation pattern information” is used in the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table of FIG. 69, a new operation hold ball is generated as in the use case 1 described above. This is a case where the special lot change notice is performed in the opportunity, but the difference between the use case 1 and the use case 2 is not only the look-ahead variation pattern information related to the new operation hold ball but also other operation hold balls. The pre-reading variation pattern information according to the above is used to perform a special lot change notice advance lottery. Here, as in the case 1 described above, a case where a symbol variation display game is currently being executed and a new operation holding ball is generated when there are three operation holding balls will be described as an example (“Game “On-hold hold K (related) +4 active hold balls”).

In the case of this use case 2, the pre-reading variation pattern information related to the operation holding ball already stored including the new operation holding ball is acquired from the pre-read information storage area of the RAM 243. Here, it can be determined as follows which information is used for the execution lottery among the acquired pieces of prefetch variation pattern information.
(A-2) The prefetch variation pattern information related to the operation holding ball having the highest degree of winning expectation among the acquired prefetch variation pattern information is used. In addition, when all the winning expectation degrees are the same, selection can be made as in the following (B-2) to (C-2).
(B-2) Prefetch variation pattern information related to the latest or oldest hold display is used.
(C-2) Among the acquired prefetch fluctuation pattern information, which prefetch fluctuation pattern information is to be used is randomly selected.
(D-2) On-hold storage order or execution order of the symbol variation display game (in the case of the priority variation type, priority is given to the on-hold storage of the special diagram on the priority variation side. In the case of this embodiment, the special diagram 2 side has priority) Predetermined selection rate (for example, when the number of balls held is four, “first (oldest) (10%) <second (20%) <third (30%) <fourth (latest) (40%) "and vice versa.
Then, when any of the prefetch fluctuation pattern information is determined, for example, if the prefetch fluctuation pattern information is “Large hit middle reach”, the column of the fluctuation pattern information in the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table of FIG. The column corresponding to “Large hit reach” and the number “4+” of the hold display is referred to. In this case, the special hold change notice is executed with a probability of “25%”.

  However, when the special hold change notice is executed for either the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, the look-ahead variation pattern information on the target special symbol side is acquired, and both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are obtained. Is used, the look-ahead variation pattern information relating to all the operation-pending balls is acquired and used. In the case 2 (A-2) to (D-2), including the pre-reading variation pattern information related to the game-in-progress hold K, “the pre-read variation pattern information in the game-in-progress hold K (related) + all operations You may select from "the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information concerning a reservation ball".

  Further, for the game running hold K, “fluctuation pattern information at the start of fluctuation” may be used instead of the prefetch fluctuation pattern information.

(Case where “variation pattern information at the start of change” is used (use case 3))
Next, a case where variation pattern information at the start of variation is used will be described. As a case where the variation pattern information at the start of variation is used, it has been explained that the variation pattern information at the beginning of variation may be used for the on-hold game K in “use case 2” described above. Another case of using the variation pattern information at the start is a case in which a lottery for a special pending change notice is performed in response to the start of a decorative symbol variation display game (receiving a variation pattern designation command and / or a decorative symbol designation command) ), A special lottery change lottery execution lottery using only the variation pattern information at the start of variation related to the activated ball used in the current symbol variation display game (use case) 3). Specifically, this is a case executed in the process of step S121 in the “decorative symbol designation command analysis process” of FIG. 36 described later, and the following lottery process contents can be set.

  (A-3) In the case of this use case 3, first, the variation pattern information at the start of variation relating to the operation holding ball used for the variation display operation is stored in the variation pattern information storage area of the RAM 243 (the variation pattern of FIG. 35 described later). Next, the reserved display number information is acquired from the sub-side reserved ball number management area of the RAM 243 (the sub-side reserved ball number management area has an operation designated by the hold subtraction command). The number of held balls is stored. For example, when there are four active reserve balls (four on-hold display number) immediately before the decoration symbol variation display game is in progress, the oldest operation reserve balls are provided for the current symbol variation display game ( In the case of (digested) case, a typical example will be explained. The number of hold indications in this case is “the game running hold K (the relevant) + actuation” because the oldest actuated hold ball is consumed in the symbol variation display game. It becomes a state of “three reserved balls (consumed four to one)”. If the fluctuation pattern information at the start of the fluctuation of the operation hold ball (digestion hold) is “big hit strong reach”, the “big hit” in the “variable pattern information” column of the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table of FIG. The column corresponding to “Strong Reach” and the number of held indications “corresponding +3” is referenced. In this case, the special hold change notice is executed with a probability of “25%”.

(About other execution triggers for special lot change notice)
As for the execution lottery of the special hold change notice, in addition to the occurrence of the above-mentioned operation hold ball or the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, the special hold change notice execution lottery can be performed even during the winning game. In this case, a plurality of types of hit commands ("big hit start command", big win opening command, "big hit end command", "big win opening command) transmitted from the main control unit 20 at a predetermined timing during the win game. ”,“ Small hit start command ”,“ small hit end command, etc.), the execution lottery can be performed upon reception of at least one of the commands.

  However, in the case of this embodiment, during the winning game, the special symbol variation display operation is not executed, and the symbol variation display game itself is interrupted. Therefore, there is no case in which only “variation pattern information at the start of variation” is used, such as the use case 3 described above. However, if the number of active holding balls is less than the maximum number of stored memories, the generation of operating holding balls is allowed. Therefore, during the winning game, the special holding change notice is executed exclusively when the operating holding ball is generated. A lottery can be performed. On the other hand, when the operation holding ball reaches the maximum holding memory number, the “OF holding addition command” at the time of occurrence of the overflow winning ball is transmitted from the main control unit 20, and this “OF holding addition command” The prefetch variation pattern information is not included (see FIG. 59), and the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table of FIG. 69 cannot be used for the overflow winning ball. In addition, the hit command does not include pre-reading variation pattern information or variation pattern information at the start of variation, and similarly, the special pending change notice effect execution lottery table cannot be used. For this reason, during a winning game, only when a hold addition command is received, a special hold change notice execution lottery may be performed. However, in this case, when the operation hold ball is less than the maximum hold memory number There is no possibility that a special hold change notice will be executed. If it does so, the freedom degree of an execution timing will be restrict | limited and the variation of the production | presentation in a hit game cannot be made wide.

  In view of such circumstances, it is preferable to use the lottery processing method of the use case 2 for the following special hold change notice execution lottery form. If the lottery form of the use case 2 is adopted, the prefetch fluctuation pattern information related to each operation holding ball can be used. An execution lottery can be performed at an opportunity.

  Note that the execution lottery based on the gimmick interlock button notice effect execution lottery table of FIG. 80 described later also differs in that it is a case of executing the special hold change notice described above or a case of executing the gimmick interlock button notice. The lottery processing content is substantially the same as that of the special reservation change notice effect execution lottery table. In the following, for the convenience of explanation, unless otherwise required, the prefetch variation pattern or the variation pattern at the start of variation is simply referred to as “variation pattern”.

(Characteristics of special hold change notice effect execution lottery table)
The special hold change notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 69 has the following characteristics. First, the execution lottery is not performed unless there is a predetermined number or more of hold indications (operation hold ball, game hold K), and the variation pattern information is, for example, “strong reach at big hit” In the case of, the lottery probability is defined as “8% (the relevant +2)”, “15% (the relevant +3)”, and “35% (the relevant +4)” in the order of the number of held indications. The lottery probability is set to increase as the number increases. Similarly, with respect to the other variation pattern information, the lottery probability is set higher as the number of held displays increases. That is, by displaying more hold displays (by storing a larger number of operation hold balls), a special hold change notice is likely to be executed. Accordingly, the player can be given a benefit of making it easier to execute the special hold change notice as more hold displays are displayed. In addition, in order to create a situation in which a special hold change notice is likely to occur, it is necessary to display a lot of hold indications, thereby suppressing intentional stopping action by the player (interrupting the launch of the game ball). be able to.

  Also, as shown in the figure, when the number of pending display is the same, the probability of winning is set higher as the reach performance with higher winning expectation degree (the relationship of “no reach <weak reach <medium reach <strong reach”). ). In this way, since the special hold change notice is executed in proportion to the expected winning degree of the reach effect, the reliability for this effect can be improved. However, as an exception, in the case of “big hit” in the case of “the relevant +4” which is the maximum number of pending balls, the lottery probability is set to be the highest in the case of weak reach with a low winning expectation degree (illustration) Then, “strong reach, medium reach <weak reach”). This is because even if a special hold change notice is executed and a weak reach with a low winning expectation is executed in the subsequent symbol variation display game, the weak reach is executed. ”Can be reduced, and in contrast to the normal case, it is possible to create a situation where the expectation of winning a big hit is dramatically increased. As a result, it is possible to provide a close relationship between the reach effect with a low expectation of winning and the special hold change notice, and an unexpected effect can be exhibited.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, in the case of 2R or small hit, the lottery probability is set lower than in the case of other big hits. In particular, in the case of a small hit, there is a point that the game state after a hit game is not shifted, and in the case of 2R or small hit, there are few points that can be obtained in the hit game. Therefore, in the case of 2R or small hit, the execution probability of the special hold change notice is set lower than in the case of other big wins, and when the special hold change notice is executed, the win with the relatively high profit status is won. The expectation is enhanced and the confidence in the special pending change notice is increased.

(Regarding the non-priority variation pachinko machine 1 special hold change notice effect execution lottery table)
In addition, for “non-priority variation pachinko machine 1” that digests the action-holding balls in the order of winning regardless of the type of special symbol, the lottery probability is defined for each case where the number of held display is 1-8. The special hold change notice effect execution lottery table may be used. Also in this case, if the lottery table has the same tendency as the special reservation change notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 69, the same effect as that of FIG. 69 can be obtained.

  In addition, in the non-priority variation type pachinko machine 1, when the maximum reserved memory number is “8”, the execution probability of the special hold change notice is set relatively higher than the other hold display numbers, It can function as a kind of zone effect such as “a special hold change notice occurs with a high probability or a certainty in the case of the number of balls” and can be treated as a festive blessing effect for storing up to the upper limit value of the hold memory. As a result, the player can actively hold the hold, and can suppress the stopping action such as interrupting the launch of the game ball, thereby increasing the mobilization rate of the gaming machine. In particular, if a special hold change notice is generated for the maximum number of reserved memories “8”, a dynamic effect such as “all eight are concealed” at once is possible (for example, the ninth effect example) 47 (D) of FIG. 47 (however, in FIG. 47 (D), there are seven examples of holding)), compared to the case where only a maximum of four pieces are kept in a concealed state as in the priority variation type pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 2 example of production: see FIG. 38D), the hold change expectation in the disclosed state is greatly expanded. In particular, an effect in which a maximum of eight on-hold displays are disclosed simultaneously (for example, see FIG. 47 (E) in the ninth effect example) is a masterpiece effect that has a very high impact, and can exhibit a high effect. The gimmick interlock button notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 80 described later has the same tendency as the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table, and can exhibit the above-described effects.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 21 again, the execution result of the special hold change notice is checked, and it is determined whether or not the special hold change notice is executed (step S611). When the special hold change notice is not executed (step S611: NO), nothing is done and the special hold change notice effect setting process is exited.

  On the other hand, when the special hold change notice is executed (step S611: YES), the special hold change notice content lottery process is executed (step S613). This special hold change notice content lottery process is mainly composed of the following eight effect processes as effect processes for realizing the special hold change notice. The outline of each effect process is as follows.

The first effect process determines which of the hold icons in the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 and the hold K during game execution is to be subject to special hold change notice. “Change target hold lottery process (FIGS. 22 to 24)”,
The second effect process is “change display mode lottery process (FIG. 25)” for determining a hold display mode (for example, a hold color (display color), a shape, etc.) to be displayed at the time of the disclosure effect.
The third effect process is a “start timing setting process (not shown)” for setting the execution start timing of the special hold change notice.
The fourth effect process is “Character effect mode lottery process (FIG. 26)” for determining a character appearance effect mode (for example, characters L and L2 to appear).
The fifth effect process is an “action effect mode lottery process (FIG. 27)” for determining an action effect mode (action content by a character).
The sixth effect process is a “secret effect mode lottery process (FIG. 28)” for determining the secret effect mode (for example, the display mode of the explosion R, the setting of the secret area, etc.),
The seventh effect process is a “disclosure effect mode lottery process (FIG. 29)” for determining a disclosure effect mode (for example, a hold display simultaneous disclosure effect, a hold display sequential disclosure effect, etc.)
The eighth effect process is an “end effect setting process” for setting an end effect mode. Of these effect processes, details of the effect process contents closely related to the present invention will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When each lottery process described above is executed and each production content (a production mode (part production group) for configuring a production scenario relating to the special hold change notice) is determined, then the above lottery processing is performed. Based on the effect data, an effect scenario for this special hold change notice is created and set in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243 (special hold change notice effect scenario setting process: step S615). Based on the production scenario created here, this special hold change notice is started at the timing to be executed, and the special hold change notice is realized. The special hold change notice effect scenario setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereby, the effect process related to the special hold change notice is ended, and the special hold change notice effect setting process is exited.

(Y. About the case where special hold change notice is executed before the hold change occurs when the hold change is scheduled by general hold change notice)
Here, in the case where the timing is not suitable for executing the special hold change notice in step S601, for example, when the special hold change notice is executed, the hold change target schedule display by the general hold change notice ( There is a case where a hold icon) exists. This is because if the special hold change notice is executed separately from the general hold change notice, the change in the hold display mode of the hold icon may be contradictory or uncomfortable to the player. A case where such a problem may occur will be described below.

(Y-1. Cases where defects occur)
Here, as shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and 38 (A), currently, the hold icons with white circles are displayed on the hold display portions a1 to c1 of the hold display area 76, respectively, and the icon of the seat J is displayed. A case in which a game execution hold K indicated by a white circle is displayed on the screen (currently, three action holding balls of special symbol 1 are held and stored, and a special symbol variation display game corresponding to special symbol 1 is being executed ( A case in which the special symbol 1 is in the variable display operation) will be representatively described.

  In the above-described hold display state, it is assumed that the hold icon of the hold display unit c1 is a hold display of a hold change target schedule based on the general hold change notice, and that the hold icon of the hold display unit c1 causes a hold change, Each time the hold icon of the hold display section c1 shifts and displays, an effect scenario such as “white (during winning) → white (during the first shift display) → yellow (during the second shift display)” is established. A case is assumed (see FIG. 31A described later). In the following description, as in the above-described hold icon of the hold display section c1, the normal hold change notice is displayed in the normal hold display mode at the time of winning a prize, but it is scheduled to change to the dedicated hold display mode triggered by the shift display. The operation hold ball (hold display (hold icon)) is referred to as “general hold change schedule target hold”.

  In such a case, if the special hold change notice is executed before the general hold change schedule target hold changes to “yellow”, the special hold change notice is changed to another hold color (for example, red hold). There may be cases.

  For example, when a special hold change notice is executed during the first shift display from the time of winning a prize, the original scenario for the general hold change notice is “white (when winning) → white (when displaying the first shift)” → Yellow (during the second shift display) is “white (during winning) → red (holding change due to special hold change notice) → white (during first shift display) ) → yellow (during the second shift display: hold change due to the original general hold change notice) ”. In other words, the special hold change notice affects the general hold change notice being executed, and the general hold change schedule target hold (hold icon in the hold display section c1) changes to “yellow hold”. When the scenario of the general hold change notice progresses afterwards, the expectation changes to “red hold”, which has a relatively high expectation, and this time, it changes to “yellow hold”, which is lower than the red hold. End up. As a result, the player is given an impression that the winning expectation level has been suddenly lowered, resulting in distrust of the notice effect.

(Y-2. Means for Solving Problems (First Solution): Case 1)
Assuming such problems, when deciding whether or not to execute a special hold change notice, or when deciding on its execution timing, check the contents of the general hold change notice effect scenario for the existing action hold ball. However, when there is a general hold change schedule target hold, the special hold change notice may not be executed uniformly. In addition, even if there is a general hold change schedule target hold, the special hold change notice is preferentially executed. When the special hold change notice is executed, the general hold change notice is produced. Cancel the scenario itself (for example, clear the general hold change notice production scenario or disable the execution of the general hold change notice), and display the hold change schedule hold in the original general hold change notice May be entrusted to the special hold change notice instead of the general hold change notice. In this case, the original hold change (change in hold display mode) itself due to the general hold change notice is canceled and the special hold change notice is preferentially executed, but two effects are not suffered, This is useful in that the above problems do not occur.

(Y-3. Means to Solve Problems (Second Solution): Case 2)
However, if a hold change due to a general hold change notice is scheduled (when a general hold change schedule target hold exists), the scheduled hold change itself is canceled because the special hold change notice is executed. To do so, the production result of the general hold change notice at the corner disappears without seeing the positive eye, and the real pleasure of the general hold change notice is lost.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display mode scheduled for the general hold change schedule target hold is configured to be derived as an effect result of the special hold change notice, so that the hold change due to the special hold change notice (the special hold change notice is displayed). The production result) and the hold change due to the general hold change notice (the production result of the general hold change notice) can be derived in a redundant manner. Thereby, even when the special hold change notice is executed when the general hold change schedule target hold exists, both notice effects can be treated as effective. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the case where the general hold change notice and the special hold change notice effect are executed in a duplicated manner. FIG. 31 (A) shows a case where the special hold change notice is not present, that is, the case where the general hold change notice is executed alone, and FIG. 31 (B) shows the hold by the general hold change notice. This shows a case (hereinafter referred to as “display transition state case 1”) in which a special hold change notice is executed after a change is scheduled and before the hold change occurs. Hereinafter, the display transition state case 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 31, for the sake of simplification of explanation, it is assumed that there is only a holding display corresponding to the operation holding ball of FIG.

(A. Display transition state case 1)
In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, with reference to FIG. 31A, the hold display transition state when the general hold change notice is executed alone will be described in time series.

(Y-4. About the hold display when the general hold change notice is executed alone: FIG. 31 (A))
In the example shown in the figure, before time t0, the change display related to another operation holding ball (not shown) has already been executed, and at time t0 to tc, two holding icons “on hold display unit a1 A hold icon (hold icon for the operation hold ball A) "and a" hold icon for the hold display portion b1 (hold icon for the operation hold ball B) "are displayed, and the time tc (the other operation hold balls ( At a point of time (a predetermined timing until the variable display related to not shown) is finished), a new operation holding ball (referred to as operation holding ball C) is generated, and a “holding icon (operation holding ball in the holding display portion c1) is generated. C hold icon) ”is displayed.

  Further, here, the operation holding balls A and B show a case where the general holding change notice is not executed, and the operation holding balls C shows a case where the general holding change notice is executed. That is, for the operation holding balls A and B, until the holding icon disappears (until the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the operation holding balls A and B ends: corresponding to the operation holding balls A and B shown in the figure) Until the game execution hold K is not displayed), the normal hold color “white” continues to be displayed (see time t4 and time t6: time t3 to t4 and t5 to t6 are fixed display time widths of special symbols) On the other hand, for the operation holding ball C, a production scenario based on the general holding change notice described below is developed, and is changed to “yellow holding” which is a dedicated holding color when the time t4 arrives. It is like that.

(Y-4-1. Production scenario for general hold change notice related to operation hold ball C: Production scenario for general hold change notice at time tc)
Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the present embodiment, the contents of the production scenario of the general hold change notice relating to the operation hold ball C will be described.

  In FIG. 31A, it is determined by lottery that the general hold change notice for the operation hold ball C is executed at the time tc, and as a production scenario, as shown in the drawing, “white hold (when winning a prize) : Tc) → white hold (first shift display: time t2) → yellow hold (second shift display: hold change between times t4 and te) → yellow hold (third shift display (game execution hold K In this example, a production scenario such as “holding display: after time t6)” is created (see steps S103 and S105 in FIG. 20).

  Specifically, with respect to the hold icon of the operation hold ball C, the hold icon is held until the second shift display (between the time tc and t4 until the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the operation hold ball A). In the display portions c1 to b1, the display is continued as “white hold”, the second shift display, that is, the operation hold ball B is digested, and the hold icon shifts to hold from the hold icon of the hold display portion b1. When it is displayed as the hold icon on the display part a1 (after time t4), the hold change by the general hold change notice is executed, and the hold change from the current “white hold” to the special hold color “yellow hold” It is a production scenario that is scheduled to occur. In addition, a special effect for changing the hold is executed between times t4 and te, and the hold icon of the operation hold ball C is changed from “white hold” to “yellow hold”. Thereafter, during the period from time te to t6 until the operation holding ball C is digested, the “yellow hold” after the change continues to be displayed, and the time displayed as the game running hold K from the hold icon of the hold display part a1. After t6 (after the third shift display), the production scenario is such that the “yellow” hold icon is displayed as it is.

(Y-5. About special hold change notice when there is a hold change due to general hold change notice: Fig. 31 (B))
Next, with reference to FIG. 31 (B), a case where a special hold change notice is interposed will be described. In FIG. 31B, when a production scenario for a general hold change notice related to the operation hold ball C is created, the hold icon of the operation hold ball C is changed from “white hold” to “yellow hold”. Before, the case where the disclosure effect by the special hold change notice is executed is shown.

(Y-5-1. Creation of special scenario for special pending change notice at time t2)
In the case of the present embodiment, even in the case where there is a general hold change scheduled target hold (here, the operation hold ball C) in the process of step S601 of the special hold change notice effect setting process of FIG. The special hold change notice is not prohibited, the process proceeds on the assumption that the special hold change notice itself can be executed, and in the processing of the subsequent step S609, whether or not to execute the special hold change notice is determined (a special hold change notice). If a lottery is executed when a special hold change notice is executed, a special hold change notice effect scenario will be created, but a general hold change scheduled hold will be held by a general hold change notice. When a special hold change notice is executed before the change, the following special production scenario is created. An effect scenario relating to the special hold change notice will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

(Y-5-2. New production scenario related to special pending change notice)
The creation of the special reservation change notice effect scenario takes into account the general reservation change notice effect scenario. Specifically, when creating an effect scenario for a special hold change notice, the CPU 241 first confirms the effect scenario for the general hold change notice for the operation holding balls A, B, and C, and includes “ Created a special production scenario in which, when "general hold change schedule target hold" is confirmed, the hold display mode that the general hold change schedule target hold is scheduled to change is derived and displayed as the result of the special hold change notice. To do.

  Specifically, the operation hold ball C is confirmed as the general hold change schedule target hold, and the hold display is scheduled to change when the second shift display (see time t4 to time te in FIG. 31A). In consideration of the fact that the hold display mode is “yellow hold”, the hold icon of “yellow hold” which is the same hold display mode as the planned change when the hold icon of the operation hold ball C is changed by the special hold change notice. It is designed to create a production scenario such as displaying on the screen.

(Y-6. About each hold display mode of operation hold balls A, B, and C at times ts to te when special hold change notice is executed)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31 (B), the hold display transition state of each of the operation hold balls A, B, and C according to the above-described special hold change notice effect scenario will be described.

  In FIG. 31 (B), the secrecy effect by the special hold change notice is started upon arrival of time ts, and thereafter, the fluctuation display of the operation hold ball A is finished and disclosed at time t4 when the hold icon is shifted and displayed. This shows a case where the special hold change notice is ended before the production is executed and the time te arrives. In the drawing, in order to simplify the explanation, the “character appearance effect” and the “action effect” by the special hold change notice are omitted.

  At time ts, the operation hold ball A is “white hold” in the game running hold K, the operation hold ball B is “white hold” in the hold display portion a1, and the operation hold ball C is “white hold” in the hold display portion b1. Is displayed. When the special hold change notice is executed in the hold display state, the hold icons of the operation hold balls A, B, and C are placed in a concealed state at time ts, and each hold icon is displayed at time t4 thereafter. It is disclosed all at once. At this time, the holding display mode of the operation holding balls A, B, and C is as follows.

(Y-6-1. About the hold display mode according to the operation hold ball A)
With respect to the game execution hold K of the operation hold ball A, since the special symbol variation display by the operation hold ball A ends just at the time t4 when the disclosure effect is executed, the game execution hold K is not displayed. Will be disclosed in the state.

(Y-6-2. About the hold display mode concerning the operation hold ball B)
About the hold icon of the action hold ball B (hold icon of the hold display part a1), it is shifted and displayed at time t4, and is disclosed as “white” in the same normal hold color as that before concealment as hold K during game execution (time t4). ), And then continues to be displayed in the “white” on-hold display mode until time t5 when the special symbol variation display related to the operation holding ball B ends.

(Y-6-3. About the hold display mode concerning the operation hold ball C)
About the hold icon of the operation hold ball C (hold icon of the hold display part b1), it shift-displays at time t4 and is disclosed as the hold icon of the hold display part a1, but at this time, from “white hold” before concealment , It is disclosed in a state of being changed to a hold icon of “yellow hold” (time t4). Thereafter, the display is continued in the “yellow” hold display mode until the change display of the special symbol related to the operation hold ball C is ended (from time te to the end of the change display). Therefore, for the hold icon (general hold change schedule target hold) of the operation hold ball C, “yellow hold” that was scheduled to change due to the general hold change notice is derived and displayed as the effect result of this special hold change notice. It will be. In addition, here, the disclosure effect by the special hold change notice is executed at the same timing as the hold change timing by the general hold change notice effect scenario. Thus, it is the same meaning as deriving and displaying the effect of the general hold change notice.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the special hold change notice is interposed before the hold change of the general hold change schedule target hold occurs, the previously determined general hold change notice is canceled. Rather, it is possible to derive and display the effect of the general hold change notice as the effect of the special hold change notice.

  In order to derive and display the effect of the general hold change notice as the result of the special hold change notice, the special hold change notice execution lottery form is as follows. Also good. For example, in the process of step S609, the production scenario of the general hold change notice related to the existing operation hold ball is checked, and when there is a general hold change scheduled target hold, a special hold change notice is always displayed. Configure to run. In this way, the effect of the general hold change notice is not limited by the special hold change notice, and both effects can be used effectively, so the degree of freedom of the effect can be expanded.

(Z. About the case where a new operation hold ball occurs after the execution decision of the special hold change notice is made: FIG. 32)
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the case where a new operation holding ball is generated after the execution decision of the special holding change notice will be described as another case. Specifically, the case where a new operation holding ball is generated after the execution of the special hold change notice is determined is (α) when the special hold change notice is scheduled to be executed. A case where an operation holding ball is generated, (β) a case where a new operation holding ball is generated before or during the concealment effect after the special reservation change notice is started (for example, the twelfth effect example in FIG. 51), etc. In this case, the hold display by the new operation hold ball is affected by the special hold change notice in the execution schedule or in progress. The contents substantially similar to those in FIG. 31 will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid redundant description.

  FIG. 32 (C) shows a case where a new operation holding ball D is generated at time td in the case of FIG. 31 (B). FIG. 32 (C) is a case where the execution of the general hold change notice is decided when the special hold change notice is scheduled to be executed from now on, contrary to the case described in FIG. 31 (B). In the example of FIG. 32 (C), execution of the general hold change notice for the operation hold ball D at time td is determined. As an effect scenario of the general hold change notice at that time, “red hold (during winning) → Example in which a production scenario such as “red hold (during first shift display) → red hold (during second shift display) → red hold (third shift display (hold display of game execution hold K))” is created It is shown.

  In such a case, if the special hold change notice is displayed before the execution or before the concealment effect, if the hold icon of the operation hold ball D is displayed in “red hold”, if no processing is performed, After that, the special hold change notice to be executed is affected, and as shown in the above-described defect example, the hold icon of the operation hold ball D has a hold color (for example, lower than the “red hold”) and the winning expectation is lower. May change to yellow). As a result, the player is given an impression that the winning expectation level has been suddenly lowered, resulting in distrust of the notice effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problems are solved as follows.

  When creating the effect scenario for the general hold change notice, the CPU 241 determines the effect scenario for the general hold change notice as in the normal case, and then checks the presence or absence of the effect scenario for the special hold change notice. If there is an effect scenario of special hold change notice, it is confirmed whether or not it is before the secret effect by special hold change notice. In the case of the start of the concealment effect or the concealment effect (except for the fifteenth effect example (FIG. 53B) for concealing the all-hold display), this is described in the twelfth effect example (see FIG. 51C). As described above, since the hold icon for the operation hold ball D is displayed, the hold icon is displayed as “red hold” when winning.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “general hold change notice prohibition process (generally at the time of hold display) such as displaying the hold icon at the time of winning as a hold icon of“ white hold ”, which is the normal hold color, for the determined production scenario. "Holding change notice prohibition process)" is executed. And about the display mode of the hold icon of the operation hold ball D, the special hold change notice effect scenario is recreated so as to proceed in the form depending on the effect result of the special hold change notice (steps above). (See the processing of S109 to S113). As a result, “white hold” is displayed as the hold icon at the time of winning a prize, and there is no problem even if a special hold change notice (disclosure effect) is subsequently executed. In the present embodiment, there is no hold display mode having a lower winning expectation than white hold, and a special hold change notice (disclosure effect) is subsequently executed, and the player can be changed to any hold display mode. This is because there is no sense of discomfort or distrust.

  However, with respect to the hold display for the operation holding ball D determined to be “red hold” in the general hold change notice, as described in the effect example of FIG. Thus, it is preferable to derive and display the effect of the general hold change notice. Therefore, in such a case, when the hold display is disclosed by the disclosure effect by the special hold change notice, the display mode of the hold icon of the operation hold ball D is determined in the original general hold change notice effect scenario. It is configured to change the effect scenario of the special hold change notice so as to be disclosed in “red hold”. This change process can be executed in the processes of steps S109 to S113.

  In addition, about the new operation hold ball D, the hold change itself by the general hold change notice and the special hold change notice may be prohibited (all hold change prohibiting process). In this case, for the new operation hold ball D, the special hold change notice is finished without any hold change. Even if it does in this way, since other operation hold balls previously held and stored can be changed as a target of special hold change notice, even if a new operation hold ball D is handled as a target of change notice of no change, it is effective. Seems to be no problem. Further, in the case of the fifteenth effect example (FIG. 53B) for concealing the all-hold display, if the secret action is in progress, even if a new operation hold ball D is generated, this is not notified, and a special hold change notice is made. Since the production scenario is advanced, it is considered that there is no particular problem in the production even if the new operation holding ball D is handled as a target of the change notice of reservation. Such an all-hold change prohibition process can contribute to a reduction in the effect control burden in that it is not necessary to perform an effect process related to a hold change notice for a new activated ball.

(16-3. Change target hold lottery processing: FIGS. 22 to 24)
Next, the change target hold lottery process performed in the special hold change notice content lottery process (step S613) will be described. FIGS. 22 to 24 are flowcharts showing details of the change target holding lottery process of FIG. 21 and show different lottery forms.

(16-3-1. First change target hold lottery process: FIG. 22)
First, the “first change target holding lottery process” shown in FIG. 22 will be described. This first change target hold lottery process is a lottery process used when changing any one hold display among a plurality of hold displays (hold icons). For example, the special hold change notice shown in FIG. This corresponds to a special hold change notice such as changing only one hold display as in the first effect example.

  In FIG. 22, the CPU 241 first initializes all the hold flags to OFF (step S621). Here, the “hold flag” designates a hold display (hold icon) as a hold change target in the special hold change notice, and when changing the hold display mode, the operation hold as the change target is designated. The hold flag corresponding to the ball or the game running hold is turned on, and when the hold display mode is not changed, the hold flag is turned off. As a result, the hold display to be changed is specified in the special hold change notice this time, and in the change display mode lottery process (FIG. 25) described later, what type of hold display the hold display is in the disclosure state It has come to decide whether to change.

  Next, hold identification information (change lottery target hold) that specifies which hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 (hold icons) are to be changed lottery is set (step S623). Here, the corresponding change lottery target hold is set based on a predetermined priority (lottery order). As the lottery order, for example, when the lottery is sequentially drawn from the oldest operation hold ball, when the special display 1 hold display is lottery as the change lottery target hold, “game execution hold K (when game execution hold K exists”) ), Hold display part a1 (highest priority), b1, c1, and d1 (last) ”are drawn in the order of“ Special game 2 ”,“ Game execution hold K (when game execution hold K exists) ”, hold Lottery is performed in the order of “display part a2 (highest priority), b2, c2, and d2 (last)”. In addition, when it is desired that only the on-hold display on the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side be targeted with respect to the on-hold game, the on-game hold is on the special figure 1 side or on the special figure 2 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that determination can be made. Further, when the hold during game execution is not set as the target hold for the special hold change notice, the hold display of the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 excluding the hold during game execution can be set as the change lottery target hold. good.

  As described above, when the hold display to be changed is determined by lottery in order from the oldest one in the hold storage, the change in hold is generated for the hold display with the earlier digestion order. be able to. That is, it is possible to promptly notify the special game information related to the operation holding ball with the earlier digestion order.

  Next, “change lottery” is executed to determine whether or not to change the hold display of the change lottery target hold (change lottery process: step S625). This change lottery uses a hold change execution lottery table (FIG. 70), and is based on change pattern information (prefetch change pattern information and change pattern information at the start of change) related to a change lottery target hold and a dedicated production random number. Executed.

(Pending change execution lottery table: FIG. 70)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a pending change execution lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in the drawing, the lottery probability for determining whether or not to change the hold display mode is defined in the hold change execution lottery table in association with the variation pattern information. In the case of the present embodiment, with respect to the lottery probability, the higher the winning expectation type, the higher the possibility that the hold display will change. Is set higher for the big hit. In this respect, the same tendency as the special change notice execution lottery table of FIG. 69 is given. Therefore, when a change in hold occurs, the expectation of winning a big hit with a relatively high profit state is increased, and a sense of confidence in the special hold change notice is maintained.

  Next, the lottery result of the change lottery is confirmed (step S627). When it is determined that the lottery result wins the change lottery, that is, the hold display of the current change lottery target hold is changed (step S627: YES), the hold flag corresponding to the hold is set ON (step S629). . As a result, the hold display (hold icon) related to the operation hold ball or the game execution hold K that is the target for change of hold is specified. Then, the process leaves the change target hold lottery process and returns to the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21). In addition, the holding display (holding display part a1-d1, a2-d2 (holding icon)) concerning the operation holding ball or the game execution holding K that is a change target for holding is referred to as “change target holding”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not won in the change lottery, that is, the change lottery target hold display this time is not changed (step S627: NO), then whether or not there is a change lottery target hold. Confirmation is made (step S631).

  When there is a change lottery target hold (step S633: YES), the process returns to the process of step S623, and thereafter, a hold display as a hold change target is determined, or a change lottery for all hold displays ends. Until then, the processes of steps S623 to S633 are repeated.

  However, when there is no next change lottery target hold (step S633: NO), that is, when the change lottery for all the hold indications is finished, the change target hold lottery process is exited and the special hold change notice is made. Returning to the effect setting process (FIG. 21). In this case, no hold change occurs in the hold display, and a “gase effect” in which no hold display changes due to the disclosure effect is derived as an effect result of the current special hold change notice.

  As described above, in the first change target hold lottery process, when a lottery result of changing any one of the hold display modes is obtained, the special flag is set after turning on the hold flag corresponding to the hold display. The process returns to the hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21). On the other hand, when a lottery result indicating that all the displayed hold display modes are not changed is obtained, the first change target hold lottery process is exited while all the hold flags are kept OFF, and the special hold change is performed. The process returns to the notice effect setting process (FIG. 21).

  As described above, the first change target hold lottery process in FIG. 22 is a change target corresponding to a special hold change notice such as permitting change of any one hold display when a plurality of hold displays are displayed. An example of a pending lottery is shown. For example, the first change target reservation lottery process is applied to the “first example of special reservation change notice” shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the case where a plurality of hold displays are displayed as in the “second effect example of special hold change notice” shown in FIG. The first change target hold lottery process is not applied, and the “second change target hold lottery process” of FIG. 23 described below is applied.

(16-3-2. Second change target holding lottery process: FIG. 23)
Next, another embodiment of the change target hold lottery process performed during the special hold change notice content lottery process (step S613) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of “second change target holding lottery process” which is another form of FIG. 21.

  The “second change target hold lottery process” shown in FIG. 23 is a lottery process used when allowing a change in all or part of the hold display among a plurality of hold displays (hold icon). For example, it corresponds to a special hold change notice such as changing a plurality of hold displays as in the second effect example of the special hold change notice shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the second change target holding lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, about the process similar to the said 1st change object holding | maintenance lottery process of FIG. 22, in order to avoid duplication description, it demonstrates, omitting suitably. Moreover, the same step number is attached | subjected about the process substantially the same as the said 1st change object holding | maintenance lottery process.

  In FIG. 23, the CPU 241 first initializes all the hold flags to OFF (step S621).

  Next, based on the lottery order, hold information (change lottery target hold) that is the subject of the current change lottery is set (step S623).

  Next, “change lottery” for determining whether or not to change the change lottery target hold is executed (target hold lottery process: step S625). This change lottery is performed based on the hold change execution lottery table (FIG. 70) in the same manner as the first change target hold lottery process.

  Next, the lottery result of the change lottery is confirmed (step S627). When changing the hold display of the change lottery target hold (the lottery result is winning) (step S627: YES), the hold flag corresponding to the hold is set to ON (step S629), and the process proceeds to step S631. When the hold display of the change lottery target hold is not changed (the lottery result is not won) (step S627: NO), the process proceeds to step S631 without doing anything.

  When the process proceeds to step S631, to check for change-selectable pending (step S631).

  When there is a change lottery target hold (step S633: YES), the process returns to step S623, and thereafter, the processes of steps S623 to S633 are repeated until the change lottery for all hold displays is completed.

  As described above, in the second change target hold lottery process, for all hold displays, after executing the change lottery to determine whether or not to change the display mode (set the hold flag for each hold display to ON) Or after maintaining OFF), the process exits the second change target hold lottery process and returns to the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21).

  As described above, the “second change target hold lottery process” shown in FIG. 23 allows a change in the hold display of all or a part of these hold displays when a plurality of hold displays are displayed. An example of a change target hold lottery corresponding to a special hold change notice is shown. For example, the second change target hold lottery process is applied to the “second example of special hold change notice” shown in FIG.

(About selection of change target hold based on predetermined lottery order)
In addition, about the change lottery (step S625) of FIG.22 and FIG.23 mentioned above, although the hold display (change object hold | maintenance) to change was demonstrated preferentially lottery from the old thing of hold memory, The invention is not limited to this, and a change lottery form as described below can be adopted.

  (H-1) You may comprise so that a change lottery (step S625) may be performed in an order from the hold display (latest hold display) with the slowest hold digest order. If it does in this way, possibility that a pending | holding display with a later digestion order will be determined as a change object pending | holding will become high. For example, when the latest hold display is selected as the change hold and this changes to a dedicated hold color, the player's winning expectation can be given for a longer time than when the other hold display changes.

  (H-2) Moreover, you may determine the lottery order | rank according to a winning-winning expectation degree. For example, as in the first production example shown in FIG. 37, when any one of the plurality of hold displays (hold icon) is changed, the hold display with the highest expected winning expectation among the hold displays. Is preferably determined as the change target hold. In this case, it is possible to determine a hold display having a high win-winning expectation degree as the change target hold without using the change lottery (see, for example, a third change target hold lottery process in FIG. 24 described later). Also, as in the second effect example shown in FIG. 38, when a plurality of hold display changes are allowed, a change lottery may be executed in the order of relatively high winning expectation degree among the hold displays. it can. In addition, when the winning expectation degrees related to a plurality of hold displays are all the same, for example, a change lottery is executed by selecting the hold storage order, the execution order of the symbol variation display game, or randomly, and any of the hold displays May be determined as to whether or not to make a change target hold.

  (H-3) When there is a hold display having hit variation pattern information, the hold display can be preferentially determined as a change target hold. In this case, the variation pattern information related to each hold display is searched, and if there is a hold display having the hit variation pattern information, it can be determined as a change target hold without using the change lottery (for example, described later) (Refer the 3rd change object holding | maintenance lottery process of FIG. 24). Note that there are rare cases where there are a plurality of hit variation patterns. In such a case, it is possible to select one based on the winning type information. For example, in order to improve the reliability with respect to the special hold change notice effect, the hold display having a hit type with a relatively high profit state can be preferentially determined as the change target hold. Note that even a hold display having a hit variation pattern may exclude a hold display related to a small hit or a 2R short open latent big hit. These are hits where you can hardly get the ball, especially the small hits are not the hits that the player actively welcomes compared to other big hits in that the game state is not controlled. This is because there is little need to make a pending change.

  (H-4) Further, when selecting the change target hold, an upper limit number of the change target hold number can be provided, and the change target hold can be determined within the range of the upper limit number. By providing an upper limit number for the hold display to be changed, the special hold change notice can be sharpened. In particular, when an upper limit number is provided, it is preferable to execute the change lottery so that a hold display with a relatively high winning expectation degree is preferentially determined as a change target hold. For example, when the upper limit number is set to 2 and there are four pending displays whose fluctuation pattern information has “strong reach, medium reach, N reach, normal fluctuation (losing)”, the top two “strong reach, “Middle reach” is determined as the change target hold (see, for example, a third change target hold lottery process in FIG. 24 described later). In this case, since the hold display mode having a relatively high expectation of winning win can change preferentially, the reliability with respect to the special hold change notice can be improved.

(16-3-3. Third change target holding lottery process: FIG. 24)
Next, another embodiment of the change target hold lottery process performed during the special hold change notice content lottery process (step S613) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing details of “third change target holding lottery process” which is another form of FIG. 21.

  The “third change target hold lottery process” shown in FIG. 24 is a lottery mode used when determining a specific change target hold related to the variation pattern information without using the change lottery. In addition, about the process content similar to the said 1st or 2nd change object reservation lottery process, in order to avoid duplication description, it abbreviate | omits suitably and demonstrates.

  In FIG. 24, the CPU 241 first initializes all the hold flags to OFF (step S621). Next, in order to determine which hold display is to be subjected to the hold change, the fluctuation pattern information related to each hold display is acquired (step S622).

  Next, based on the obtained variation pattern information, search (search) for a hold display (priority change target hold) to be preferentially changed (priority change target hold search processing: step S624), and there is a priority change target hold. In this case (step S626: YES), this is determined as the change target hold, and the hold flag corresponding to the hold display determined as the change target hold is set to ON (change target hold determination process: step S628). In steps S624 to S628, as described in (H-2) to (H-4) above, for example, among the hold displays, the hold display having the highest winning expectation is determined as the change target hold. (See (H-2) above). If there is a hold display having hit variation pattern information among each hold display, this is determined as a change target hold (see (H-3) above). Of these, the top two hold indications with the highest expectation of winning are determined as change target hold (see (H-4) above), and the change target hold is determined based on a predetermined priority order. It is processing to do.

  However, if there is no hold display corresponding to the priority change target hold (step S626: NO), it is determined that there is no current change target hold, and the third change target hold lottery process is performed without doing anything. The process returns to the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21). In addition, when there is no hold display corresponding to the priority change target hold, the change target hold is determined by performing the change lottery for each hold display in the same manner as the first or second change target hold lottery process. You may do it.

  As described above, in the third change target hold lottery process, the hold display (priority change target hold) to be changed with priority is searched, and the hold display (change target is changed according to the current special hold change notice). Hold) is decided. Thereby, since change object hold can be determined without going through lottery processing like change lottery (Step S625), production control processing burden can be reduced.

(16-3-1. Start timing setting process: not shown)
Next, start timing setting processing (not shown) will be described. In the “start timing setting process”, the start timing of the special hold change notice is determined. As described above, as described above, for example, at the start of execution of the symbol variation display game (decoration symbol variation display game), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the ornament symbol variation display game, After a predetermined time elapses), during a reach title, during reach production, during a temporary stop state, etc., the start timing may be determined by lottery. In addition, when determining the start timing, the start / end timing and variation time of the currently running symbol variation display game, the start timing / end timing and variation time of the next symbol variation display game, and the next operation hold Appropriate timing may be determined by checking / considering whether or not the ball is a hit (whether or not there is a possibility of reaching a hit game when a special hold change notice is executed). The contents of the start timing setting process are the same in the start timing setting process related to the button gimmick linked notice.

(16-4. Change display mode lottery process: FIG. 25)
Next, the change display mode lottery performed during the special hold change notice content lottery process (step S613) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing details of the change display mode lottery process of FIG.

  25, the CPU 241 first confirms the hold flag ON hold display, specifically, the change target hold determined in FIGS. 22 to 24, and sets it as the target hold of the current change display mode lottery (step S641). If there are a plurality of change target holds, the processes of steps S641 to S648 are performed for all the change target holds (step S648 described later: NO).

  Next, the variation pattern information related to the set change target hold (the current change display mode lottery target hold) is acquired, and the content is confirmed (step S642).

  Next, the current display mode level of the change target hold is confirmed (step S643). This “display mode level” is a stepwise representation of the expected winning degree corresponding to the hold display mode. For example, when the winning winning expectation degree corresponding to the hold display mode is expressed in 8 stages, the winning winning expectation level is set as “first stage (lowest expected winning degree) <second stage <3” Stage <4th stage <5th stage <6th stage <7th stage <8th stage (highest expectation of winning) ”.

  Next, the “display mode level change lottery table” shown in FIG. 71 is acquired (step S644), and the display mode level change lottery process is performed (step S645). In this display mode level change lottery process, with reference to the display mode level change lottery table, with respect to the display mode level that is subject to change, a lottery is performed as to what stage display mode level is changed from the current display mode level. .

(Display mode level change lottery table: FIG. 71)
FIG. 71 shows a display mode level change lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 71 shows an example of a lottery table (the lottery table for the first step) in which the current display mode level corresponds to the first step.

  In the “display mode level change lottery table”, as shown in the figure, for each variation pattern information (variation pattern type), the current display mode level is set to which display mode level (display mode level after change). The lottery probability of whether to do is specified. For example, when the fluctuation pattern information is “strong reach at big hit”, the lottery probability of “display mode level after change” is “5% (second stage)”, “10% (3) in order from the first stage. Stage 15), 15% (4th stage), 20% (5th stage), 25% (6th stage), 15% (7th stage), 10% (8th stage) Stage)). As a result, when the current display mode level is the first level, it is determined by lottery which display mode level from the second level to the highest eight level is changed (step-up). Yes. Therefore, in this example, when the current display mode level is the first level, the second level or higher is always selected. That is, if the change target hold is the “normal hold display mode”, the hold change always occurs. It is a lottery table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery table may be configured such that the first stage is selected with a predetermined probability, and even if the change target is on hold, the hold change is not necessarily caused.

  Note that the display mode level change lottery table is not limited to the “first stage lottery table” shown in FIG. 71, but actually a plurality of types of display mode levels corresponding to each of the second to seventh display mode levels. A change lottery table is included. For example, when the current display mode level has already been changed to the fourth stage (for example, when the display mode level has already changed to the fourth stage due to the general hold notice effect or the previous special hold change notice) The display mode level change lottery table corresponding to the fourth stage (fourth stage lottery table) is used. In the lottery table for the fourth stage, for example, “30% (fourth stage: current level maintenance)”, “20% (fifth stage)”, “25% (sixth stage)”, “15% The lottery probability is defined so that it can be changed up to a stage higher than the current display mode level, such as “(7th stage)” and “10% (8th stage)”. If the current display mode level is already at the highest level, there is no need to make a pending change, so the display mode level change lottery in step S644 or step S645 is not executed, and the processing in the next step S646 is performed. To do.

(Restriction of display mode level)
However, in the present embodiment, there is a limit on the display mode level that can be changed according to the variation pattern type. For example, “special reach” for 2R and small hits is up to the 5th stage, “strong reach when lost” is up to the 7th stage, “reach medium when lost” is up to the 5th stage, “weak when lost” “Reach” is limited to the 4th stage, and “No reach when lost” is limited to the 2nd stage. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the display mode level after change according to the variation pattern type, the winning winning expectation degree suggested by the hold display mode and the hit suggested by the notice effect during the decorative symbol variation display game It can be prevented that the expected degree of winning is greatly deviated. As a result, the reliability of the special hold change notice can be improved without giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust with the special hold change notice.

  Also, in this embodiment, for “medium reach at the time of big hit” and “weak reach at the time of big hit”, the lottery probability is specified up to the eighth stage of the highest stage, whereas “medium reach at the time of loss” Is limited to the 5th level, and “weak reach when losing” is limited to the 4th level. Therefore, for example, the hold display related to a certain operation hold ball has been changed to a hold display mode (see FIG. 72B described later) corresponding to the display mode level in the fifth stage by the special hold change notice. Later, in the decorative symbol variation display game corresponding to the operation holding ball, if a weak reach appears, a reach effect that cannot occur at the time of losing has occurred, so it is correct (big win winning decision) Will be notified.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 25, when the display mode level is determined by the processing of step S645, the hold display mode displayed when the disclosure effect is executed is determined by lottery (holding display mode lottery process during disclosure). : Step S646). Here, based on the display mode type selection table of FIG. 72 (A) and the disclosure hold display mode determination table of FIG. 72 (B), the hold display mode (hereinafter, “disclosure” displayed when the disclosure effect is executed). (Referred to as “hold display mode at time”).

  In the present embodiment, first, referring to the display mode type selection table, a display mode type (basic display mode type) serving as a base for determining the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is determined ( Next, referring to the disclosure hold display mode determination table, the display mode level determined in the process of step S645 is selected from among the multiple types of hold display modes at the time of disclosure belonging to the basic display mode type. A corresponding display mode is determined (second layer processing).

  However, the “hold display mode at the time of disclosure” refers to a hold display mode that is finally displayed as an effect result of the special hold change notice. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of concealment effects and disclosure effects are repeated during one special hold change notice as in the seventh effect example (see FIGS. 44 to 45), the final disclosure effect is performed. The hold display mode disclosed and displayed in is designated. Note that the hold display mode displayed in the middle of the disclosure effect is set in a later stage process (see S692 in FIG. 29 described later).

(Display mode type selection table: FIG. 72 (A))
FIG. 72 (A) shows a display mode type selection table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  In the “display mode type selection table”, as shown in FIG. 72A, a plurality of basic display mode types (for example, display color (holding color) are selected according to the display mode level (2 to 8 levels). ), Character information (character information display is specified), and item (item image such as a picture is specified)) are determined. For example, when the display mode level is the second stage, “display color” is selected as the basic display mode type at 100%, and when it is the third stage, “display color” and “character information” are displayed. Each is selected at 50%, and in the fourth stage, “display color” is selected with a probability of 60%, “character information” is selected with 30%, and “item” is selected with a probability of 10%. Note that character information and items are not selected when the display mode level is relatively low (see, for example, the second and third columns).

(Disclosure pending display mode determination table: FIG. 72 (B))
FIG. 72B shows a disclosure hold display mode determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  In the “disclosure pending display mode determination table”, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), a plurality of types of pending display modes at the time of disclosure belonging to the basic display mode type are defined corresponding to the display mode level. . For example, when the basic display mode type is “display color (hold color)” and the display mode level is “third stage”, the hold color of the hold icon in the hold display portion is changed to “blue”. Is determined. As a result, it is possible to present a hold display mode at the time of disclosure that is closely related to the expected winning degree. FIG. 72 shows an example of the hold display mode at the time of disclosure, and what type of hold display mode is used can be appropriately determined.

  In the case of this embodiment, the display mode at the time of disclosure is determined based on the change pattern information of the change target hold, and the display mode level is determined according to the determined display mode level. The present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the display mode level of the change target hold, any one of a plurality of types of hold display modes at the time of disclosure that are directly associated with the variation pattern information may be drawn. For example, the variation pattern type with a relatively high winning expectation degree increases the probability that the lottery probability will be selected in the order of “display color <character information <item”, and the variation pattern type with a relatively high win expectation degree. , Among the hold display modes belonging to the basic display mode type shown in FIG. 72B, it is possible to increase the probability that a display mode with a high display mode level is selected. Further, in the case of a variation pattern type (for example, normal variation without reach, weak reach, etc.) with a relatively low expectation of winning winning, a specific basic display mode type (for example, item) may not be selected. . In the case of a variation pattern type (for example, normal variation without reach, weak reach, etc.) with a relatively low expectation of winning winning, a specific display mode (greater than or equal to a large chance) belonging to a specific basic display mode type (for example, character information) (Character information) may not be selected. In this way, it is possible to give the player a guessing element for the expected winning degree according to what basic display mode type is selected in relation to the hold display mode at the time of disclosure.

  Regarding the hold display mode at the time of disclosure, if the change pattern type of the change target hold is a reach change pattern, the type of reach effect is attached to the hold display mode at the time of disclosure or the hold display mode at the time of disclosure itself It may be configured to be able to notify (suggest) using Similarly, in the case of a fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream, there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream will occur in association with the on-hold display mode at the time of disclosure or by using the on-hold display mode at the time of disclosure. You may comprise so that an effect (indication) is possible. Also, as in the sixth effect example (FIG. 43), only a specific basic display mode type, for example, only “numeric display” of character information system (not shown) may be selected. The winning winning expectation degree may be configured to be notified by “numerical value display”.

  Moreover, regarding the hold display mode at the time of disclosure, a special hold display mode related to the game state (the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) or the internal game state) may be selectable. In this case, it is possible to notify the game pattern information related to the change pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the internal game status. For example, under the “secret performance mode” in which the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal gaming state) is concealed, depending on whether the internal gaming state is a high probability (latency) state or a low probability state, For example, in the case of a high probability (latency) state, it can be changed to a specific character or a specific item image with a higher probability than in a low probability state. Thereby, the game information regarding the internal game state can be provided. In addition, as one of the display modes, an image (moving image) reduced in the hold display unit may be displayed instead of the icon image. For example, it is executed during a decoration symbol variation display game scheduled to be executed. The reach effect may be displayed as a digest, so that the contents of the reach effect can be recognized in advance.

  Next, when the lottery process in step S646 is finished, the effect data (hereinafter referred to as “hold display mode effect data”) related to the hold display mode (hold display mode at the time of disclosure) corresponding to the lottery result is set (step S647). Then, the presence or absence of another change target hold is confirmed, and if there is a change target hold, the processing of steps S641 to S648 is performed as the target hold for the next change display mode lottery, and if there is no change target hold (step S648: YES), the process exits the change display mode lottery process and returns to the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21).

(16-5. Character effect mode lottery processing: FIG. 26)
Next, the character effect mode lottery process performed in the special reservation change notice content lottery process (step S613) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing details of the character effect mode lottery process of FIG. In this character effect mode lottery process, the character (action effect character) type (for example, Terteru Shabu character L and cannon M, wizard character L2 and magic wand M2, etc.) that should appear in the character appearance effect are mainly applicable. (For example, see FIG. 37, FIG. 46 to FIG. 47)) is determined by lottery.

  In FIG. 26, the CPU 241 first obtains change pattern information of change target suspension (step S651). In addition, when there are a plurality of change target holds, the change pattern information with the highest winning expectation degree is selected.

  Next, the appearance character lottery table is acquired (step S652), and the character lottery is performed based on the variation pattern information (appearance character lottery process: step S653).

(Appearing character lottery table: FIG. 73)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a appearing character lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  In the “appearing character lottery table”, as shown in the figure, lottery probabilities for a plurality of types of characters are defined according to the variation pattern type. In the illustrated example, four types of action effect characters (characters A to C and a premium character (selected only at big hit)) can be selected, and the winning expectation degree for the character is “character A (cannon M Character L (characters shooting in a tank) <character B (characters shooting in a tank) <character C (characters that release magic with a magic wand) <premium character (characters on a UFO) A lottery probability is determined according to the pattern type. In this way, by configuring the character associated with the winning prediction expectation level so as to appear, it is possible to give a guessing element of the winning winning expectation level to the player. In addition, for a big hit, a premium character may be selected as a character, whereas for a lost game, 2R or a small hit is not selected. As a result, the premium character can be positioned as a special character associated with the jackpot, and the variation of production can be made rich.

  If there are a plurality of change target holds, the change pattern information having the highest winning expectation degree is selected (step S651) and used for the character lottery. As a result, a character closely related to the expected winning degree can be displayed. Moreover, even if the hold display mode does not change (when the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is the same as the current state before concealment), the expected winning degree can be indirectly suggested by the displayed character. .

  Although not shown, an action effect character corresponding to the gaming state or special symbol type may be displayed. During a special background effect or game mode, a corresponding special character may appear, thereby further enhancing the effect.

  Next, when the appearance character lottery process in step S653 is completed, the effect data (character effect data) for the appearance character corresponding to the lottery result is set (step S654). As a result, the character effect mode lottery process is exited and the process returns to the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21).

(Modified example of appearance character lottery process)
In the appearance character lottery process in step S653, the form of performing the character lottery based on the variation pattern information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following lottery form may be used.

  For example, based on the “holding display mode at the time of disclosure (holding display mode effect data)” determined in the on-disclosure holding display mode lottery process in step S646, it is possible to select one of a plurality of types of characters. . The plurality of types of characters are defined in association with the hold display mode at the time of disclosure. For example, a hold color (for example, white, blue, yellow, etc.) that has a relatively low winning expectation level for the hold display mode at the time of disclosure. Is set to a lottery probability such that “Character A” having a low winning expectation degree is easily selected for the character (for example, the selection rate is “Character A> Character B> Character C”). On the other hand, in the case of a red reserved color (for example, green, red, iridescent color, etc.) with a relatively high win-winning expectation of the hold display mode at the time of disclosure, “Character C” with a high win-winning expectation for a character It is preferable to set a lottery probability that makes it easy to select (for example, a selection rate of “character A <character B <character C”). In addition, when the winning winning expectation degree of the holding display mode at the time of disclosure is a relatively low holding color (for example, blue), it is possible to select only the character A or the character B having a low winning winning expectation degree. it can.

  Thus, in this modification, since the character according to the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is selected, the content of the expected degree of notification is different from the case of selecting the character according to the variation pattern information. Meaningful. That is, in the lottery form based on the variation pattern information, the winning expectation degree is directly suggested by the appearing character, but in the lottery form based on the hold display mode at the time of disclosure, the character appearing Rather, whether the hold display mode is a high expectation hold display mode or not is suggested.

(16-6. Action effect mode lottery processing: FIG. 27)
Next, the action effect mode lottery process performed in the special hold change notice content lottery process (step S613) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the action effect mode lottery process of FIG. In the action effect mode lottery process, the action effect type by the character (for example, the action effect in which the character L fires the bullet N from the cannon M or the action effect in which the magic character L2 releases the flame bullet N2 from the magic wand). The type of the projectile (N, N2) is determined (for example, see the fourth effect example in FIG. 41 (FIG. 41C), FIG. 42C), and the secret effect and the disclosure effect are repeated many times. This is a process of determining whether to execute (see the seventh effect example in FIGS. 44 to 45).

  In FIG. 27, the CPU 241 first confirms the change pattern information of the change target hold (step S661). In addition, when there are a plurality of change target holds, the change pattern information with the highest winning expectation degree is selected.

  Next, a concealment and disclosure effect execution frequency lottery table (FIG. 74) is acquired (step S662), and the concealment and disclosure effect execution frequency (hereinafter referred to as “number of actions”) is determined by lottery based on the variation pattern information. (Action number lottery process: Step S663).

(Concealment and re-disclosure number lottery table: FIG. 74)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a concealment and re-disclosure frequency lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  In the “Concealment and re-disclosure number lottery table”, as shown in the figure, a lottery probability for each number of actions is defined according to the variation pattern type. In the illustrated example, the maximum number of actions can be selected up to four times, and the lottery probability is defined such that the higher the number of actions, the higher the winning expectation degree. In the case of the normal variation pattern at the time of loss, the number of actions 3 to 4 is not selected for 2R or small hits.

  Next, when the action number lottery process in step S663 is completed, the number of actions for specifying the number of actions to be executed is set based on the lottery result, and “1” is set as the number of lottery target actions (step S664). This lottery target action count is a counter used for executing the processing of subsequent steps S665 to S669 by the number of times of action, and this time is the first action when the processing of step S664 is executed first. “1” is set to specify this.

  Next, an action effect mode lottery table is acquired (step S665), and an action effect mode lottery is performed based on the variation pattern information (action effect mode lottery process: step S666).

(Action effect mode lottery table: FIG. 75)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an action effect mode table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in the figure, the “action effect mode lottery table” defines lottery probabilities for a plurality of types of action effect modes according to the variation pattern type. In the example shown in the figure, four types of action presentation modes (actions A to C and premium action (selected only at the time of a big hit)) can be selected, and the expected winning degree for the action presentation is “action A <action B < The lottery probability according to the variation pattern type is determined so that the relationship of action C <premium action ”is established. In this way, by making it possible to present an action effect associated with the winning expectation degree, it is possible to give a guessing element of the expected winning degree to the player. In addition, for a big hit, a premium action may be selected as an action effect, whereas for a loss, a 2R hit or a small hit is not selected. As a result, the premium action can be positioned as a special character associated with the jackpot, and the variation of the production can be made rich.

  Although not shown, the action effect mode table includes a plurality of characters corresponding to “character effect data (characters A to C, premium characters)” set in step S653 in the character effect mode lottery process of FIG. A type of action effect mode table is included, and one of the action effect modes is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of action effect modes according to the character effect data.

  As an example of the above actions A to C and premium actions, for example, if the character production data is character production data designating “teruteru shabu character L + cannon M”, action A is “one cannonball from cannon M” (Normal white color) 'fired' production content, action B is 'cannon M' special shell (for example, normal color green) 'production content, action C is' cannon M from , A series of shells in which normal and special shells (except for rainbow-colored shells reminiscent of winning selection) are continuously fired. “The shells including the rainbow-colored shells are fired”.

  If there are a plurality of change target holds, the change pattern information having the highest winning expectation degree is selected (step S661), and used for the action effect mode lottery. As a result, an action effect closely related to the expected winning degree can be displayed. Even if the hold display mode does not change (when the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is the same as the current state before concealment), the winning expectation can be indirectly suggested by the action effect mode.

(Modification of action effect mode lottery process)
In the action effect mode lottery process in step S666, the form of performing the lottery based on the variation pattern information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is described in the above-described “variation example of the appearing character lottery process”. Similarly, a lottery form based on “hold display mode at the time of disclosure (hold display mode effect data)” can be adopted.

  For example, based on the hold display mode at the time of disclosure, any one of a plurality of types of action effects can be selected. A plurality of types of action effects are defined in association with the hold display mode at the time of disclosure. For example, when the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is a hold color (for example, blue) with a low expectation of winning, the action effect Is set to a lottery probability that “Action A” having a low winning expectation degree is easily selected (for example, the selection rate is a relation of “Action A> Action B> Action C”). When the red winning color has a relatively high expectation level for winning the winning action, “action C” having a high expectation degree for winning the action effect is also set to a lottery probability (for example, the selection rate is set to “action” A <action B <action C ”). In addition, when the winning winning expectation degree of the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is a relatively low holding color (for example, blue), it is possible to select only action A or action B having a low winning winning expectation degree. it can.

  As described above, in this modification, an action effect according to the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is selected, and therefore, when selecting an action effect according to variation pattern information, the content of the expected degree to be notified Have different meanings. That is, in the lottery form based on the variation pattern information, the winning expectation degree is directly suggested by the action effect, but in the lottery form based on the hold display mode at the time of disclosure, the hold at the time of disclosure by the action effect. Rather, whether the display mode is a high expectation hold display mode or not is suggested rather than a hold change expectation.

  Further, the action effect mode may be selected in consideration of the hold display mode (hold display mode effect data) and the character (character effect data) at the time of disclosure determined in the previous lottery process. For example, when a premium hold display (present reservation display mode) and / or a premium character has already been selected, a premium action can be selected with a high probability (including 100%). As a result, a lot of premium effects appear, and the effects can be enlivened. In addition, a sense of unity can be demonstrated.

  When the action effect mode lottery process in step S666 is finished, action effect effect data (action effect data) corresponding to the lottery result is set (step S667). Here, since it is described that this is the first action, the action effect data set here is set as the effect content corresponding to the first action effect. When there are a plurality of actions, the action presentation mode is determined each time and action presentation data corresponding to the number of actions is set.

  Next, 1 is added to the number of lottery target actions (step S668). Then, the number of lottery target actions after the addition is compared with the number of actions set in the process of step S664. When the number of lottery target actions after the addition is greater than the number of actions (step S669: YES), it is determined that the lottery process for the number of actions has been completed (steps S666 to S668), and the action effect mode lottery process is exited. Then, the process returns to the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21). However, when the number of lottery target actions after the addition is smaller than the number of actions (step S669: NO), the lottery process for the number of actions has not been completed yet, the process returns to step S665, and the processes of steps S665 to S668 are performed. Execute.

(16-7. Concealment effect mode lottery process: FIG. 28)
Next, the concealment effect mode lottery process performed in the special reservation change notice content lottery process (step S613) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the concealment effect mode lottery process of FIG. In this concealment effect mode lottery process, an explosive effect (concealment effect) mode (for example, an explosion effect due to the explosion R according to the number of actions, a display color of the explosion R, an additional effect type (a lightning effect (FIG. 41 (D))), directivity This is a process for determining a natural lightning strike effect (FIG. 45 (J)), a button notice effect (FIG. 48 (E)) and the like.

  In FIG. 28, the CPU 241 first performs a secret area setting process (step S671). In this secret area setting process, a secret area for concealing the hold display by the secret effect is set. However, for example, when a specific production mode or a specific background production is in progress, the hold display area or the hold display unit (hold icon) is displayed at a different position from the normal position, or a specific reach effect is executed. In some cases, the hold display area is temporarily retracted and displayed at a position different from the original position. Also, in this special hold change notice, depending on whether the hold display to be concealed is the special symbol 1 side, the special symbol 2 side, or both, and the number of hold indications (number of active hold balls) The secret areas for concealing the hold display are different. Here, in consideration of these circumstances, the concealed area to be concealed is determined, and the effect data for the concealed area is set according to the determination result.

  Next, the “number of actions” set in the process of step S664 is acquired (step S672). Here, the acquired action count is set, and “1” is set as the lottery target action count. This lottery target action count is for executing a secret rendering process (steps S674 to S679 described later) corresponding to the number of actions, as in the process of step S664 (action effect mode lottery process in FIG. 27). First, when executing the process of step S672, “1” is set to specify that this time is the first action.

  Next, on the basis of the concealment effect mode lottery table (FIG. 76), the concealment effect mode lottery process (step S674) for drawing the display color type of the explosion smoke R (see FIG. 41D), the button effect execution lottery table (FIG. 77). Based on the button effect execution lottery process (step S675) for drawing whether or not the button notice effect (see FIG. 48E) can be executed, and the additional effect execution lottery table (FIG. 78), the additional effect (for example, the lightning effect ( 41 (D)), directed lightning effect: see FIG. 44 (J))), an additional effect execution lottery process (step S678) is executed.

(Concealment production mode lottery table: FIG. 76)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a concealment effect mode table according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the concealment effect mode table, as shown in the figure, lottery probabilities for display colors of a plurality of types of explosion smoke R are defined according to the variation pattern type. In the example shown in the figure, display colors of four types of explosion smoke R (white, red, green, rainbow colors (selected only for big hits)) can be selected, and the winning expectation is “white <red <green <rainbow. The lottery probability corresponding to the variation pattern type is determined so as to have the relationship of “color”. As described above, by configuring the explosion smoke R associated with the winning expectation degree so as to appear, it is possible to give a guessing element of the winning expectation degree to the player. In addition, for the big hit time, the rainbow-colored smoke R may be selected, but not for the lost time, 2R time or the small hit time. Thereby, the rainbow-colored explosion R can be positioned as the special explosion R associated with the jackpot, and the variation of the production can be made rich.

  In the example shown in the figure, the display colors of a plurality of types of explosion smoke R are determined. However, in addition to the display colors, the shape and pattern of the explosion smoke R may be different. For example, in addition to the normal explosion R, a plurality of types of concealment images may be provided so that any one of the images can be selected according to the variation pattern information. For example, the explosion image R is a normal image for concealment, and as the concealment image having a higher expected win rate than that, for example, one or more types of concealment images such as flames, icebergs, aurora, and black holes are provided. The selection rate can be determined so that the winning-winning expectation is higher in the order of flame, iceberg, aurora, and black hole (premium image).

  Further, the image for concealment is selected in consideration of the hold display mode (hold display mode effect data), character (character effect data), action mode (action effect data), etc., determined at the time of the previous lottery process. You may comprise as follows. For example, when a premium hold display (present reserved display mode), a premium character, a premium action, or the like has already been selected, the concealment image can be selected with high probability (including 100%). As a result, a lot of premium effects appear, and the effects can be enlivened. In addition, a sense of unity can be demonstrated.

(Button production execution lottery table: FIG. 77)
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a button effect execution lottery table according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the button effect execution lottery table, as shown in the figure, a lottery probability for determining whether or not to execute the button notice effect is defined according to the variation pattern type. In the example shown in the figure, the button notice effect is not executed in the case of 2R hit or small hit (it may be a low probability), and the button notice effect is greater in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. Is easier to execute. In addition, the characteristic point is that the probability of executing the button notice effect is higher in the case of “medium reach”, which has a lower expected expectation than the case of the type of reach production “strong reach”. Is a point. Thereby, the button notice effect and the execution expectation level of the predetermined reach effect (medium reach) can be associated with each other.

  Whether or not the button notice effect can be executed in consideration of the hold display mode (hold display mode effect data), character (character effect data), action mode (action effect data) at the time of disclosure determined in the previous lottery process. Can be determined. For example, when the premium hold display (present reservation display mode), premium character, premium action, and rainbow color of explosion smoke R have already been selected, the button notice effect can be configured not to be executed. If a certain effect has already been determined, even if a button notice effect that prompts the player to participate is displayed, most of the players are only annoyed and there is little need to execute the button notice effect. Because.

(Additional effect execution lottery table: FIG. 78)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an additional effect execution lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention. The additional effect execution lottery table 1 in FIG. 78A is used to determine whether or not to execute the “lightning effect (see FIG. 41D)” described in the fourth effect example in FIG. It is a lottery table, and the additional effect execution lottery table 2 of FIG. 78 (B) determines whether or not to execute the “directional lightning effect (FIG. 45 (J))” described in the seventh effect example of FIG. It is a lottery table used for doing.

(Additional effect execution lottery table 1: FIG. 78 (A))
In the additional effect execution lottery table 1, as shown in the figure, a lottery probability for determining whether or not to execute the “lightning effect” associated with the explosion R is defined according to the variation pattern type.

  Here, the “lightning effect” determined by the additional effect execution lottery table 1 in FIG. 78A is a specific hold display expectation level (holding change expectation level or win expectation expectation) like “directional lightning effect”. Unlike the effect that suggests (degree)), it mainly suggests that there is a possibility that there is a holding display (actuation holding ball) having a high expectation degree in the all-holding display being concealed. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, when the additional effect execution lottery table 1 is used, whether or not the execution is possible is determined based on the variation pattern type. In addition, when there are a plurality of change target holds, the change pattern information having the highest winning expectation degree is used. Thereby, whether or not the lightning strike can be performed can be closely related to the degree of expectation. Further, even if the hold display mode does not change (when the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is the same as the current state before concealment), it is possible to indirectly suggest the degree of expectation of winning by lightning effect.

(Additional effect execution lottery table 2: FIG. 78 (B))
In the additional effect execution lottery table 2, as shown in the drawing, a lottery probability for determining whether or not to execute the “directional lightning effect” is defined according to the hold display mode type at the time of disclosure. . Further, in the additional effect execution lottery table 2, it is determined that the execution probability of the directional lightning effect is higher as the win-winning expectation degree of the hold display mode type at the time of disclosure is higher.

  Here, the “directional lightning effect” determined in the additional effect execution lottery table 2 in FIG. 78 (B) is different from the “lightning effect” in FIG. This is an effect that suggests (notifies) the expectation level (holding change expectation level or winning winning expectation level). Therefore, whether or not to execute the directional lightning effect, when there are a plurality of change target holds, a lottery is executed for all the change target holds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the hold display mode (hold display mode effect data) at the time of disclosure related to the change target hold, whether or not the directional lightning effect can be executed is selected by lottery and the directional lightning effect is executed. The effect data for specifying the change target hold to be executed is set. Thereby, the expectation degree (holding change expectation degree or winning winning expectation degree) of the hold icon where the lightning strike image is located or the hold icon indicated by the lightning strike image is suggested.

  Next, effect data corresponding to each lottery result in the lottery processing in steps S674 to S676 is set (step S677). When the button notice execution effect is executed by the button effect execution lottery, the button effect execution flag is set to the ON state. Here, since it is described that this is the first action, the effect data set here is set as the effect content corresponding to the first action effect. When there are a plurality of actions, the lottery process of steps S674 to S676 is executed for the number of actions, and the production data corresponding to the number of actions is set.

  Next, 1 is added to the number of lottery target actions (step S679). Then, the number of lottery target actions after the addition is compared with the number of actions set in the process of step S672. When the number of lottery target actions after the addition is greater than the number of actions (step S679: YES), it is determined that the lottery process for the number of actions has been completed (steps S674 to S678), and the action effect mode lottery process is exited. Then, the process returns to the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21). However, when the number of lottery target actions after the addition is smaller than the number of actions (step S679: NO), the lottery process for the number of actions has not been completed yet, the process returns to step S674, and the processes of steps S674 to S678 are performed. Execute.

(16-7. Disclosure effect mode lottery processing: FIG. 29)
Next, the disclosure effect mode lottery process performed in the special reservation change notice content lottery process (step S613) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the disclosed effect mode lottery process of FIG. In this disclosure effect mode lottery process, the disclosure effect mode (for example, see FIG. 79 described later) when disclosing the hold display is mainly determined by lottery.

  In FIG. 29, the CPU 241 first acquires the “number of actions” set in the process of step S664 (step S672). Here, the acquired action count is set, and “1” is set as the lottery target action count. The number of lottery target actions is for executing disclosure effect processing (steps S693 to S696 described later) corresponding to the number of actions, and when this step S660 is executed for the first time, this time is the first time. “1” that designates an action is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of actions is a plurality of times (step S691). If the number of actions is not a plurality of times, if the number of actions is one (step S691: NO), the process proceeds to step S693. If the number of actions is a plurality of times (step S691: YES), the suspension at the time of disclosure A display mode (pending display mode effect data) is acquired, and an effect scenario (pending display effect scenario at the time of action disclosure) related to the hold display mode disclosed every time a disclosure effect is executed is created and set.

  The above-described “action disclosure on-hold display effect scenario” will be described with a specific example. For example, the number of actions is 3 (when the concealment effect and the disclosure effect are repeated three times), and the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is “special pattern hold” (display mode level “7” in FIG. 72 (B)) Refer to the column on the eye). In this case, since it is “special pattern hold” that is finally displayed, it is preferable that the first and second disclosures be displayed in a hold color with a relatively low win-winning expectation. More preferably, the hold display mode in the second disclosure is displayed in the same or the hold color having a relatively higher win-winning expectation than the hold display mode in the first disclosure. Specifically, “blue hold (when the first action is disclosed) → blue hold (when the second action is disclosed) → special pattern hold (when the third action is disclosed)” or “blue hold (first action is disclosed)” “At the time of disclosure) → Yellow hold (at the time of the second action disclosure) → Special pattern hold (at the time of the third action release)”.

  In this way, when the concealment effect and the disclosure effect are repeated a plurality of times, the disclosure effect is executed by disclosing in the reserved color having a lower winning expectation than the hold display mode disclosed in the final action. Each time, the player's sense of winning can be raised. Further, when the variation pattern type related to the change target hold corresponding to the hold display mode effect data is a hit change pattern, in the middle of a series of disclosure effects, the hold color with a high winning expectation is changed to a low hold color ( For example, a contradiction effect such as green hold at the first disclosure, blue hold at the second disclosure, etc. may be displayed to give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Next, a disclosure effect mode lottery table (FIG. 79) is acquired (step S693), and a disclosure effect mode lottery process is performed (step S694). In this disclosure effect mode lottery process, the disclosure effect mode lottery table is referred to, and in the case of the disclosure effect, it is determined by lottery about which disclosure mode to disclose the confidential hold display.

(Disclosure effect mode lottery table: FIG. 79)
FIG. 79 shows a disclosure effect aspect lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in the figure, six types of disclosure modes can be selected in the “disclosure effect mode lottery table”, and a plurality of types of disclosure modes can be selected as “high and low expected wins” and “number of pending displays”. It is established in association. First, these disclosed aspects will be briefly described.

  In the present embodiment, “hold display simultaneous disclosure”, “oldest hold priority sequential disclosure”, “latest hold priority sequential disclosure”, “expectation low hold priority sequential disclosure”, “expectation high hold priority sequential disclosure”, and Six types of disclosure states of “random disclosure” can be selected.

(K-1) The “hold display simultaneous disclosure” is a hold display simultaneous disclosure effect in which the concealed hold icons are disclosed all at once as described above.
(K-2) “The oldest hold priority sequential disclosure” is an effect mode in which the oldest winning order is disclosed (disclosed in order from the hold display section a1 or b1). When the game execution hold K is kept secret, the hold display K is disclosed in order.
(K-3) “Latest priority priority sequential disclosure” is disclosed contrary to the “oldest priority order sequential disclosure”, that is, the latest winning order is disclosed (the pending display section) (It is disclosed in order from a4 or b4). If the game execution hold K is kept secret, the hold display K is disclosed last.
(K-4) “Expectation low hold priority sequential disclosure” is an effect mode in which the display is started from the hold display with the lowest expected winning expectation among all the concealment displays that are concealed. The selection of “pending display with the lowest expected winning expectation” is selected based on the variation pattern information for all holding display. At this time, when there are a plurality of the same winning expectation degrees, if they are the same hold display mode, they may be disclosed randomly or may be disclosed in the winning order, but these may be different hold display modes. For example, the hold display in the normal hold display mode is disclosed with priority over the dedicated hold display mode. In addition, when there are a plurality of dedicated hold display modes having the same winning expectation degree, the reserved display of the dedicated hold display mode having a relatively low expected win expectation level is preferentially disclosed. For example, in the case where the hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to d1 when disclosed are “white hold (5%), white hold (10%), blue hold (10%), blue hold (15%)” ( The parentheses indicate the winning expectation previously associated with the variation pattern), first the hold display part a1 is disclosed first, then the hold display part b1 is disclosed, and then the blue color of the hold display part c1 The hold is disclosed, and finally the blue hold of the hold display part d1 is disclosed. In addition, when comparing the winning winning expectation degree between each holding display, it may be compared at the display mode level, or compared with the winning winning expectation predetermined for the variation pattern or the holding display mode. Also good.
(K-5) “High-expected degree of priority prioritized disclosure” is an effect that is disclosed according to the law opposite to the above-mentioned “low-priority expected-priority sequential disclosure”. For example, in the case where the hold icons of the hold display portions a1 to d1 when disclosed are “white hold (5%), white hold (10%), blue hold (10%), blue hold (15%)” First, the hold display part d1 is disclosed first, then the hold display part c1 is disclosed, then the blue hold of the hold display part b1 is disclosed, and finally the blue hold of the hold display part a1 is disclosed.
(K-6) “Random disclosure” is an effect mode in which all concealed displays that are concealed are disclosed at random.

  The above (K-2) to (K-6) are disclosure effects belonging to the “hold display sequential disclosure effect (fourth effect example (FIGS. 39 to 40)). A plurality of types of pending display sequential disclosure effects with different disclosure time intervals can be provided for the pending display sequential disclosure effects described in (K-4), for example, the disclosure interval time is short (first predetermined time). : For example, a first hold display sequential disclosure effect that is 100 ms) and a second hold display sequential disclosure effect that has a longer disclosure interval time (second predetermined time: 300 ms, for example). Which disclosure effect to use can be determined by lottery.

  In the “disclosure effect mode lottery table”, as shown in the drawing, the lottery probability of the disclosure effect differs depending on whether or not the hold display number is a predetermined number, and when the same hold display number The lottery probabilities of the disclosure effects differ according to the expected winning degree related to the hold display. In the following, for the convenience of explanation, when the number of held displays is “game held hold K + 3 or less held balls”, that is, less than the maximum stored memory number, a hold display with a high winning expectation level (high expectation hold display) is displayed. The case where it exists is referred to as a “first pre-disclosure state”, and the case where there is no pending display with a high degree of winning expectation is called a “second pre-disclosure state”. In addition, when the number of held displays is “game-held held K + 4 active held balls”, that is, when the maximum number of held memories is present, a case where there is a held display with a high expected winning expectation is referred to as a “pre-third disclosure state”. A case where there is no pending display with a high degree of expectation of winning is called a “fourth pre-disclosure state”.

  The disclosure effect mode lottery table of the present embodiment has the following characteristics. First, in any pre-disclosure state, the probability that “pending display simultaneous disclosure” is selected is determined to be the highest. This is because the display of the hold display is more effective than the continuous display of the hold display, and the impact is more effective in producing the effect. It depends on the reasons that can be done.

  Secondly, in the case of the third disclosure state or the fourth pre-disclosure state with a relatively large number of pending displays, the “hold display simultaneous disclosure” is less than the second disclosure state or the third pre-disclosure state. The probability that “is selected” is set to be relatively high. This is because the greater the number of pending displays, the stronger the impact when being simultaneously disclosed.

  Third, in the case of the first pre-disclosure state or the third pre-disclosure state in which a high expectation hold display is present, the second pre-disclosure state or the fourth pre-disclosure state in which no high expectation hold display is present, It is determined so that the probability of selecting “expected low priority priority sequential disclosure” is increased. This is because if there is a high expectation hold display, it is possible to gradually raise the player's win expectation and tension by gradually disclosing the hold display with the low winning expectation expectation. is there. Further, since the player is not given a feeling that the winning expectation level is lowered unlike “high expectation hold priority sequential disclosure”, the reliability of the special hold change notice can be improved. However, “high-expectation high priority priority sequential disclosure” is not without its advantages. In the case of “expected high hold priority sequential disclosure”, it is possible to promptly notify the high expectation hold display, which is suitable for a player who wants to know the high expectation hold display quickly, such as an advanced gamer. is there.

  Note that, in the first pre-disclosure state or the third pre-disclosure state, the hold display mode at the time of disclosure is a high expectation hold display that boasts the highest win-winning expectation (for example, the hold color “rainbow color” or the icon “imaginary boat” Etc .: see FIG. 72 (B)), it may be configured so that “expected low hold priority sequential disclosure” is always selected.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29, when the disclosure effect aspect lottery process in step S694 is completed, effect data (disclosure state effect data) for designating the determined disclosure aspect is set based on the lottery result (step S695). ). Here, since it is described that this is the first action, the effect data set here is set as the effect content corresponding to the first action effect. Also, here, when the button effect execution flag is set to ON by the button effect execution lottery (step S675 in FIG. 28), the frame effect button 13 is operated, and the other cases are not performed. Disclosure mode data (presentation data for disclosure effect at the time of operation and effect data for disclosure effect at the time of non-operation) are created and set (for example, effect data for the tenth effect example (see FIG. 49)). Thereby, for example, when there is a button announcement effect, when the player operates the frame effect button 13, the disclosure effect determined by the disclosure effect mode lottery is executed and a hold change occurs. When the button is not operated, the change in hold does not occur, and the disclosure effect that the hold display mode before concealment is displayed as it is can be executed.

  Next, 1 is added to the number of lottery target actions (step S696). Then, the number of lottery target actions after the addition is compared with the number of actions set in the process of step S690 (step S697). If the number of lottery target actions after the addition is greater than the number of actions (step S697: YES), it is determined that the lottery process for the number of actions has been completed (the processes of steps S693 to S697). Then, the process returns to the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21). However, when the number of lottery target actions after the addition is smaller than the number of actions (step S697: NO), the lottery process for the number of actions has not been completed yet, the process returns to step S693, and the processes of steps S693 to S697 are performed. Execute.

(16-8. Special hold change notice scenario setting process: FIG. 30)
Next, the special hold change notice scenario setting process (step S615) performed during the special hold change notice effect setting process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the special hold change notice scenario setting process performed during the special hold change notice effect setting process in FIG.

  In FIG. 30, the CPU 241 first executes each lottery process (each lottery process in FIGS. 22 to 29, a start timing lottery process (not shown)) executed in the special pending change notice content lottery process (step S613 in FIG. 21). The effect data set in the end effect mode setting process (not shown) is acquired (step S1001).

  Next, a special reservation change notice effect scenario is created based on the acquired effect data, and the scenario data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 (step S1003). Here, based on the effect data acquired in step S1001, an effect scenario for special hold change notice is created. However, if it is necessary to incorporate the button notice effect in the effect scenario, a scenario incorporating the disclosed effect at the time of operation (see FIGS. 49 (G1) to (F1)) is created as a basic scenario and A disclosure effect (see FIGS. 49 (G2) to (F2)) is created as a special scenario.This special scenario is a disclosure effect at the time of operation related to the basic scenario when the frame effect button 13 is operated. As a result, in response to the operation of the frame effect button 13, a special hold change notice effect scenario including a disclosed effect at the time of operation or a disclosed effect at the time of non-operation is executed (for example, , Step S1204 in FIG. 34).

  Next, an effect scenario (special scenario) for special hold change notice for change straddling is created, and the scenario data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 (step S1007). In this special scenario, for example, as shown in the twelfth effect example in FIG. 50, during execution of the special hold change notice, the special hold change notice is continuously executed even after the change stride, that is, the shift display occurs. This is an effect scenario created on the assumption that, when an execution state of fluctuation straddling occurs, the scenario being executed is used by appropriately replacing the special scenario. Thus, the special hold change notice scenario setting process is exited, and the series of effect processes of the special hold change notice effect setting process shown in FIG.

(16-4. Gimmick interlock button notice setting process: FIG. 33)
Next, the gimmick interlock button notice setting process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of the gimmick interlock button notice effect setting process in the special notice effect setting process (step S121) in FIG. In FIG. 33, the same processing content as that described in the special hold change notice effect setting in FIG. 21 will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication. Also, in the explanation during the gimmick-linked button notice effect setting process of FIG. 33, for convenience of explanation, unless particularly necessary, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation or the prefetch fluctuation pattern is simply referred to as “fluctuation pattern”.

  In this gimmick interlock button notice setting process, the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) first determines whether or not a special hold change notice execution prohibition condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not a special hold change notice can be executed (execution). Whether or not the production situation is suitable for the performance) (step S1101).

  The case where “it is not possible to execute” is, for example, a predetermined number or more of existing operation holding balls (in this embodiment, it is a condition that there are two or more operation holding balls: see FIG. 69). Or not. This is because the production effect is enhanced when there are many hold displays than when there are few hold displays. In addition, it corresponds to whether or not the current game state (game state) is a prefetch prohibition state, whether or not an effect suitable for execution of the gimmick interlock button notice is being executed.

  The above-mentioned “production not suitable for executing the gimmick-linked button notice” means, for example, a notice effect with a relatively high expectation of winning winning (for example, a strong reach effect such as reach 6 or reach 7 or a premium effect) In addition, a specific notice effect (a notice effect with a high winning expectation, a cut-in notice effect, another button notice effect, etc.), a special hold change notice, or the like related to the symbol variation display game is applicable. If such a notice effect is present or is scheduled to appear, if a gimmick-linked button notice (FIGS. 54 to 58) is displayed, the gimmick-linked button notice and the notice effect are duplicated. There is a possibility of appearing. As a result, problems such as the player not being able to enjoy the high-anticipation performance at the corner, or confusion of the player due to the occurrence of a duplicate announcement performance, are lost, and the significance of the corner-direction announcement performance is lost. This is because there is a possibility that attention to the performance may be dispersed, and there is a problem that the player's gaming interest may be lowered.

  In addition, it is preferable to define execution prohibition conditions for the gimmick-linked button notice resulting from the presentation time of the gimmick-linked button notice. Specifically, a case where a hit game (a big hit game or a small hit game) is started before the gimmick-linked button notice ends. This is because if the player enters the winning game during the special hold change notice, the effect of the winning game will be reduced. Further, depending on the start timing of the special hold change notice, for example, as shown in the production example 12 shown in FIG. 50, the current symbol variation display game is ended and the next symbol variation display game is started. There may be a case where the notice is executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. In such a case, a problem arises when there are two existing action-pending balls and the current (in process) symbol variation display game is just before the end. In this case, during execution of the gimmick interlock button notice, the operation hold ball is digested and the next symbol variation display game is started, that is, the hold display becomes one. In such a case, even if the gimmick-linked button notice is executed, the effect of the production is diminished. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to prohibit the execution of the special hold change notice if it is not equal to or longer than the presentation time width of the time width gimmick interlock button notice until the end of the current symbol variation display game.

  Also, if the gimmick-linked button notice is executed continuously in a short period of time, the real pleasure as an important notice effect is lost. Therefore, after executing the present gimmick interlock button notice, at least the maximum reserved memory number (for example, the maximum reserved memory number of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 four times or the total maximum reserved memory number of the special symbols 1 and 2) 8), the execution of the gimmick interlock button notice can be prohibited. Instead of prohibiting the maximum number of reserved memories, it may be prohibited for the number of existing stored memories when the gimmick interlock button notice is executed.

  In this way, by confirming whether or not the situation is suitable for execution of the gimmick-linked button notice, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the special hold change notice and other effects, and to suppress the decline of the game entertainment interest. Or suppressing a sense of incongruity.

  If the gimmick-linked button notice can be executed or is suitable for execution (step S1101: YES), a random number for gimmick-linked button notice is acquired as a production random number (step S1103).

  Next, information necessary for executing the present gimmick-linked button notice is acquired (command information acquisition process: step S1105). Here, it is necessary for the execution lottery (step S1109 to be described later) of the present gimmick-linked button notice from information obtained when various commands are received, for example, variation pattern information, winning type information, prefetch variation pattern information, and the like. Information is obtained. Thereby, the information required for executing the hold change notice for all or part of the existing operation hold ball and game execution hold K is acquired.

  Next, a gimmick-linked button notice effect execution lottery table is acquired (step S1107), and based on the gimmick-linked button notice effect execution lottery table, an execution lottery of gimmick-linked button notice is performed (step S1109). This gimmick interlock button notice effect execution lottery table includes the number of hold displays (in this embodiment, the game hold K and the number of existing action hold memories) and change pattern information (changes at the start of change) at the time of the gimmick interlock button notice execution. This is a table used to determine whether or not to perform a gimmick interlock button notice based on pattern information or prefetch variation pattern information). An example of this gimmick interlock button notice effect execution lottery table is shown in FIG.

(Gimmic interlocking button notice effect execution lottery table: FIG. 80)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a gimmick-linked button notice effect execution lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention. The configuration of the gimmick-linked button notice effect execution lottery table according to the present embodiment is substantially the same as the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. The lottery table and the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table differ only in whether they are used in cases where a gimmick-linked button notice is executed or in cases where a special hold change notice is executed. . However, in the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table of FIG. 69, execution probabilities corresponding to a plurality of hold indications (a plurality of operation hold balls) are prescribed, but in the gimmick interlock button notice effect execution lottery table, game execution is performed. The difference is that execution probabilities corresponding to the number of active holding balls 1 to the maximum holding memory number are defined, including the case where only the medium holding K exists. In other words, the special hold change notice can be executed only when there are a plurality of hold indications (operation hold balls), while the gimmick interlock button notice can be executed if at least one hold indication is present. There are some differences. Since the other points are substantially the same as the contents of the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table, details regarding the illustrated gimmick-linked button notice effect execution lottery table are shown in the special hold change notice effect setting process of FIG. (Refer to step S607 to step S609 during the special hold change notice effect setting process in FIG. 21), and the description is omitted here to avoid duplication.

  Next, the execution lottery result in step S1109 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the gimmick interlock button notice is executed (step S1111). When the gimmick interlocking button notice is not executed (step S1111: NO), this gimmick interlocking notice effect setting process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the gimmick interlock button notice is executed (step S1111: YES), the gimmick interlock button notice content lottery process is executed (step S1113). In this gimmick interlock button notice content lottery process, the effect content (direction scenario) regarding the gimmick interlock button notice is determined. This gimmick interlock button notice content lottery process is mainly configured with the following effect processes (A) to (F) as effect processes for realizing the gimmick interlock button notice. The contents of each effect process are as follows.

(A. Start timing setting process)
(1) First, in the first process “start timing setting process”, the start timing of the gimmick interlock button notice is determined. The contents of the start timing setting process are substantially the same as the contents of the start timing setting process regarding the special hold change notice.

(B. Button notice lottery process)
In the second process, “button notice lottery process”, it is determined whether or not the button notice effect will appear after the person gimmick 93 by the sign effect is activated. Specifically, it is a lottery process related to “gimmic interlocking button notice gaze effect” such that the button notice effect after the sign effect is not displayed even though the gimmick interlock button notice execution lottery is won (executable). Whether or not to make a gaze effect is determined by the lottery probability according to the variation pattern information and / or the number of held display. When determining based on the variation pattern information, the variation pattern having the highest expectation of winning winning is selected from the variation pattern information related to the operation suspension ball (which may include the game running suspension K), and the lottery is selected based on the variation pattern information. It can be carried out. For example, the fluctuation pattern information having a lower expected winning expectation can be given a tendency to increase the probability of occurrence of a frustration. In addition, the smaller the number of on-hold displays, the higher the probability of occurrence of a fray. It should be noted that the raffle probability can be determined as appropriate.

  If it is determined in this button notice lottery process that the gasse effect is to be executed, the following four processes (item lottery process to action effect mode lottery process) are not executed, and the process proceeds to the next step S1115. At this time, as the effect scenario of the gaze effect, for example, an effect that only the sign effect that the person gimmick 93 operates in a predetermined operation pattern is executed and nothing happens thereafter is executed. On the other hand, when the gaze effect is not executed, the following four processes (item lottery process to change mode lottery process) are executed to determine various contents of the effect required for displaying the gimmick interlock button notice.

(C. Change target hold lottery process)
In the third process “change target hold lottery process”, one or a plurality of hold displays (hold icons) to be held change targets, that is, “change target hold” is determined. As a result, the hold display to be changed is specified in the present gimmick interlock button notice, and when the pitch N3 hits in the change display form lottery process described later, the hold display is changed to any hold display form. Whether to change is decided. In addition, as a process in the case of selecting a change target hold, a lottery process similar to the change target hold lottery process (see step S613 (FIGS. 22 to 24) in FIG. 21) executed in the special hold change notice effect setting process. It can be performed. Specifically, the target can be selected based on the variation pattern information corresponding to each hold display with reference to the hold change execution lottery table in FIG.

(D. Change display mode lottery process)
In the fourth process, “change display mode lottery process”, the final display mode of the change target hold is determined by lottery. Specifically, the hold display mode (the hold display mode at the time of disclosure) that is finally derived and displayed as the effect result of the gimmick interlock button notice is determined. Therefore, for example, as in the seventh effect example related to the special hold change notice (see FIGS. 44 to 45), a form in which the concealment effect and the disclosure effect are repeated a plurality of times during one special hold change notice. In the case of making it appear, the hold display mode to be disclosed and displayed at the time of the final disclosure effect is designated. This change display mode lottery process may be determined by a lottery process similar to the change display mode lottery process (FIG. 25) in the special hold change notice effect setting process (FIG. 21).

(E. Action effect mode lottery process)
In the “action effect mode lottery process”, which is the fifth process, the content of the effect of the gimmick-linked button notice effect (operational gimmick-linked effect) is mainly determined. Here, based on the fluctuation pattern information, “item lottery process” for determining what type of projectile N3 (flame bullet) is to appear, and which person gimmick 93 is linked to the appearance of the projectile N3 A “gimmic motion lottery process” is performed to determine whether or not to operate in such an operation pattern.

  In the “item lottery process”, the type of the projectile N3 is determined by lottery based on the variation pattern information (the expected win rate), and the appearance number of the projectile N3 is determined. Specifically, regarding the display form of the projectile N3 (for example, the display color of the flame bullet), any one of a plurality of display colors associated with the variation pattern information (winning winning expectation) related to the hold display is selected. Is determined by lottery. Similarly, for the number of shots of the projectile N3 (the number of flame bullets appearing), a plurality of types of projectile numbers (for example, 1 ( The number of normal shots: low expectation level, 3 (intermediate shot number: medium expectation level), 5 (maximum number of shots: high expectation level)) is selected by lottery. Here, for the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that the display color of the projecting body N3 is “white” as a normal color, “green” as a dedicated color, and “red”, which has a higher expectation of winning than “green”. explain.

  The display colors of the flame bullets are determined such that the lottery probability of “green, red” increases in the order of “weak reach, medium reach, strong reach” in the variation pattern. For example, in the case of “weak reach”, “white 70%, green 20%, red 10% (high white selectivity)”, and in the case of “medium reach” “white 40%, green 45%, red 15% In the case of “(high green selectivity)” and “strong reach”, it can be defined as “white 25%, green 35%, red 40% (high red selectivity)”. In the case of a strong reach or hit variation pattern, it can be determined that normal white color is not selected. In the case of a hit variation pattern, a lottery may be selected including the rainbow-colored correct display color. In addition, the number of shots of the above-mentioned flame bombs is determined so that the lottery probability of “3, 5” having a high expectation level increases in the order of “weak reach, medium reach, strong reach”. For example, in the case of “weak reach”, “1 70%, 3 20%, 5 10%”, and in the case of “medium reach”, “1 50%, 3 30%, 5” In the case of “20%” and “strong reach”, it can be determined as “white 40%, green 35%, red 25%”. In the case of a strong reach or hit variation pattern, it can be determined that a normal one is not selected. In the case of the hit variation pattern, a lottery including a premium number of shots (the number of accurate shots: for example, 7) may be selected. As a result, it is possible to associate the winning expectation degree with respect to a specific image other than the hold display, and therefore, it is possible to give a guessing element of the winning expectation degree to the player.

  In the “gimmic motion lottery process”, the motion pattern (arm swing motion pattern) of the movable part (for example, the arm 94) of the person gimmick 93 is determined based on the variation pattern information. For example, the lottery probability of the “flashy arm swinging motion pattern (hereinafter referred to as“ dedicated motion pattern ”)” increases in the order of the fluctuation pattern “weak reach, medium reach, strong reach”. For example, in the case of “weak reach”, “normal operation pattern 70%, dedicated operation pattern 30%”, and in the case of “medium reach”, “normal operation pattern 50%, dedicated operation pattern 50%”, “strong reach” In this case, “normal operation pattern 30%, dedicated operation pattern 70%” can be determined.

In addition, when there are a plurality of change target holds, which variation pattern information is used for the lottery is determined as follows in the same manner as described in the special hold change notice effect execution lottery table of FIG. Can do.
(A-2) Among pre-reading fluctuation pattern information related to each change target hold (in the case of game execution hold K, it may be a change pattern at the start of the change), the action holding ball having the highest expected win probability The prefetch fluctuation pattern information related to is used. In addition, when all the winning expectation degrees are the same, selection can be made as in the following (B-2) to (C-2).
(B-2) Prefetch variation pattern information related to the latest or oldest hold display is used.
(C-2) Among the acquired prefetch fluctuation pattern information, which prefetch fluctuation pattern information is to be used is randomly selected.
(D-2) On-hold storage order or execution order of the symbol variation display game (in the case of the priority variation type, priority is given to the on-hold storage of the special diagram on the priority variation side. In the case of this embodiment, the special diagram 2 side has priority) Predetermined selection rate (for example, when the number of balls held is four, “first (oldest) (10%) <second (20%) <third (30%) <fourth (latest) (40%) "and vice versa.

(F. Other effects content setting process)
In the “other effect content setting process” as the sixth process, other effects necessary for the appearance of the gimmick-linked button notice are determined based on the effect data information determined in each process described above. For example, for the gimmick-linked button notice effect, the projectile N3 is in response to the hold display (hold icon) of “change target hold (target)” (if it is off the target (in case of “gase” that does not change the hold display), (Including the erroneous explosion effect of FIG. 58), or the effect mode for moving and displaying the movement (for example, FIG. 54 (C), FIG. 55 (C) to (F), FIG. 56 (C)) To (E), FIG. 57 (C), FIG. 58 (C), etc.), the landing effect (for example, FIG. 54 (D) when the projecting body N3 reaches (holds, hits) its hold display (target) ), FIG. 55 (E) (F), FIG. 56 (F), FIG. 57 (D), etc.). When a telop display effect appears, it is determined what kind of message (for example, as a special game information, a chance ?, a chance !, a continuation!

  When each lottery process (step S1113) is executed and each effect content (the effect mode for constructing the effect scenario of the gimmick-linked button notice is determined), then the effect determined by each lottery process described above Based on the data, an effect scenario for the present gimmick-linked button notice is created and set in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243 (gimmy-linked button notice effect scenario setting process: step S1115). This gimmick-linked button notice is started at the timing to be executed, and the gimmick-linked button notice notice setting process is performed. Since the content is substantially the same as the processing, the description thereof will be omitted. Ri, to end the effect process on the gimmick conjunction button prior notice, exits this gimmick interlocking button advance notification effect setting process.

(16-2-2. Operation Detection Signal Reception Processing: FIG. 34)
Next, processing related to the button notice effect will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing details of the operation detection signal reception process.

  In this operation detection signal reception process, the CPU 241 first checks whether or not it is the input reception valid period of the frame effect button 13 (step S1201). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the player is requested to operate the frame effect button 13. If it is not the input acceptance valid period (step S1201: NO), the operation detection signal reception process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is the input reception valid period (step S1201: YES), the CPU 241 confirms whether or not a gimmick-linked button notice is currently being executed (step S1203). When the gimmick-linked button notice is not currently being executed (step S1203: NO), the effect processing related to other button notice effects (for example, the button notice effect related to the special hold change notice: the tenth effect example (see FIG. 48)) is performed. Execute (step up 1204). Here, for the effects related to the button notice effect other than the gimmick-linked button notice, an effect scenario according to whether or not the frame effect button 13 is operated is set.

  On the other hand, when the gimmick interlock button notice is currently being executed (step S1203: YES), the gimmick interlock button notice setting process is executed (step S1205). In this process, an effect process when a button operation is performed is executed in accordance with the gimmick interlock button notice scenario. Here, an effect scenario according to the presence / absence of operation of the frame effect button 13 is set for the effect related to the button notice effect related to the gimmick-linked button notice. Note that if the number of operations is set to 1 according to the scenario, the input acceptance valid period is set to the invalid period, whereas if it is set to multiple times, the input acceptance valid period is set to the scenario. Continue until the end of the period.

(Example of gimmick-linked button notice scenario: Fig. 81)
FIG. 81 shows an example of a gimmick interlock button notice scenario according to the present embodiment. The effect scenario shown in FIG. 81 shows an outline of the scenario, and it is a matter of course that other effect contents are also included. In the drawing, the above-mentioned gimmick interlock button notice effect content lottery process (step S1113 in FIG. 30) is configured so that at least an effect scenario for causing the gimmick effect examples shown in FIGS. 54 to 58 to appear can be set.

  In the production scenario in which “No” is set for the “Button Appearance” field shown in the figure, after the indication effect by the person gimmick 93, the “Gase Effect” in which the button notice effect does not appear is executed, and “Yes” is set. In the effect scenario to be set, after the sign effect by the person gimmick 93, a “button notice effect” in which a button image appears is executed. In the illustrated scenario example, the production scenario in which “none” is set is “Gase production”, but the “player non-participation production (gimmic-linked announcement production)” described above in which no button notice production appears. It is good also as a structure which makes it appear.

  The “number” column of the “item image” shown in the drawing indicates the number of projectiles N3 (flame bullets) in the action effect. In the effect scenario in which “1” is set, the frame effect button 13 is displayed. When an operation (one-time operation or continuous hitting operation) is performed, an effect in which only one item image appears is executed. On the other hand, in the production scenario in which “multiple” or “7” is set, the upper limit number (for example, one, three, etc.) is selected according to the operation (one time operation or repeated operation) of the frame effect buttons 13. (5, 7) The effect that the item image appears is executed.

  The “display color” column of the “item image” in the figure shows the display mode of the projectile N3 (flame bullet). In the production scenario in which “white” is set, the white flame that is the normal color is displayed. An effect in which a bullet appears is executed. In an effect scenario in which “green” or “red” is set, an effect in which at least a green or red item image appears is executed.

  Further, the “throwing target” field of “item image” relates to whether or not the projective body N3 hits the target, and in the production scenario in which “hold display” is set, at least one item image is displayed on hold. In an effect scenario in which an effect that hits (hold icon) is executed and “out of screen” is set, an effect in which the item image disappears outside the screen without hitting the hold display is executed. However, in the effect scenario in which “screen center” is set, an accidental explosion effect in which the item image erroneously explodes in the screen center area (decorative symbol variation display area) is executed (see, for example, the fifth gimmick effect example in FIG. 58).

  Next, the column of “the contents of the effect after the hit” shown in the figure relates to the hold display mode after the projectile N3 hits the target, and in the effect scenario in which “no change” is set, the hold display mode is In an effect scenario in which an effect that does not change is executed and “holding change” is set, an effect in which a change in hold occurs is executed. Also, in the production scenario in which “telop” is set, the telop display production by the erroneous explosion production is executed without causing the on-hold change.

  Next, the “change mode” column in the figure relates to the effect mode when the item image hits the hold display (hold icon), that is, the effect content of the landing effect. After changing to the concealment state, it includes a presentation state (the case of change on hold and the case of no change on hold (maintaining the hold display form before concealment) (the change modes 2 and 3 are also the same)), “change state 2 Is a production mode in which the target is not concealed, and “change mode 3” is disclosed after the on-screen display (on-hold icon) being displayed is concealed for a predetermined time by the smoke screen R when one of the targets is hit. It is the effect mode (FIG. 57) to be in a state.

(15. Fluctuation pattern designation command reception processing: FIG. 35)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S412 of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 35, when the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the variation pattern designation command, the content of the command is first analyzed (step S731), and the variation pattern information of the special symbol as the content is obtained, and the RAM 243 is obtained. Are stored in the variation pattern information storage area (variation pattern information storage area) (step S732). In the case of the present embodiment, the effect scenario during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this time, and is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received.

(16. Decoration design designation command analysis processing: FIG. 36)
Next, a decoration symbol designation command analysis process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a decorative design designation command is received. This decoration symbol designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S415 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. Here, based on the variation pattern information obtained by the variation pattern designation command reception process of FIG. 35 and the information (special symbol determination data information) obtained by the decorative symbol designation command, the effects (various symbols) in the symbol variation display game are displayed. Notice design), decorative symbol display modes (temporary stop symbols, reach symbols, stop decorative symbols, etc.) are determined, and an effect scenario related to the current variable display game is configured.

  In FIG. 36, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the contents of the decorative symbol designation command and acquires the contents (step S871).

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S872). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol (decoration) to be finally stopped based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732 and the winning type information included in the decorative symbol designation command The symbol stop symbol combination) is determined by lottery. For example, if the content of the variation pattern is a hit variation pattern designated for reach production and the winning type information is a 16R long release probability variation big hit, in order to determine the stop display mode of the decorative symbol related to the 16R long release probability variation big hit, First, the left symbol is determined by lottery, then the left symbol and the decorative symbol that can be reached are determined as the right symbol (determining the reach symbol), and based on the determined left symbol and right symbol, The middle symbol is determined so that the decorative symbol sequence (big hit symbol) related to the 16R long open probability change big hit is finally stopped. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined. The determined decorative symbol data is stored and used in the decorative symbol data storage area of the RAM 243.

  Next, lightning continuous notice effect setting processing is performed (step S873). In the lightning continuous notice effect setting process, if the lightning continuation notice is not executed based on the effect data related to the lightning continuation notice set in step S105 in the hold addition command analysis process of FIG. In the case where the lightning bolt continuous notice is executed, necessary setting processing is performed to make the lightning effect appear in the present symbol variation display game. Also, here, the value of the lightning effect execution counter set in the process of step S105 during the pending addition command analysis process of FIG. 20 is managed, and the value of the lightning effect execution counter is changed each time the symbol variation display game is performed. A subtraction process for subtracting 1 is performed. As a result, a lightning warning effect by the lightning image 365 appears until the action-reserved ball to be notified is digested or during the execution of the symbol variation display game.

  Next, special notice effect setting processing is performed (step S121). This special advance notice setting process is substantially the same as step S121 in the hold addition command analysis process of FIG. 20, and here, with the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, the special hold change notice or gimmick interlocking is performed. “Special hold change notice setting process (FIG. 21)” or “gimmic interlocking button notice process (FIG. 33)” is performed as to whether or not the button notice is executed or what kind of effect is to be used.

  Next, an effect process corresponding to the effect mode is performed (step S875: effect mode branching process). In the effect mode branch process in step S875, the effect scenario setting process (steps S876 to S880) corresponding to the current effect mode is called and executed. In these effect scenario setting processes, the effect mode (effect scenario) under each effect mode is determined based on the change pattern information at the start of change and / or the design information of the decorative design designation command. In each effect scenario setting process, the notice effect to be performed during the decoration symbol change display game to be performed this time is the change pattern information at the start of change obtained in the process of step S732 and the winning type information obtained in the process of step S873. And decide based on. For example, the effect data of the reach effect specified by the variation pattern information is set, or the notice effect is lottery based on the variation pattern information and / or the winning type information. In the case of a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, processing for determining a notification effect related to pseudo-variation is also performed based on a notice effect (such as reach effect type) related to the main variation, the number of pseudo-continuations, and the like. Thereby, the notice effect in the present symbol variation display game is realized. It is also possible to determine a notice effect as to what display mode changes the display mode of the pending K during game execution to what display mode.

  When the effect scenario setting process corresponding to the effect mode described above is finished, various setting processes required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game are performed (step S881). Here, various settings necessary for starting the decorative symbol variation display game, including a hold display shift process (hold display shift process) accompanying the digestion of the operation hold ball, are mainly performed. For example, based on the effect data determined in steps S873 to S880, an effect scenario that appears during the current decorative symbol variation display game is created, and this is generated in a predetermined area (corresponding scenario setting area) of the corresponding RAM 243. Store. In the hold display shift process, the hold display data storage area (hold 2 display data storage area, hold 3 display data storage area, hold 4 display data) corresponding to the hold display data n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4). The hold data stored in the storage area) is overwritten in the hold display data storage area corresponding to 'n-1', respectively, and an empty area is provided in the hold 4 display data storage area. Since the display scenario data for hold display is not stored in the hold display data storage area that is an empty area, in this case, the display display is not performed and the corresponding display location is displayed in the off state (for example, FIG. 5A, FIG. 5B, and FIG. 6). Thereby, the CPU 241 refers to the on-hold display effect scenario stored in the on-hold display data storage area, and performs an effect display in which the position of the existing on-hold display unit is shifted by one to the old storage position as a whole. At the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, the hold display expressing the state where the operation hold ball is digested is performed. Note that the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 243 is also stored in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the hold n prefetch information storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) in the same manner as the above-described shift processing of the hold display data storage area. The prefetch determination result information is overwritten in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to 'n-1', an empty area is provided in the hold 4 prefetch information storage area, and the next hold addition command is received. An area for storing the result information is secured.

  When the process of step S881 is completed, the decorative symbol designation command analysis process is exited, and thereafter, the decorative symbol variation display game according to the effect scenario is started.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a pachinko gaming machine using a game ball as a game medium has been described. However, the gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a revolving game machine that can use a game medal or a game ball may be used, or an electromagnetic recording (an electronic method, a magnetic method, or a recording that is not recognized by human perception) It may be a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium that uses a computer provided for information processing by an electronic computer). Further, as a gaming machine using a game medium using electromagnetic recording instead of a real game medal or a real game ball, for example, a so-called “enclosed game machine” may be used.

  The present invention is useful for a game machine using a game ball or a game medium corresponding thereto.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
38c LED display for holding complex display 39a Normal symbol display device,
39b Round number display device,
40, 50 Big prize opening,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42,52 Special variable prize device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 Speaker,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
71 Movable body accessory motor,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (3)

An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information triggered by the start means detecting a game ball;
Based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, lottery means for executing a lottery for winning;
A symbol display means for performing a symbol game by a game symbol variation display operation and deriving and displaying a lottery result by the lottery means;
Reservation storage means for reserving and storing the game information acquired by the acquisition means with a predetermined maximum retentive storage number as an upper limit until the game information is subjected to a variable display operation of the game symbol in the symbol display means;
Prefetch determination means for prefetching at least the lottery result by the lottery means before the game symbol variation display operation based on the hold memory is executed;
Movable directing means configured to be able to execute effects by movement;
Image display means configured to be able to display effects by image;
Based on a predetermined effect execution condition, using the movable effect means and the image display means, execution control of a special notice effect that can derive prefetch information related to the prefetch determination result by the prefetch determination means as an effect result is performed. A notice effect control means,
The special notice effect is
As the indication effect that suggests that there is a possibility that a special effect used for deriving the effect result may be displayed on the image display means, the indication operation effect in which the movable effect means operates in the first operation mode. A first production mode for executing
After the first effect mode, a second effect mode for displaying the special effect on the image display means;
A third effect mode that executes a result effect that derives the effect result using the special effect that appears in the second effect mode; and
A gaming machine characterized by that. The second rendering mode is
After the predictive action effect, the movable effect means operates in the second action mode, and the linked effect for displaying the special effect on the image display means in conjunction with the second action mode by the moveable effect means. It is configured to include a production mode to be executed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The special production is
A first special effect and a second special effect that has a relatively high derivation expectation degree in which the prefetch information is derived as the effect result than the first special effect,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2, wherein

Images